diff options
| author | Bruce Momjian | 2007-11-15 21:14:46 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Bruce Momjian | 2007-11-15 21:14:46 +0000 |
| commit | fdf5a5efb7b28c13085fe7313658de8d7b9914f6 (patch) | |
| tree | a75cf1422fa1eef4e801cf502b148d8ce1b5dfe7 | |
| parent | 3adc760fb92eab1a8720337a8bf9b66486609eb3 (diff) | |
pgindent run for 8.3.
486 files changed, 10078 insertions, 9698 deletions
diff --git a/contrib/cube/cube.c b/contrib/cube/cube.c index ec8cb72e3b..c57b9919c4 100644 --- a/contrib/cube/cube.c +++ b/contrib/cube/cube.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /****************************************************************************** - $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/cube/cube.c,v 1.33 2007/06/05 21:31:03 tgl Exp $ + $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/cube/cube.c,v 1.34 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ This file contains routines that can be bound to a Postgres backend and called by the backend in the process of processing queries. The calling @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ cube_subset(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[i + dim] = c->x[dx[i] + c->dim - 1]; } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ cube_out(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) appendStringInfoChar(&buf, ')'); } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(cube,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(cube, 0); PG_RETURN_CSTRING(buf.data); } @@ -381,20 +381,20 @@ g_cube_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); NDBOX *query = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(1); StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); - bool res; + bool res; /* * if entry is not leaf, use g_cube_internal_consistent, else use * g_cube_leaf_consistent */ if (GIST_LEAF(entry)) - res = g_cube_leaf_consistent( DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), - query, strategy); + res = g_cube_leaf_consistent(DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), + query, strategy); else - res = g_cube_internal_consistent( DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), - query, strategy); + res = g_cube_internal_consistent(DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key), + query, strategy); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(query,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(query, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -451,14 +451,15 @@ Datum g_cube_decompress(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - NDBOX *key = DatumGetNDBOX(PG_DETOAST_DATUM(entry->key)); + NDBOX *key = DatumGetNDBOX(PG_DETOAST_DATUM(entry->key)); if (key != DatumGetNDBOX(entry->key)) { GISTENTRY *retval = (GISTENTRY *) palloc(sizeof(GISTENTRY)); + gistentryinit(*retval, PointerGetDatum(key), - entry->rel, entry->page, - entry->offset, FALSE); + entry->rel, entry->page, + entry->offset, FALSE); PG_RETURN_POINTER(retval); } PG_RETURN_POINTER(entry); @@ -479,8 +480,8 @@ g_cube_penalty(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) double tmp1, tmp2; - ud = cube_union_v0( DatumGetNDBOX(origentry->key), - DatumGetNDBOX(newentry->key)); + ud = cube_union_v0(DatumGetNDBOX(origentry->key), + DatumGetNDBOX(newentry->key)); rt_cube_size(ud, &tmp1); rt_cube_size(DatumGetNDBOX(origentry->key), &tmp2); *result = (float) (tmp1 - tmp2); @@ -812,12 +813,12 @@ cube_union(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { NDBOX *a = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(0), *b = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(1); - NDBOX *res; + NDBOX *res; res = cube_union_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(res); } @@ -876,8 +877,9 @@ cube_inter(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) a->x[i + a->dim]), result->x[i + a->dim]); } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); + /* * Is it OK to return a non-null intersection for non-overlapping boxes? */ @@ -899,7 +901,7 @@ cube_size(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) for (i = 0, j = a->dim; i < a->dim; i++, j++) result = result * Abs((a->x[j] - a->x[i])); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(result); } @@ -1011,8 +1013,8 @@ cube_cmp(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_INT32(res); } @@ -1026,8 +1028,8 @@ cube_eq(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res == 0); } @@ -1041,8 +1043,8 @@ cube_ne(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res != 0); } @@ -1056,8 +1058,8 @@ cube_lt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res < 0); } @@ -1071,8 +1073,8 @@ cube_gt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res > 0); } @@ -1086,8 +1088,8 @@ cube_le(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res <= 0); } @@ -1101,8 +1103,8 @@ cube_ge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_cmp_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res >= 0); } @@ -1157,8 +1159,8 @@ cube_contains(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_contains_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -1173,8 +1175,8 @@ cube_contained(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_contains_v0(b, a); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -1234,8 +1236,8 @@ cube_overlap(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) res = cube_overlap_v0(a, b); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } @@ -1281,8 +1283,8 @@ cube_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) distance += d * d; } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b,1); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(b, 1); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(sqrt(distance)); } @@ -1317,7 +1319,7 @@ cube_is_point(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_BOOL(FALSE); } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); PG_RETURN_BOOL(TRUE); } @@ -1331,7 +1333,7 @@ cube_dim(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) c = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(0); dim = c->dim; - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_INT32(c->dim); } @@ -1350,7 +1352,7 @@ cube_ll_coord(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (c->dim >= n && n > 0) result = Min(c->x[n - 1], c->x[c->dim + n - 1]); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(result); } @@ -1369,7 +1371,7 @@ cube_ur_coord(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (c->dim >= n && n > 0) result = Max(c->x[n - 1], c->x[c->dim + n - 1]); - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(result); } @@ -1384,7 +1386,7 @@ cube_enlarge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) j, k; NDBOX *a; - double r; + double r; int4 n; a = PG_GETARG_NDBOX(0); @@ -1426,7 +1428,7 @@ cube_enlarge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[j] = r; } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(a, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } @@ -1490,7 +1492,7 @@ cube_c_f8(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[result->dim - 1] = x; result->x[2 * result->dim - 1] = x; - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } @@ -1521,6 +1523,6 @@ cube_c_f8_f8(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result->x[result->dim - 1] = x1; result->x[2 * result->dim - 1] = x2; - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(c, 0); PG_RETURN_NDBOX(result); } diff --git a/contrib/dblink/dblink.c b/contrib/dblink/dblink.c index 295a779772..dd5cfc7f86 100644 --- a/contrib/dblink/dblink.c +++ b/contrib/dblink/dblink.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Darko Prenosil <[email protected]> * Shridhar Daithankar <[email protected]> * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.65 2007/08/27 01:24:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.66 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * Copyright (c) 2001-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * ALL RIGHTS RESERVED; * @@ -256,10 +256,10 @@ dblink_connect(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) pfree(rconn); ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_S_R_E_PROHIBITED_SQL_STATEMENT_ATTEMPTED), - errmsg("password is required"), - errdetail("Non-superuser cannot connect if the server does not request a password."), - errhint("Target server's authentication method must be changed."))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_S_R_E_PROHIBITED_SQL_STATEMENT_ATTEMPTED), + errmsg("password is required"), + errdetail("Non-superuser cannot connect if the server does not request a password."), + errhint("Target server's authentication method must be changed."))); } } diff --git a/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c b/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c index 85d45491cc..5cc2111adc 100644 --- a/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c +++ b/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c,v 1.1 2007/10/15 21:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_int/dict_int.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -19,24 +19,25 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -typedef struct { - int maxlen; - bool rejectlong; -} DictInt; +typedef struct +{ + int maxlen; + bool rejectlong; +} DictInt; PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dintdict_init); -Datum dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dintdict_lexize); -Datum dintdict_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dintdict_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - DictInt *d; - ListCell *l; + List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + DictInt *d; + ListCell *l; d = (DictInt *) palloc0(sizeof(DictInt)); d->maxlen = 6; @@ -44,7 +45,7 @@ dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) foreach(l, dictoptions) { - DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); + DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); if (pg_strcasecmp(defel->defname, "MAXLEN") == 0) { @@ -62,22 +63,22 @@ dintdict_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) defel->defname))); } } - + PG_RETURN_POINTER(d); } Datum dintdict_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - DictInt *d = (DictInt*)PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - char *in = (char*)PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - char *txt = pnstrdup(in, PG_GETARG_INT32(2)); - TSLexeme *res=palloc(sizeof(TSLexeme)*2); + DictInt *d = (DictInt *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + char *txt = pnstrdup(in, PG_GETARG_INT32(2)); + TSLexeme *res = palloc(sizeof(TSLexeme) * 2); res[1].lexeme = NULL; - if (PG_GETARG_INT32(2) > d->maxlen) + if (PG_GETARG_INT32(2) > d->maxlen) { - if ( d->rejectlong ) + if (d->rejectlong) { /* reject by returning void array */ pfree(txt); diff --git a/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c b/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c index 1cd53a26bd..753886117d 100644 --- a/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c +++ b/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c,v 1.1 2007/10/15 21:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -24,29 +24,30 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; typedef struct { - char *key; /* Word */ - char *value; /* Unparsed list of synonyms, including the word itself */ + char *key; /* Word */ + char *value; /* Unparsed list of synonyms, including the + * word itself */ } Syn; typedef struct { - int len; - Syn *syn; + int len; + Syn *syn; - bool keeporig; + bool keeporig; } DictSyn; PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dxsyn_init); -Datum dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(dxsyn_lexize); -Datum dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); static char * find_word(char *in, char **end) { - char *start; + char *start; *end = NULL; while (*in && t_isspace(in)) @@ -71,12 +72,12 @@ compare_syn(const void *a, const void *b) } static void -read_dictionary(DictSyn *d, char *filename) +read_dictionary(DictSyn * d, char *filename) { - char *real_filename = get_tsearch_config_filename(filename, "rules"); - FILE *fin; - char *line; - int cur = 0; + char *real_filename = get_tsearch_config_filename(filename, "rules"); + FILE *fin; + char *line; + int cur = 0; if ((fin = AllocateFile(real_filename, "r")) == NULL) ereport(ERROR, @@ -86,9 +87,9 @@ read_dictionary(DictSyn *d, char *filename) while ((line = t_readline(fin)) != NULL) { - char *value; - char *key; - char *end = NULL; + char *value; + char *key; + char *end = NULL; if (*line == '\0') continue; @@ -130,9 +131,9 @@ read_dictionary(DictSyn *d, char *filename) Datum dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - DictSyn *d; - ListCell *l; + List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + DictSyn *d; + ListCell *l; d = (DictSyn *) palloc0(sizeof(DictSyn)); d->len = 0; @@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) foreach(l, dictoptions) { - DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); + DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(l); if (pg_strcasecmp(defel->defname, "KEEPORIG") == 0) { @@ -166,19 +167,19 @@ dxsyn_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - DictSyn *d = (DictSyn *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - int length = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); - Syn word; - Syn *found; - TSLexeme *res = NULL; + DictSyn *d = (DictSyn *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + char *in = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + int length = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); + Syn word; + Syn *found; + TSLexeme *res = NULL; if (!length || d->len == 0) PG_RETURN_POINTER(NULL); /* Create search pattern */ { - char *temp = pnstrdup(in, length); + char *temp = pnstrdup(in, length); word.key = lowerstr(temp); pfree(temp); @@ -186,7 +187,7 @@ dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* Look for matching syn */ - found = (Syn *)bsearch(&word, d->syn, d->len, sizeof(Syn), compare_syn); + found = (Syn *) bsearch(&word, d->syn, d->len, sizeof(Syn), compare_syn); pfree(word.key); if (!found) @@ -194,28 +195,28 @@ dxsyn_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* Parse string of synonyms and return array of words */ { - char *value = pstrdup(found->value); - int value_length = strlen(value); - char *pos = value; - int nsyns = 0; - bool is_first = true; + char *value = pstrdup(found->value); + int value_length = strlen(value); + char *pos = value; + int nsyns = 0; + bool is_first = true; res = palloc(0); - while(pos < value + value_length) + while (pos < value + value_length) { - char *end; - char *syn = find_word(pos, &end); + char *end; + char *syn = find_word(pos, &end); if (!syn) break; *end = '\0'; - res = repalloc(res, sizeof(TSLexeme)*(nsyns + 2)); + res = repalloc(res, sizeof(TSLexeme) * (nsyns + 2)); res[nsyns].lexeme = NULL; /* first word is added to result only if KEEPORIG flag is set */ - if(d->keeporig || !is_first) + if (d->keeporig || !is_first) { res[nsyns].lexeme = pstrdup(syn); res[nsyns + 1].lexeme = NULL; diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore.h b/contrib/hstore/hstore.h index 5ef18abd8e..48ec6e0648 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore.h +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore.h @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ typedef struct int comparePairs(const void *a, const void *b); int uniquePairs(Pairs * a, int4 l, int4 *buflen); -#define HStoreContainsStrategyNumber 7 -#define HStoreExistsStrategyNumber 9 +#define HStoreContainsStrategyNumber 7 +#define HStoreExistsStrategyNumber 9 #endif diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c b/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c index f6fab2b89d..144758f3cd 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c @@ -1,24 +1,24 @@ #include "hstore.h" -#include "access/gin.h" +#include "access/gin.h" -#define KEYFLAG 'K' -#define VALFLAG 'V' -#define NULLFLAG 'N' +#define KEYFLAG 'K' +#define VALFLAG 'V' +#define NULLFLAG 'N' PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(gin_extract_hstore); -Datum gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -static text* -makeitem( char *str, int len ) +static text * +makeitem(char *str, int len) { - text *item; + text *item; - item = (text*)palloc( VARHDRSZ + len + 1 ); + item = (text *) palloc(VARHDRSZ + len + 1); SET_VARSIZE(item, VARHDRSZ + len + 1); - if ( str && len > 0 ) - memcpy( VARDATA(item)+1, str, len ); + if (str && len > 0) + memcpy(VARDATA(item) + 1, str, len); return item; } @@ -26,37 +26,37 @@ makeitem( char *str, int len ) Datum gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0); - int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - Datum *entries = NULL; + HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0); + int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + Datum *entries = NULL; - *nentries = 2*hs->size; + *nentries = 2 * hs->size; - if ( hs->size > 0 ) + if (hs->size > 0) { - HEntry *ptr = ARRPTR(hs); - char *words = STRPTR(hs); - int i=0; + HEntry *ptr = ARRPTR(hs); + char *words = STRPTR(hs); + int i = 0; - entries = (Datum*)palloc( sizeof(Datum) * 2 * hs->size ); + entries = (Datum *) palloc(sizeof(Datum) * 2 * hs->size); while (ptr - ARRPTR(hs) < hs->size) { - text *item; + text *item; - item = makeitem( words + ptr->pos, ptr->keylen ); + item = makeitem(words + ptr->pos, ptr->keylen); *VARDATA(item) = KEYFLAG; entries[i++] = PointerGetDatum(item); - if ( ptr->valisnull ) + if (ptr->valisnull) { - item = makeitem( NULL, 0 ); + item = makeitem(NULL, 0); *VARDATA(item) = NULLFLAG; } else { - item = makeitem( words + ptr->pos + ptr->keylen, ptr->vallen ); + item = makeitem(words + ptr->pos + ptr->keylen, ptr->vallen); *VARDATA(item) = VALFLAG; } entries[i++] = PointerGetDatum(item); @@ -65,36 +65,37 @@ gin_extract_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } } - PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs,0); + PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs, 0); PG_RETURN_POINTER(entries); } PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(gin_extract_hstore_query); -Datum gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); - if ( strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber ) + if (strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber) { - PG_RETURN_DATUM( DirectFunctionCall2( - gin_extract_hstore, - PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), - PG_GETARG_DATUM(1) - )); + PG_RETURN_DATUM(DirectFunctionCall2( + gin_extract_hstore, + PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), + PG_GETARG_DATUM(1) + )); } - else if ( strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber ) + else if (strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber) { - text *item, *q = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - Datum *entries = NULL; + text *item, + *q = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + Datum *entries = NULL; *nentries = 1; - entries = (Datum*)palloc( sizeof(Datum) ); + entries = (Datum *) palloc(sizeof(Datum)); - item = makeitem( VARDATA(q), VARSIZE(q)-VARHDRSZ ); + item = makeitem(VARDATA(q), VARSIZE(q) - VARHDRSZ); *VARDATA(item) = KEYFLAG; entries[0] = PointerGetDatum(item); @@ -107,29 +108,28 @@ gin_extract_hstore_query(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(gin_consistent_hstore); -Datum gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(1); - bool res = true; + bool res = true; - if ( strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber ) + if (strategy == HStoreContainsStrategyNumber) { - bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - HStore *query = PG_GETARG_HS(2); - int i; + bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + HStore *query = PG_GETARG_HS(2); + int i; - for(i=0;res && i<2*query->size;i++) - if ( check[i] == false ) + for (i = 0; res && i < 2 * query->size; i++) + if (check[i] == false) res = false; } - else if ( strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber ) + else if (strategy == HStoreExistsStrategyNumber) res = true; else elog(ERROR, "Unsupported strategy number: %d", strategy); PG_RETURN_BOOL(res); } - diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c b/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c index 74597c3490..bcac30ee6f 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c @@ -275,13 +275,13 @@ tconvert(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) int len; HStore *out; - if ( PG_ARGISNULL(0) ) + if (PG_ARGISNULL(0)) PG_RETURN_NULL(); key = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - if ( PG_ARGISNULL(1) ) - len = CALCDATASIZE(1, VARSIZE(key) ); + if (PG_ARGISNULL(1)) + len = CALCDATASIZE(1, VARSIZE(key)); else { val = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ tconvert(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) out->size = 1; ARRPTR(out)->keylen = VARSIZE(key) - VARHDRSZ; - if ( PG_ARGISNULL(1) ) + if (PG_ARGISNULL(1)) { ARRPTR(out)->vallen = 0; ARRPTR(out)->valisnull = true; @@ -537,18 +537,18 @@ hs_contains(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (entry) { - if ( te->valisnull || entry->valisnull ) + if (te->valisnull || entry->valisnull) { - if ( !(te->valisnull && entry->valisnull) ) + if (!(te->valisnull && entry->valisnull)) res = false; } - else if ( te->vallen != entry->vallen || - strncmp( - vv + entry->pos + entry->keylen, - tv + te->pos + te->keylen, - te->vallen) - ) - res = false; + else if (te->vallen != entry->vallen || + strncmp( + vv + entry->pos + entry->keylen, + tv + te->pos + te->keylen, + te->vallen) + ) + res = false; } else res = false; diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c index 2248428786..6856a68e03 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c @@ -57,16 +57,17 @@ ginint4_queryextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } } - if ( nentries == 0 ) + if (nentries == 0) { - switch( strategy ) + switch (strategy) { case BooleanSearchStrategy: case RTOverlapStrategyNumber: - *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ - break; - default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void arrays */ - break; + *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ + break; + default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void + * arrays */ + break; } } diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c index 3c34cb67a7..51cc77b863 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_gist.c @@ -233,10 +233,11 @@ g_int_decompress(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) CHECKARRVALID(in); if (ARRISVOID(in)) { - if (in != (ArrayType *) DatumGetPointer(entry->key)) { + if (in != (ArrayType *) DatumGetPointer(entry->key)) + { retval = palloc(sizeof(GISTENTRY)); gistentryinit(*retval, PointerGetDatum(in), - entry->rel, entry->page, entry->offset, FALSE); + entry->rel, entry->page, entry->offset, FALSE); PG_RETURN_POINTER(retval); } diff --git a/contrib/isn/isn.c b/contrib/isn/isn.c index 1dfb940e92..9134fc06d8 100644 --- a/contrib/isn/isn.c +++ b/contrib/isn/isn.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.c,v 1.6 2007/06/05 21:31:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.c,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:29 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ ean2UPC(char *isn) * Returns the ean13 value of the string. */ static -ean13 + ean13 str2ean(const char *num) { ean13 ean = 0; /* current ean */ diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c index 6251fd5b5f..ce8b97e46b 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/btreefuncs.c @@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ bt_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) buffer = ReadBuffer(rel, blkno); /* - * We copy the page into local storage to avoid holding pin on - * the buffer longer than we must, and possibly failing to - * release it at all if the calling query doesn't fetch all rows. + * We copy the page into local storage to avoid holding pin on the + * buffer longer than we must, and possibly failing to release it at + * all if the calling query doesn't fetch all rows. */ mctx = MemoryContextSwitchTo(fctx->multi_call_memory_ctx); diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 931c1a5036..31b5b2e642 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -8,17 +8,17 @@ * information as possible, even if it's nonsense. That's because if a * page is corrupt, we don't know why and how exactly it is corrupt, so we * let the user to judge it. - * + * * These functions are restricted to superusers for the fear of introducing - * security holes if the input checking isn't as water-tight as it should. - * You'd need to be superuser to obtain a raw page image anyway, so + * security holes if the input checking isn't as water-tight as it should. + * You'd need to be superuser to obtain a raw page image anyway, so * there's hardly any use case for using these without superuser-rights * anyway. * * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c,v 1.2 2007/09/12 22:10:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:30 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ #include "utils/builtins.h" #include "miscadmin.h" -Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); #define GET_TEXT(str_) \ - DirectFunctionCall1(textin, CStringGetDatum(str_)) + DirectFunctionCall1(textin, CStringGetDatum(str_)) /* * bits_to_text @@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); static char * bits_to_text(bits8 *bits, int len) { - int i; - char *str; + int i; + char *str; str = palloc(len + 1); - - for(i = 0; i < len; i++) + + for (i = 0; i < len; i++) str[i] = (bits[(i / 8)] & (1 << (i % 8))) ? '1' : '0'; str[i] = '\0'; @@ -74,15 +74,15 @@ typedef struct heap_page_items_state TupleDesc tupd; Page page; uint16 offset; -} heap_page_items_state; +} heap_page_items_state; Datum heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - bytea *raw_page = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_P(0); + bytea *raw_page = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_P(0); heap_page_items_state *inter_call_data = NULL; FuncCallContext *fctx; - int raw_page_size; + int raw_page_size; if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) TupleDesc tupdesc; MemoryContext mctx; - if(raw_page_size < SizeOfPageHeaderData) - ereport(ERROR, + if (raw_page_size < SizeOfPageHeaderData) + ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); + errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); fctx = SRF_FIRSTCALL_INIT(); mctx = MemoryContextSwitchTo(fctx->multi_call_memory_ctx); @@ -132,42 +132,42 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ItemId id; Datum values[13]; bool nulls[13]; - uint16 lp_offset; + uint16 lp_offset; uint16 lp_flags; uint16 lp_len; memset(nulls, 0, sizeof(nulls)); /* Extract information from the line pointer */ - + id = PageGetItemId(page, inter_call_data->offset); - lp_offset = ItemIdGetOffset(id); - lp_flags = ItemIdGetFlags(id); - lp_len = ItemIdGetLength(id); + lp_offset = ItemIdGetOffset(id); + lp_flags = ItemIdGetFlags(id); + lp_len = ItemIdGetLength(id); values[0] = UInt16GetDatum(inter_call_data->offset); values[1] = UInt16GetDatum(lp_offset); values[2] = UInt16GetDatum(lp_flags); values[3] = UInt16GetDatum(lp_len); - /* We do just enough validity checking to make sure we don't - * reference data outside the page passed to us. The page - * could be corrupt in many other ways, but at least we won't - * crash. + /* + * We do just enough validity checking to make sure we don't reference + * data outside the page passed to us. The page could be corrupt in + * many other ways, but at least we won't crash. */ if (ItemIdHasStorage(id) && lp_len >= sizeof(HeapTupleHeader) && lp_offset == MAXALIGN(lp_offset) && lp_offset + lp_len <= raw_page_size) { - HeapTupleHeader tuphdr; - int bits_len; + HeapTupleHeader tuphdr; + int bits_len; /* Extract information from the tuple header */ tuphdr = (HeapTupleHeader) PageGetItem(page, id); - + values[4] = UInt32GetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuphdr)); values[5] = UInt32GetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuphdr)); values[6] = UInt32GetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetRawCommandId(tuphdr)); /* shared with xvac */ @@ -176,22 +176,23 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) values[9] = UInt16GetDatum(tuphdr->t_infomask); values[10] = UInt8GetDatum(tuphdr->t_hoff); - /* We already checked that the item as is completely within - * the raw page passed to us, with the length given in the line + /* + * We already checked that the item as is completely within the + * raw page passed to us, with the length given in the line * pointer.. Let's check that t_hoff doesn't point over lp_len, * before using it to access t_bits and oid. */ - if (tuphdr->t_hoff >= sizeof(HeapTupleHeader) && + if (tuphdr->t_hoff >= sizeof(HeapTupleHeader) && tuphdr->t_hoff <= lp_len) { if (tuphdr->t_infomask & HEAP_HASNULL) { - bits_len = tuphdr->t_hoff - - (((char *)tuphdr->t_bits) - ((char *)tuphdr)); + bits_len = tuphdr->t_hoff - + (((char *) tuphdr->t_bits) -((char *) tuphdr)); values[11] = GET_TEXT( - bits_to_text(tuphdr->t_bits, bits_len * 8)); - } + bits_to_text(tuphdr->t_bits, bits_len * 8)); + } else nulls[11] = true; @@ -208,17 +209,19 @@ heap_page_items(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } else { - /* The line pointer is not used, or it's invalid. Set the rest of - * the fields to NULL */ - int i; + /* + * The line pointer is not used, or it's invalid. Set the rest of + * the fields to NULL + */ + int i; - for(i = 4; i <= 12; i++) + for (i = 4; i <= 12; i++) nulls[i] = true; } - /* Build and return the result tuple. */ - resultTuple = heap_form_tuple(inter_call_data->tupd, values, nulls); - result = HeapTupleGetDatum(resultTuple); + /* Build and return the result tuple. */ + resultTuple = heap_form_tuple(inter_call_data->tupd, values, nulls); + result = HeapTupleGetDatum(resultTuple); inter_call_data->offset++; diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c b/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c index 80632be9fb..7d69fd5e22 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c,v 1.2 2007/09/21 21:25:42 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pageinspect/rawpage.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:30 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -Datum get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); /* * get_raw_page @@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) uint32 blkno = PG_GETARG_UINT32(1); Relation rel; - RangeVar *relrv; - bytea *raw_page; - char *raw_page_data; + RangeVar *relrv; + bytea *raw_page; + char *raw_page_data; Buffer buf; if (!superuser()) @@ -61,12 +61,12 @@ get_raw_page(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), errmsg("cannot get raw page from view \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); if (rel->rd_rel->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), errmsg("cannot get raw page from composite type \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); if (blkno >= RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(rel)) elog(ERROR, "block number %u is out of range for relation \"%s\"", @@ -125,13 +125,13 @@ page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) raw_page_size = VARSIZE(raw_page) - VARHDRSZ; /* - * Check that enough data was supplied, so that we don't try to access - * fields outside the supplied buffer. + * Check that enough data was supplied, so that we don't try to access + * fields outside the supplied buffer. */ - if(raw_page_size < sizeof(PageHeaderData)) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); + if (raw_page_size < sizeof(PageHeaderData)) + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), + errmsg("input page too small (%d bytes)", raw_page_size))); page = (PageHeader) VARDATA(raw_page); @@ -154,12 +154,12 @@ page_header(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) values[7] = UInt16GetDatum(PageGetPageLayoutVersion(page)); values[8] = TransactionIdGetDatum(page->pd_prune_xid); - /* Build and return the tuple. */ + /* Build and return the tuple. */ memset(nulls, 0, sizeof(nulls)); - tuple = heap_form_tuple(tupdesc, values, nulls); - result = HeapTupleGetDatum(tuple); + tuple = heap_form_tuple(tupdesc, values, nulls); + result = HeapTupleGetDatum(tuple); PG_RETURN_DATUM(result); } diff --git a/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c b/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c index e7c5b06a56..21ac8da176 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c +++ b/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * pg_buffercache_pages.c * display some contents of the buffer cache * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c,v 1.13 2007/07/16 21:20:36 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_buffercache/pg_buffercache_pages.c,v 1.14 2007/11/15 21:14:30 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -149,9 +149,9 @@ pg_buffercache_pages(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * And release locks. We do this in reverse order for two reasons: * (1) Anyone else who needs more than one of the locks will be trying - * to lock them in increasing order; we don't want to release the other - * process until it can get all the locks it needs. - * (2) This avoids O(N^2) behavior inside LWLockRelease. + * to lock them in increasing order; we don't want to release the + * other process until it can get all the locks it needs. (2) This + * avoids O(N^2) behavior inside LWLockRelease. */ for (i = NUM_BUFFER_PARTITIONS; --i >= 0;) LWLockRelease(FirstBufMappingLock + i); diff --git a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c index 35c90fde48..41b3500dd1 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c +++ b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ /* * pg_standby.c - * + * * Production-ready example of how to create a Warm Standby - * database server using continuous archiving as a + * database server using continuous archiving as a * replication mechanism * * We separate the parameters for archive and nextWALfile - * so that we can check the archive exists, even if the + * so that we can check the archive exists, even if the * WAL file doesn't (yet). * * This program will be executed once in full for each file @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ * * It is designed to cater to a variety of needs, as well * providing a customizable section. - * - * Original author: Simon Riggs [email protected] - * Current maintainer: Simon Riggs + * + * Original author: Simon Riggs [email protected] + * Current maintainer: Simon Riggs */ #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ #include <signal.h> #ifdef WIN32 -int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *optstring); +int getopt(int argc, char *const argv[], const char *optstring); #else #include <sys/time.h> #include <unistd.h> @@ -34,42 +34,44 @@ int getopt(int argc, char * const argv[], const char *optstring); #ifdef HAVE_GETOPT_H #include <getopt.h> #endif - #endif /* ! WIN32 */ extern char *optarg; extern int optind; /* Options and defaults */ -int sleeptime = 5; /* amount of time to sleep between file checks */ -int waittime = -1; /* how long we have been waiting, -1 no wait yet */ -int maxwaittime = 0; /* how long are we prepared to wait for? */ -int keepfiles = 0; /* number of WAL files to keep, 0 keep all */ -int maxretries = 3; /* number of retries on restore command */ -bool debug = false; /* are we debugging? */ -bool triggered = false; /* have we been triggered? */ -bool need_cleanup = false; /* do we need to remove files from archive? */ +int sleeptime = 5; /* amount of time to sleep between file checks */ +int waittime = -1; /* how long we have been waiting, -1 no wait + * yet */ +int maxwaittime = 0; /* how long are we prepared to wait for? */ +int keepfiles = 0; /* number of WAL files to keep, 0 keep all */ +int maxretries = 3; /* number of retries on restore command */ +bool debug = false; /* are we debugging? */ +bool triggered = false; /* have we been triggered? */ +bool need_cleanup = false; /* do we need to remove files from + * archive? */ static volatile sig_atomic_t signaled = false; -char *archiveLocation; /* where to find the archive? */ -char *triggerPath; /* where to find the trigger file? */ -char *xlogFilePath; /* where we are going to restore to */ -char *nextWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ -char *restartWALFileName; /* the file from which we can restart restore */ -char *priorWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ -char WALFilePath[MAXPGPATH];/* the file path including archive */ -char restoreCommand[MAXPGPATH]; /* run this to restore */ -char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file we need to get from archive */ +char *archiveLocation; /* where to find the archive? */ +char *triggerPath; /* where to find the trigger file? */ +char *xlogFilePath; /* where we are going to restore to */ +char *nextWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ +char *restartWALFileName; /* the file from which we can restart restore */ +char *priorWALFileName; /* the file we need to get from archive */ +char WALFilePath[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file path including archive */ +char restoreCommand[MAXPGPATH]; /* run this to restore */ +char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file we need to + * get from archive */ #define RESTORE_COMMAND_COPY 0 #define RESTORE_COMMAND_LINK 1 -int restoreCommandType; +int restoreCommandType; #define XLOG_DATA 0 #define XLOG_HISTORY 1 #define XLOG_BACKUP_LABEL 2 -int nextWALFileType; +int nextWALFileType; #define SET_RESTORE_COMMAND(cmd, arg1, arg2) \ snprintf(restoreCommand, MAXPGPATH, cmd " \"%s\" \"%s\"", arg1, arg2) @@ -86,21 +88,21 @@ struct stat stat_buf; * accessible directory. If you want to make other assumptions, * such as using a vendor-specific archive and access API, these * routines are the ones you'll need to change. You're - * enouraged to submit any changes to [email protected] - * or personally to the current maintainer. Those changes may be + * enouraged to submit any changes to [email protected] + * or personally to the current maintainer. Those changes may be * folded in to later versions of this program. */ -#define XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN 24 +#define XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN 24 /* Reworked from access/xlog_internal.h */ #define XLogFileName(fname, tli, log, seg) \ snprintf(fname, XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN + 1, "%08X%08X%08X", tli, log, seg) /* - * Initialize allows customized commands into the warm standby program. + * Initialize allows customized commands into the warm standby program. * - * As an example, and probably the common case, we use either - * cp/ln commands on *nix, or copy/move command on Windows. + * As an example, and probably the common case, we use either + * cp/ln commands on *nix, or copy/move command on Windows. * */ static void @@ -111,79 +113,79 @@ CustomizableInitialize(void) switch (restoreCommandType) { case RESTORE_COMMAND_LINK: - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("mklink",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("mklink", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); case RESTORE_COMMAND_COPY: default: - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("copy",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("copy", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); break; - } + } #else snprintf(WALFilePath, MAXPGPATH, "%s/%s", archiveLocation, nextWALFileName); switch (restoreCommandType) { case RESTORE_COMMAND_LINK: #if HAVE_WORKING_LINK - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("ln -s -f",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("ln -s -f", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); break; #endif case RESTORE_COMMAND_COPY: default: - SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("cp",WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); + SET_RESTORE_COMMAND("cp", WALFilePath, xlogFilePath); break; - } + } #endif /* - * This code assumes that archiveLocation is a directory - * You may wish to add code to check for tape libraries, etc.. - * So, since it is a directory, we use stat to test if its accessible + * This code assumes that archiveLocation is a directory You may wish to + * add code to check for tape libraries, etc.. So, since it is a + * directory, we use stat to test if its accessible */ if (stat(archiveLocation, &stat_buf) != 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" does not exist\n", archiveLocation); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" does not exist\n", archiveLocation); fflush(stderr); - exit(2); + exit(2); } } /* * CustomizableNextWALFileReady() - * + * * Is the requested file ready yet? */ -static bool +static bool CustomizableNextWALFileReady() { if (stat(WALFilePath, &stat_buf) == 0) { /* - * If its a backup file, return immediately - * If its a regular file return only if its the right size already + * If its a backup file, return immediately If its a regular file + * return only if its the right size already */ if (strlen(nextWALFileName) > 24 && strspn(nextWALFileName, "0123456789ABCDEF") == 24 && - strcmp(nextWALFileName + strlen(nextWALFileName) - strlen(".backup"), - ".backup") == 0) + strcmp(nextWALFileName + strlen(nextWALFileName) - strlen(".backup"), + ".backup") == 0) { nextWALFileType = XLOG_BACKUP_LABEL; - return true; + return true; } - else - if (stat_buf.st_size == XLOG_SEG_SIZE) - { + else if (stat_buf.st_size == XLOG_SEG_SIZE) + { #ifdef WIN32 - /* - * Windows reports that the file has the right number of bytes - * even though the file is still being copied and cannot be - * opened by pg_standby yet. So we wait for sleeptime secs - * before attempting to restore. If that is not enough, we - * will rely on the retry/holdoff mechanism. - */ - pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); + + /* + * Windows reports that the file has the right number of bytes + * even though the file is still being copied and cannot be opened + * by pg_standby yet. So we wait for sleeptime secs before + * attempting to restore. If that is not enough, we will rely on + * the retry/holdoff mechanism. + */ + pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); #endif - nextWALFileType = XLOG_DATA; - return true; - } + nextWALFileType = XLOG_DATA; + return true; + } /* * If still too small, wait until it is the correct size @@ -192,10 +194,10 @@ CustomizableNextWALFileReady() { if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "file size greater than expected\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "file size greater than expected\n"); fflush(stderr); } - exit(3); + exit(3); } } @@ -212,35 +214,36 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) */ if (nextWALFileType == XLOG_DATA) { - int rc; - DIR *xldir; - struct dirent *xlde; + int rc; + DIR *xldir; + struct dirent *xlde; /* - * Assume its OK to keep failing. The failure situation may change over - * time, so we'd rather keep going on the main processing than fail - * because we couldnt clean up yet. + * Assume its OK to keep failing. The failure situation may change + * over time, so we'd rather keep going on the main processing than + * fail because we couldnt clean up yet. */ if ((xldir = opendir(archiveLocation)) != NULL) { while ((xlde = readdir(xldir)) != NULL) { /* - * We ignore the timeline part of the XLOG segment identifiers in - * deciding whether a segment is still needed. This ensures that we - * won't prematurely remove a segment from a parent timeline. We could - * probably be a little more proactive about removing segments of - * non-parent timelines, but that would be a whole lot more - * complicated. + * We ignore the timeline part of the XLOG segment identifiers + * in deciding whether a segment is still needed. This + * ensures that we won't prematurely remove a segment from a + * parent timeline. We could probably be a little more + * proactive about removing segments of non-parent timelines, + * but that would be a whole lot more complicated. * - * We use the alphanumeric sorting property of the filenames to decide - * which ones are earlier than the exclusiveCleanupFileName file. - * Note that this means files are not removed in the order they were - * originally written, in case this worries you. + * We use the alphanumeric sorting property of the filenames + * to decide which ones are earlier than the + * exclusiveCleanupFileName file. Note that this means files + * are not removed in the order they were originally written, + * in case this worries you. */ if (strlen(xlde->d_name) == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && strspn(xlde->d_name, "0123456789ABCDEF") == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && - strcmp(xlde->d_name + 8, exclusiveCleanupFileName + 8) < 0) + strcmp(xlde->d_name + 8, exclusiveCleanupFileName + 8) < 0) { #ifdef WIN32 snprintf(WALFilePath, MAXPGPATH, "%s\\%s", archiveLocation, xlde->d_name); @@ -249,7 +252,7 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) #endif if (debug) - fprintf(stderr, "\nremoving \"%s\"", WALFilePath); + fprintf(stderr, "\nremoving \"%s\"", WALFilePath); rc = unlink(WALFilePath); if (rc != 0) @@ -264,7 +267,7 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) fprintf(stderr, "\n"); } else - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" open error\n", archiveLocation); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: archiveLocation \"%s\" open error\n", archiveLocation); closedir(xldir); fflush(stderr); @@ -278,19 +281,19 @@ CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(void) /* * SetWALFileNameForCleanup() - * + * * Set the earliest WAL filename that we want to keep on the archive - * and decide whether we need_cleanup + * and decide whether we need_cleanup */ static bool SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) { - uint32 tli = 1, - log = 0, - seg = 0; - uint32 log_diff = 0, - seg_diff = 0; - bool cleanup = false; + uint32 tli = 1, + log = 0, + seg = 0; + uint32 log_diff = 0, + seg_diff = 0; + bool cleanup = false; if (restartWALFileName) { @@ -305,7 +308,7 @@ SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) { log_diff = keepfiles / MaxSegmentsPerLogFile; seg_diff = keepfiles % MaxSegmentsPerLogFile; - if (seg_diff > seg) + if (seg_diff > seg) { log_diff++; seg = MaxSegmentsPerLogFile - seg_diff; @@ -333,31 +336,30 @@ SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) /* * CheckForExternalTrigger() - * + * * Is there a trigger file? */ -static bool +static bool CheckForExternalTrigger(void) { - int rc; + int rc; /* - * Look for a trigger file, if that option has been selected + * Look for a trigger file, if that option has been selected * - * We use stat() here because triggerPath is always a file - * rather than potentially being in an archive + * We use stat() here because triggerPath is always a file rather than + * potentially being in an archive */ if (triggerPath && stat(triggerPath, &stat_buf) == 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "trigger file found\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "trigger file found\n"); fflush(stderr); /* - * If trigger file found, we *must* delete it. Here's why: - * When recovery completes, we will be asked again - * for the same file from the archive using pg_standby - * so must remove trigger file so we can reload file again - * and come up correctly. + * If trigger file found, we *must* delete it. Here's why: When + * recovery completes, we will be asked again for the same file from + * the archive using pg_standby so must remove trigger file so we can + * reload file again and come up correctly. */ rc = unlink(triggerPath); if (rc != 0) @@ -374,14 +376,14 @@ CheckForExternalTrigger(void) /* * RestoreWALFileForRecovery() - * + * * Perform the action required to restore the file from archive */ static bool RestoreWALFileForRecovery(void) { - int rc = 0; - int numretries = 0; + int rc = 0; + int numretries = 0; if (debug) { @@ -401,7 +403,7 @@ RestoreWALFileForRecovery(void) } return true; } - pg_usleep(numretries++ * sleeptime * 1000000L); + pg_usleep(numretries++ * sleeptime * 1000000L); } /* @@ -441,13 +443,13 @@ sighandler(int sig) } /*------------ MAIN ----------------------------------------*/ -int +int main(int argc, char **argv) { int c; - (void) signal(SIGINT, sighandler); - (void) signal(SIGQUIT, sighandler); + (void) signal(SIGINT, sighandler); + (void) signal(SIGQUIT, sighandler); while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "cdk:lr:s:t:w:")) != -1) { @@ -492,8 +494,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) case 't': /* Trigger file */ triggerPath = optarg; if (CheckForExternalTrigger()) - exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ - break; + exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ + break; case 'w': /* Max wait time */ maxwaittime = atoi(optarg); if (maxwaittime < 0) @@ -510,7 +512,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } } - /* + /* * Parameter checking - after checking to see if trigger file present */ if (argc == 1) @@ -521,8 +523,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) /* * We will go to the archiveLocation to get nextWALFileName. - * nextWALFileName may not exist yet, which would not be an error, - * so we separate the archiveLocation and nextWALFileName so we can check + * nextWALFileName may not exist yet, which would not be an error, so we + * separate the archiveLocation and nextWALFileName so we can check * separately whether archiveLocation exists, if not that is an error */ if (optind < argc) @@ -532,7 +534,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } else { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: must specify archiveLocation\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: must specify archiveLocation\n"); usage(); exit(2); } @@ -544,7 +546,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } else { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%f to specify nextWALFileName\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%f to specify nextWALFileName\n"); usage(); exit(2); } @@ -556,7 +558,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } else { - fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%p to specify xlogFilePath\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "pg_standby: use %%p to specify xlogFilePath\n"); usage(); exit(2); } @@ -573,14 +575,14 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "\nTrigger file : %s", triggerPath ? triggerPath : "<not set>"); - fprintf(stderr, "\nWaiting for WAL file : %s", nextWALFileName); - fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file path : %s", WALFilePath); - fprintf(stderr, "\nRestoring to... : %s", xlogFilePath); - fprintf(stderr, "\nSleep interval : %d second%s", - sleeptime, (sleeptime > 1 ? "s" : " ")); - fprintf(stderr, "\nMax wait interval : %d %s", - maxwaittime, (maxwaittime > 0 ? "seconds" : "forever")); + fprintf(stderr, "\nTrigger file : %s", triggerPath ? triggerPath : "<not set>"); + fprintf(stderr, "\nWaiting for WAL file : %s", nextWALFileName); + fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file path : %s", WALFilePath); + fprintf(stderr, "\nRestoring to... : %s", xlogFilePath); + fprintf(stderr, "\nSleep interval : %d second%s", + sleeptime, (sleeptime > 1 ? "s" : " ")); + fprintf(stderr, "\nMax wait interval : %d %s", + maxwaittime, (maxwaittime > 0 ? "seconds" : "forever")); fprintf(stderr, "\nCommand for restore : %s", restoreCommand); fprintf(stderr, "\nKeep archive history : %s and later", exclusiveCleanupFileName); fflush(stderr); @@ -609,20 +611,20 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } } - /* + /* * Main wait loop */ while (!CustomizableNextWALFileReady() && !triggered) { if (sleeptime <= 60) - pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); + pg_usleep(sleeptime * 1000000L); if (signaled) { triggered = true; if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "\nsignaled to exit\n"); + fprintf(stderr, "\nsignaled to exit\n"); fflush(stderr); } } @@ -631,36 +633,34 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (debug) { - fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file not present yet."); + fprintf(stderr, "\nWAL file not present yet."); if (triggerPath) - fprintf(stderr, " Checking for trigger file..."); + fprintf(stderr, " Checking for trigger file..."); fflush(stderr); } waittime += sleeptime; - + if (!triggered && (CheckForExternalTrigger() || (waittime >= maxwaittime && maxwaittime > 0))) { triggered = true; if (debug && waittime >= maxwaittime && maxwaittime > 0) - fprintf(stderr, "\nTimed out after %d seconds\n",waittime); + fprintf(stderr, "\nTimed out after %d seconds\n", waittime); } } } - /* - * Action on exit + /* + * Action on exit */ if (triggered) - exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ - - /* - * Once we have restored this file successfully we - * can remove some prior WAL files. - * If this restore fails we musn't remove any - * file because some of them will be requested again - * immediately after the failed restore, or when - * we restart recovery. + exit(1); /* Normal exit, with non-zero */ + + /* + * Once we have restored this file successfully we can remove some prior + * WAL files. If this restore fails we musn't remove any file because some + * of them will be requested again immediately after the failed restore, + * or when we restart recovery. */ if (RestoreWALFileForRecovery() && need_cleanup) CustomizableCleanupPriorWALFiles(); diff --git a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c index ed2ba0eae7..33d005ae9a 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c +++ b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c @@ -16,23 +16,23 @@ Datum gin_trgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum gin_extract_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *val = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - Datum *entries = NULL; - TRGM *trg; + text *val = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + Datum *entries = NULL; + TRGM *trg; int4 trglen; - + *nentries = 0; - + trg = generate_trgm(VARDATA(val), VARSIZE(val) - VARHDRSZ); trglen = ARRNELEM(trg); - + if (trglen > 0) { - trgm *ptr; - int4 i = 0, - item; - + trgm *ptr; + int4 i = 0, + item; + *nentries = (int32) trglen; entries = (Datum *) palloc(sizeof(Datum) * trglen); @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ gin_extract_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { item = TRGMINT(ptr); entries[i++] = Int32GetDatum(item); - + ptr++; } } @@ -52,20 +52,20 @@ gin_extract_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum gin_trgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - text *query = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2); + bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + text *query = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2); bool res = FALSE; - TRGM *trg; + TRGM *trg; int4 i, trglen, ntrue = 0; - + trg = generate_trgm(VARDATA(query), VARSIZE(query) - VARHDRSZ); trglen = ARRNELEM(trg); - + for (i = 0; i < trglen; i++) if (check[i]) - ntrue ++; + ntrue++; #ifdef DIVUNION res = (trglen == ntrue) ? true : ((((((float4) ntrue) / ((float4) (trglen - ntrue)))) >= trgm_limit) ? true : false); diff --git a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c index a5e57ce955..5fe48b96a3 100644 --- a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.73 2007/10/22 10:40:47 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.74 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * * pgbench: a simple benchmark program for PostgreSQL * written by Tatsuo Ishii @@ -53,9 +53,9 @@ extern int optind; /* max number of clients allowed */ #ifdef FD_SETSIZE -#define MAXCLIENTS (FD_SETSIZE - 10) +#define MAXCLIENTS (FD_SETSIZE - 10) #else -#define MAXCLIENTS 1024 +#define MAXCLIENTS 1024 #endif int nclients = 1; /* default number of simulated clients */ @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ getrand(int min, int max) /* call PQexec() and exit() on failure */ static void -executeStatement(PGconn *con, const char* sql) +executeStatement(PGconn *con, const char *sql) { PGresult *res; @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ discard_response(CState * state) /* check to see if the SQL result was good */ static int -check(CState *state, PGresult *res, int n) +check(CState * state, PGresult *res, int n) { CState *st = &state[n]; @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ check(CState *state, PGresult *res, int n) default: fprintf(stderr, "Client %d aborted in state %d: %s", n, st->state, PQerrorMessage(st->con)); - remains--; /* I've aborted */ + remains--; /* I've aborted */ PQfinish(st->con); st->con = NULL; return (-1); @@ -452,12 +452,12 @@ top: if (st->sleeping) { /* are we sleeping? */ - int usec; - struct timeval now; + int usec; + struct timeval now; gettimeofday(&now, NULL); usec = (st->until.tv_sec - now.tv_sec) * 1000000 + - st->until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; + st->until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; if (usec <= 0) st->sleeping = 0; /* Done sleeping, go ahead with next command */ else @@ -798,11 +798,11 @@ init(void) "drop table if exists accounts", "create table accounts(aid int not null,bid int,abalance int,filler char(84)) with (fillfactor=%d)", "drop table if exists history", - "create table history(tid int,bid int,aid int,delta int,mtime timestamp,filler char(22))"}; + "create table history(tid int,bid int,aid int,delta int,mtime timestamp,filler char(22))"}; static char *DDLAFTERs[] = { "alter table branches add primary key (bid)", "alter table tellers add primary key (tid)", - "alter table accounts add primary key (aid)"}; + "alter table accounts add primary key (aid)"}; char sql[256]; @@ -821,7 +821,8 @@ init(void) (strstr(DDLs[i], "create table tellers") == DDLs[i]) || (strstr(DDLs[i], "create table accounts") == DDLs[i])) { - char ddl_stmt[128]; + char ddl_stmt[128]; + snprintf(ddl_stmt, 128, DDLs[i], fillfactor); executeStatement(con, ddl_stmt); continue; @@ -990,7 +991,7 @@ process_commands(char *buf) pg_strcasecmp(my_commands->argv[2], "ms") != 0 && pg_strcasecmp(my_commands->argv[2], "s")) { - fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown time unit '%s' - must be us, ms or s\n", + fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown time unit '%s' - must be us, ms or s\n", my_commands->argv[0], my_commands->argv[2]); return NULL; } @@ -1204,7 +1205,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) int c; int is_init_mode = 0; /* initialize mode? */ int is_no_vacuum = 0; /* no vacuum at all before testing? */ - int do_vacuum_accounts = 0; /* do vacuum accounts before testing? */ + int do_vacuum_accounts = 0; /* do vacuum accounts before testing? */ int debug = 0; /* debug flag */ int ttype = 0; /* transaction type. 0: TPC-B, 1: SELECT only, * 2: skip update of branches and tellers */ @@ -1308,7 +1309,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) fprintf(stderr, "Use limit/ulimit to increase the limit before using pgbench.\n"); exit(1); } -#endif /* HAVE_GETRLIMIT */ +#endif /* HAVE_GETRLIMIT */ break; case 'C': is_connect = 1; @@ -1615,8 +1616,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (state[i].sleeping) { - int this_usec; - int sock = PQsocket(state[i].con); + int this_usec; + int sock = PQsocket(state[i].con); if (min_usec < 0) { @@ -1625,7 +1626,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) } this_usec = (state[i].until.tv_sec - now.tv_sec) * 1000000 + - state[i].until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; + state[i].until.tv_usec - now.tv_usec; if (this_usec > 0 && (min_usec == 0 || this_usec < min_usec)) min_usec = this_usec; @@ -1657,11 +1658,11 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) timeout.tv_usec = min_usec % 1000000; nsocks = select(maxsock + 1, &input_mask, (fd_set *) NULL, - (fd_set *) NULL, &timeout); + (fd_set *) NULL, &timeout); } else nsocks = select(maxsock + 1, &input_mask, (fd_set *) NULL, - (fd_set *) NULL, (struct timeval *) NULL); + (fd_set *) NULL, (struct timeval *) NULL); if (nsocks < 0) { if (errno == EINTR) diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c index 93a6183fca..7138ffa903 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * Butchered version of sshblowf.c from putty-0.59. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c,v 1.8 2007/03/28 22:48:58 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.c,v 1.9 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ /* @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ static const uint32 sbox3[] = { static void blowfish_encrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, - BlowfishContext *ctx) + BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 *S0 = ctx->S0; uint32 *S1 = ctx->S1; @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ blowfish_encrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, static void blowfish_decrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, - BlowfishContext *ctx) + BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 *S0 = ctx->S0; uint32 *S1 = ctx->S1; @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ blowfish_decrypt(uint32 xL, uint32 xR, uint32 *output, } void -blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) +blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx) { uint32 xL, xR, @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx) } void -blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, +blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *key, short keybytes) { uint32 *S0 = ctx->S0; @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, uint32 str[2]; int i; - Assert(keybytes > 0 && keybytes <= (448/8)); + Assert(keybytes > 0 && keybytes <= (448 / 8)); for (i = 0; i < 18; i++) { @@ -492,9 +492,8 @@ blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, } void -blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext *ctx, const uint8 *iv) +blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *iv) { ctx->iv0 = GET_32BIT_MSB_FIRST(iv); ctx->iv1 = GET_32BIT_MSB_FIRST(iv + 4); } - diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h index 7e11dc9aeb..6e280d8754 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h,v 1.6 2007/03/28 22:48:58 neilc Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/blf.h,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ /* * PuTTY is copyright 1997-2007 Simon Tatham. * @@ -35,14 +35,12 @@ typedef struct S3[256], P[18]; uint32 iv0, - iv1; /* for CBC mode */ -} BlowfishContext; - -void blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext *ctx, const uint8 *key, short keybytes); -void blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext *ctx, const uint8 *iv); -void blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); -void blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); -void blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); -void blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext *ctx); - + iv1; /* for CBC mode */ +} BlowfishContext; +void blowfish_setkey(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *key, short keybytes); +void blowfish_setiv(BlowfishContext * ctx, const uint8 *iv); +void blowfish_encrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); +void blowfish_decrypt_cbc(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); +void blowfish_encrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); +void blowfish_decrypt_ecb(uint8 *blk, int len, BlowfishContext * ctx); diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c index f951f2c411..84b4d758af 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c,v 1.12 2007/04/06 05:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/crypt-blowfish.c,v 1.13 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * * This code comes from John the Ripper password cracker, with reentrant * and crypt(3) interfaces added, but optimizations specific to password @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ BF_encode(char *dst, const BF_word * src, int size) } static void -BF_swap(BF_word *x, int count) +BF_swap(BF_word * x, int count) { /* Swap on little-endian hardware, else do nothing */ #ifndef WORDS_BIGENDIAN diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h b/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h index f730b32050..5bc335e582 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. */ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h,v 1.5 2006/10/04 00:29:46 momjian Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/imath.h,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #ifndef IMATH_H_ #define IMATH_H_ @@ -115,11 +115,12 @@ mp_result mp_int_mul(mp_int a, mp_int b, mp_int c); /* c = a * b */ mp_result mp_int_mul_value(mp_int a, int value, mp_int c); mp_result mp_int_mul_pow2(mp_int a, int p2, mp_int c); mp_result mp_int_sqr(mp_int a, mp_int c); /* c = a * a */ + mp_result -mp_int_div(mp_int a, mp_int b, /* q = a / b */ +mp_int_div(mp_int a, mp_int b, /* q = a / b */ mp_int q, mp_int r); /* r = a % b */ mp_result -mp_int_div_value(mp_int a, int value, /* q = a / value */ +mp_int_div_value(mp_int a, int value, /* q = a / value */ mp_int q, int *r); /* r = a % value */ mp_result mp_int_div_pow2(mp_int a, int p2, /* q = a / 2^p2 */ diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c index 24db7c0cc8..594308673b 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c,v 1.26 2007/03/28 22:48:58 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/internal.c,v 1.27 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ struct int_ctx uint8 iv[INT_MAX_IV]; union { - BlowfishContext bf; + BlowfishContext bf; rijndael_ctx rj; } ctx; unsigned keylen; @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ bf_block_size(PX_Cipher * c) static unsigned bf_key_size(PX_Cipher * c) { - return 448/8; + return 448 / 8; } static unsigned diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c index 10df87f2bf..0f46580005 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c,v 1.31 2007/09/29 02:18:15 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/openssl.c,v 1.32 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -98,10 +98,13 @@ static void AES_cbc_encrypt(const uint8 *src, uint8 *dst, int len, AES_KEY *ctx, uint8 *iv, int enc) { memcpy(dst, src, len); - if (enc) { + if (enc) + { aes_cbc_encrypt(ctx, iv, dst, len); memcpy(iv, dst + len - 16, 16); - } else { + } + else + { aes_cbc_decrypt(ctx, iv, dst, len); memcpy(iv, src + len - 16, 16); } @@ -394,26 +397,27 @@ static int bf_check_supported_key_len(void) { static const uint8 key[56] = { - 0xf0,0xe1,0xd2,0xc3,0xb4,0xa5,0x96,0x87,0x78,0x69, - 0x5a,0x4b,0x3c,0x2d,0x1e,0x0f,0x00,0x11,0x22,0x33, - 0x44,0x55,0x66,0x77,0x04,0x68,0x91,0x04,0xc2,0xfd, - 0x3b,0x2f,0x58,0x40,0x23,0x64,0x1a,0xba,0x61,0x76, - 0x1f,0x1f,0x1f,0x1f,0x0e,0x0e,0x0e,0x0e,0xff,0xff, - 0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff + 0xf0, 0xe1, 0xd2, 0xc3, 0xb4, 0xa5, 0x96, 0x87, 0x78, 0x69, + 0x5a, 0x4b, 0x3c, 0x2d, 0x1e, 0x0f, 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, + 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x04, 0x68, 0x91, 0x04, 0xc2, 0xfd, + 0x3b, 0x2f, 0x58, 0x40, 0x23, 0x64, 0x1a, 0xba, 0x61, 0x76, + 0x1f, 0x1f, 0x1f, 0x1f, 0x0e, 0x0e, 0x0e, 0x0e, 0xff, 0xff, + 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff }; - static const uint8 data[8] = {0xfe,0xdc,0xba,0x98,0x76,0x54,0x32,0x10}; - static const uint8 res[8] = {0xc0,0x45,0x04,0x01,0x2e,0x4e,0x1f,0x53}; + static const uint8 data[8] = {0xfe, 0xdc, 0xba, 0x98, 0x76, 0x54, 0x32, 0x10}; + static const uint8 res[8] = {0xc0, 0x45, 0x04, 0x01, 0x2e, 0x4e, 0x1f, 0x53}; static uint8 out[8]; - BF_KEY bf_key; + BF_KEY bf_key; /* encrypt with 448bits key and verify output */ BF_set_key(&bf_key, 56, key); BF_ecb_encrypt(data, out, &bf_key, BF_ENCRYPT); - if (memcmp(out, res, 8) != 0) - return 0; /* Output does not match -> strong cipher is not supported */ + if (memcmp(out, res, 8) != 0) + return 0; /* Output does not match -> strong cipher is + * not supported */ return 1; } @@ -421,18 +425,19 @@ static int bf_init(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *key, unsigned klen, const uint8 *iv) { ossldata *od = c->ptr; - static int bf_is_strong = -1; + static int bf_is_strong = -1; /* - * Test if key len is supported. BF_set_key silently cut large keys and it could be - * be a problem when user transfer crypted data from one server to another. + * Test if key len is supported. BF_set_key silently cut large keys and it + * could be be a problem when user transfer crypted data from one server + * to another. */ - - if( bf_is_strong == -1) + + if (bf_is_strong == -1) bf_is_strong = bf_check_supported_key_len(); - if( !bf_is_strong && klen>16 ) - return PXE_KEY_TOO_BIG; + if (!bf_is_strong && klen > 16) + return PXE_KEY_TOO_BIG; /* Key len is supported. We can use it. */ BF_set_key(&od->u.bf.key, klen, key); @@ -750,13 +755,14 @@ ossl_aes_init(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *key, unsigned klen, const uint8 *iv) static int ossl_aes_key_init(ossldata * od, int type) { - int err; + int err; + /* - * Strong key support could be missing on some openssl installations. - * We must check return value from set key function. - */ + * Strong key support could be missing on some openssl installations. We + * must check return value from set key function. + */ if (type == AES_ENCRYPT) - err = AES_set_encrypt_key(od->key, od->klen * 8, &od->u.aes_key); + err = AES_set_encrypt_key(od->key, od->klen * 8, &od->u.aes_key); else err = AES_set_decrypt_key(od->key, od->klen * 8, &od->u.aes_key); @@ -776,7 +782,7 @@ ossl_aes_ecb_encrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, unsigned bs = gen_ossl_block_size(c); ossldata *od = c->ptr; const uint8 *end = data + dlen - bs; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_ENCRYPT)) != 0) @@ -794,7 +800,7 @@ ossl_aes_ecb_decrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, unsigned bs = gen_ossl_block_size(c); ossldata *od = c->ptr; const uint8 *end = data + dlen - bs; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_DECRYPT)) != 0) @@ -810,12 +816,12 @@ ossl_aes_cbc_encrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, uint8 *res) { ossldata *od = c->ptr; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_ENCRYPT)) != 0) return err; - + AES_cbc_encrypt(data, res, dlen, &od->u.aes_key, od->iv, AES_ENCRYPT); return 0; } @@ -825,7 +831,7 @@ ossl_aes_cbc_decrypt(PX_Cipher * c, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, uint8 *res) { ossldata *od = c->ptr; - int err; + int err; if (!od->init) if ((err = ossl_aes_key_init(od, AES_DECRYPT)) != 0) diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c index 2942edf2ad..9d2f61ed8e 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c,v 1.6 2007/01/14 20:55:14 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/pgp-compress.c,v 1.7 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -312,7 +312,6 @@ pgp_decompress_filter(PullFilter ** res, PGP_Context * ctx, PullFilter * src) { return pullf_create(res, &decompress_filter, ctx, src); } - #else /* !HAVE_ZLIB */ int diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c index 81222873b6..d1b22d7ec7 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c,v 1.16 2007/08/23 16:15:51 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/px.c,v 1.17 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ combo_decrypt(PX_Combo * cx, const uint8 *data, unsigned dlen, /* with padding, empty ciphertext is not allowed */ if (cx->padding) return PXE_DECRYPT_FAILED; - + /* without padding, report empty result */ *rlen = 0; return 0; diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c index e25f35acde..c2e9da965b 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ * * $From: sha2.c,v 1.1 2001/11/08 00:01:51 adg Exp adg $ * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c,v 1.9 2007/04/06 05:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c,v 1.10 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ (x) = ((tmp & 0xffff0000ffff0000ULL) >> 16) | \ ((tmp & 0x0000ffff0000ffffULL) << 16); \ } -#endif /* not bigendian */ +#endif /* not bigendian */ /* * Macro for incrementally adding the unsigned 64-bit integer n to the diff --git a/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c b/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c index 3018b6aedd..3cd3147895 100644 --- a/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c +++ b/contrib/pgstattuple/pgstatindex.c @@ -159,16 +159,17 @@ pgstatindex(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) else if (P_ISLEAF(opaque)) { - int max_avail; - max_avail = BLCKSZ - (BLCKSZ - ((PageHeader)page)->pd_special + SizeOfPageHeaderData); + int max_avail; + + max_avail = BLCKSZ - (BLCKSZ - ((PageHeader) page)->pd_special + SizeOfPageHeaderData); indexStat.max_avail += max_avail; indexStat.free_space += PageGetFreeSpace(page); indexStat.leaf_pages++; /* - * If the next leaf is on an earlier block, it - * means a fragmentation. + * If the next leaf is on an earlier block, it means a + * fragmentation. */ if (opaque->btpo_next != P_NONE && opaque->btpo_next < blkno) indexStat.fragments++; diff --git a/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c b/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c index 22dc2f2e0e..fd7cafea4b 100644 --- a/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c +++ b/contrib/tablefunc/tablefunc.c @@ -552,8 +552,8 @@ crosstab(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) xpstrdup(values[0], rowid); /* - * Check to see if the rowid is the same as that of the last - * tuple sent -- if so, skip this tuple entirely + * Check to see if the rowid is the same as that of the + * last tuple sent -- if so, skip this tuple entirely */ if (!firstpass && xstreq(lastrowid, rowid)) { @@ -563,8 +563,8 @@ crosstab(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* - * If rowid hasn't changed on us, continue building the - * ouput tuple. + * If rowid hasn't changed on us, continue building the ouput + * tuple. */ if (xstreq(rowid, values[0])) { diff --git a/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c b/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c index 728bf4098f..784d2d43ad 100644 --- a/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c +++ b/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c,v 1.1 2007/10/15 21:36:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/test_parser/test_parser.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -22,40 +22,44 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; */ /* self-defined type */ -typedef struct { - char * buffer; /* text to parse */ - int len; /* length of the text in buffer */ - int pos; /* position of the parser */ -} ParserState; +typedef struct +{ + char *buffer; /* text to parse */ + int len; /* length of the text in buffer */ + int pos; /* position of the parser */ +} ParserState; /* copy-paste from wparser.h of tsearch2 */ -typedef struct { - int lexid; - char *alias; - char *descr; -} LexDescr; +typedef struct +{ + int lexid; + char *alias; + char *descr; +} LexDescr; /* * prototypes */ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_start); -Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_getlexeme); -Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_end); -Datum testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(testprs_lextype); -Datum testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); /* * functions */ -Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) palloc0(sizeof(ParserState)); + pst->buffer = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); pst->len = PG_GETARG_INT32(1); pst->pos = 0; @@ -63,15 +67,16 @@ Datum testprs_start(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_POINTER(pst); } -Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); - char **t = (char **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); - int *tlen = (int *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(2); + ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + char **t = (char **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + int *tlen = (int *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(2); int type; *tlen = pst->pos; - *t = pst->buffer + pst->pos; + *t = pst->buffer + pst->pos; if ((pst->buffer)[pst->pos] == ' ') { @@ -81,7 +86,9 @@ Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) while ((pst->buffer)[pst->pos] == ' ' && pst->pos < pst->len) (pst->pos)++; - } else { + } + else + { /* word type */ type = 3; /* go to the next white-space character */ @@ -94,28 +101,29 @@ Datum testprs_getlexeme(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* we are finished if (*tlen == 0) */ if (*tlen == 0) - type=0; + type = 0; PG_RETURN_INT32(type); } -Datum testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { ParserState *pst = (ParserState *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); + pfree(pst); PG_RETURN_VOID(); } -Datum testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +testprs_lextype(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { /* - * Remarks: - * - we have to return the blanks for headline reason - * - we use the same lexids like Teodor in the default - * word parser; in this way we can reuse the headline - * function of the default word parser. + * Remarks: - we have to return the blanks for headline reason - we use + * the same lexids like Teodor in the default word parser; in this way we + * can reuse the headline function of the default word parser. */ - LexDescr *descr = (LexDescr *) palloc(sizeof(LexDescr) * (2+1)); + LexDescr *descr = (LexDescr *) palloc(sizeof(LexDescr) * (2 + 1)); /* there are only two types in this parser */ descr[0].lexid = 3; diff --git a/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c b/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c index 25fb697529..e0f0f651b8 100644 --- a/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c +++ b/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c,v 1.2 2007/11/13 22:14:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/tsearch2/tsearch2.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -24,8 +24,8 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -static Oid current_dictionary_oid = InvalidOid; -static Oid current_parser_oid = InvalidOid; +static Oid current_dictionary_oid = InvalidOid; +static Oid current_parser_oid = InvalidOid; /* insert given value at argument position 0 */ #define INSERT_ARGUMENT0(argument, isnull) \ @@ -65,27 +65,27 @@ static Oid current_parser_oid = InvalidOid; } \ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(name) -static Oid GetCurrentDict(void); -static Oid GetCurrentParser(void); - -Datum tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curdict_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_token_type_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curprs_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_parse_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_headline_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_ts_stat(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_rewrite_accum(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum tsa_rewrite_finish(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +static Oid GetCurrentDict(void); +static Oid GetCurrentParser(void); + +Datum tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curdict_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_token_type_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curprs_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_parse_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_headline_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_ts_stat(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_rewrite_accum(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tsa_rewrite_finish(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(tsa_lexize_byname); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(tsa_lexize_bycurrent); @@ -150,11 +150,11 @@ UNSUPPORTED_FUNCTION(tsa_get_covers); Datum tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *dictname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + text *dictname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); return DirectFunctionCall2(ts_lexize, - ObjectIdGetDatum(TextGetObjectId(regdictionaryin, dictname)), + ObjectIdGetDatum(TextGetObjectId(regdictionaryin, dictname)), arg1); } @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ tsa_lexize_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); - Oid id = GetCurrentDict(); + Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); + Oid id = GetCurrentDict(); return DirectFunctionCall2(ts_lexize, ObjectIdGetDatum(id), @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ tsa_lexize_bycurrent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid dict_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + Oid dict_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); if (!SearchSysCacheExists(TSDICTOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(dict_oid), @@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ tsa_set_curdict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curdict_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Oid dict_oid; + text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Oid dict_oid; dict_oid = TSDictionaryGetDictid(stringToQualifiedNameList(TextPGetCString(name)), false); @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ tsa_token_type_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid parser_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + Oid parser_oid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); if (!SearchSysCacheExists(TSPARSEROID, ObjectIdGetDatum(parser_oid), @@ -230,8 +230,8 @@ tsa_set_curprs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curprs_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Oid parser_oid; + text *name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Oid parser_oid; parser_oid = TSParserGetPrsid(stringToQualifiedNameList(TextPGetCString(name)), false); @@ -252,12 +252,12 @@ tsa_parse_current(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid arg0 = PG_GETARG_OID(0); - char *name; + Oid arg0 = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + char *name; name = DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(regconfigout, ObjectIdGetDatum(arg0))); - + set_config_option("default_text_search_config", name, PGC_USERSET, PGC_S_SESSION, @@ -271,8 +271,8 @@ tsa_set_curcfg(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *arg0 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - char *name; + text *arg0 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + char *name; name = TextPGetCString(arg0); @@ -289,9 +289,9 @@ tsa_set_curcfg_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Oid config_oid; + text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Oid config_oid; config_oid = TextGetObjectId(regconfigin, cfgname); @@ -303,9 +303,9 @@ tsa_to_tsvector_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Oid config_oid; + text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Oid config_oid; config_oid = TextGetObjectId(regconfigin, cfgname); @@ -318,9 +318,9 @@ tsa_to_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Oid config_oid; + text *cfgname = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Oid config_oid; config_oid = TextGetObjectId(regconfigin, cfgname); @@ -332,22 +332,22 @@ tsa_plainto_tsquery_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum tsa_headline_byname(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); - Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); - Datum arg2 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(2); - Datum result; - Oid config_oid; + Datum arg0 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(0); + Datum arg1 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(1); + Datum arg2 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(2); + Datum result; + Oid config_oid; /* first parameter has to be converted to oid */ config_oid = DatumGetObjectId(DirectFunctionCall1(regconfigin, - DirectFunctionCall1(textout, arg0))); + DirectFunctionCall1(textout, arg0))); if (PG_NARGS() == 3) result = DirectFunctionCall3(ts_headline_byid, - ObjectIdGetDatum(config_oid), arg1, arg2); + ObjectIdGetDatum(config_oid), arg1, arg2); else { - Datum arg3 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(3); + Datum arg3 = PG_GETARG_DATUM(3); result = DirectFunctionCall4(ts_headline_byid_opt, ObjectIdGetDatum(config_oid), @@ -371,11 +371,11 @@ tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { TriggerData *trigdata; Trigger *trigger; - char **tgargs; + char **tgargs; int i; /* Check call context */ - if (!CALLED_AS_TRIGGER(fcinfo)) /* internal error */ + if (!CALLED_AS_TRIGGER(fcinfo)) /* internal error */ elog(ERROR, "tsvector_update_trigger: not fired by trigger manager"); trigdata = (TriggerData *) fcinfo->context; @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ tsa_tsearch2(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) tgargs = (char **) palloc((trigger->tgnargs + 1) * sizeof(char *)); tgargs[0] = trigger->tgargs[0]; for (i = 1; i < trigger->tgnargs; i++) - tgargs[i+1] = trigger->tgargs[i]; + tgargs[i + 1] = trigger->tgargs[i]; tgargs[1] = pstrdup(GetConfigOptionByName("default_text_search_config", NULL)); diff --git a/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c b/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c index d711f47207..e1aa8af094 100644 --- a/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c +++ b/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2007 PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c,v 1.3 2007/10/23 21:38:16 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/uuid-ossp/uuid-ossp.c,v 1.4 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -39,17 +39,17 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -Datum uuid_nil(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_dns(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_url(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_ns_x500(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_nil(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_dns(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_url(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_ns_x500(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v1(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v1mc(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v3(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v4(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum uuid_generate_v5(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v1(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v1mc(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v3(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v4(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum uuid_generate_v5(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(uuid_nil); @@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(uuid_generate_v5); static char * -uuid_to_string(const uuid_t *uuid) +uuid_to_string(const uuid_t * uuid) { - char *buf = palloc(UUID_LEN_STR + 1); - void *ptr = buf; - size_t len = UUID_LEN_STR + 1; + char *buf = palloc(UUID_LEN_STR + 1); + void *ptr = buf; + size_t len = UUID_LEN_STR + 1; uuid_export(uuid, UUID_FMT_STR, &ptr, &len); @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ uuid_to_string(const uuid_t *uuid) static void -string_to_uuid(const char *str, uuid_t *uuid) +string_to_uuid(const char *str, uuid_t * uuid) { uuid_import(uuid, UUID_FMT_STR, str, UUID_LEN_STR + 1); } @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ string_to_uuid(const char *str, uuid_t *uuid) static Datum special_uuid_value(const char *name) { - uuid_t *uuid; - char *str; + uuid_t *uuid; + char *str; uuid_create(&uuid); uuid_load(uuid, name); @@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ uuid_ns_x500(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) static Datum -uuid_generate_internal(int mode, const uuid_t *ns, const char *name) +uuid_generate_internal(int mode, const uuid_t * ns, const char *name) { - uuid_t *uuid; - char *str; + uuid_t *uuid; + char *str; uuid_create(&uuid); uuid_make(uuid, mode, ns, name); @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ uuid_generate_v1mc(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) static Datum -uuid_generate_v35_internal(int mode, pg_uuid_t *ns, text *name) +uuid_generate_v35_internal(int mode, pg_uuid_t * ns, text *name) { uuid_t *ns_uuid; Datum result; @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ uuid_generate_v35_internal(int mode, pg_uuid_t *ns, text *name) result = uuid_generate_internal(mode, ns_uuid, - DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(textout, PointerGetDatum(name)))); + DatumGetCString(DirectFunctionCall1(textout, PointerGetDatum(name)))); uuid_destroy(ns_uuid); diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index a6dab8da12..eb8b136cbd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ * without explicitly invoking the toaster. * * This change will break any code that assumes it needn't detoast values - * that have been put into a tuple but never sent to disk. Hopefully there + * that have been put into a tuple but never sent to disk. Hopefully there * are few such places. * * Varlenas still have alignment 'i' (or 'd') in pg_type/pg_attribute, since @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c,v 1.118 2007/11/07 12:24:23 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c,v 1.119 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -99,19 +99,19 @@ heap_compute_data_size(TupleDesc tupleDesc, for (i = 0; i < numberOfAttributes; i++) { - Datum val; + Datum val; if (isnull[i]) continue; val = values[i]; - if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && + if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && VARATT_CAN_MAKE_SHORT(DatumGetPointer(val))) { /* - * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, - * so adjust length and don't count any alignment + * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, so + * adjust length and don't count any alignment */ data_length += VARATT_CONVERTED_SHORT_SIZE(DatumGetPointer(val)); } @@ -147,19 +147,19 @@ ComputeDataSize(TupleDesc tupleDesc, for (i = 0; i < numberOfAttributes; i++) { - Datum val; + Datum val; if (nulls[i] != ' ') continue; val = values[i]; - if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && + if (ATT_IS_PACKABLE(att[i]) && VARATT_CAN_MAKE_SHORT(DatumGetPointer(val))) { /* - * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, - * so adjust length and don't count any alignment + * we're anticipating converting to a short varlena header, so + * adjust length and don't count any alignment */ data_length += VARATT_CONVERTED_SHORT_SIZE(DatumGetPointer(val)); } @@ -195,6 +195,7 @@ heap_fill_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDesc, int i; int numberOfAttributes = tupleDesc->natts; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDesc->attrs; + #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING char *start = data; #endif @@ -238,8 +239,8 @@ heap_fill_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDesc, } /* - * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, - * not on an offset. This is a bit of a hack. + * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, not on + * an offset. This is a bit of a hack. */ if (att[i]->attbyval) @@ -327,6 +328,7 @@ DataFill(TupleDesc tupleDesc, int i; int numberOfAttributes = tupleDesc->natts; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDesc->attrs; + #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING char *start = data; #endif @@ -370,8 +372,8 @@ DataFill(TupleDesc tupleDesc, } /* - * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, - * not on an offset. This is a bit of a hack. + * XXX we use the att_align macros on the pointer value itself, not on + * an offset. This is a bit of a hack. */ if (att[i]->attbyval) @@ -611,8 +613,8 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, /* * Otherwise, check for non-fixed-length attrs up to and including - * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize - * the cached offsets for these attrs. + * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize the + * cached offsets for these attrs. */ if (HeapTupleHasVarWidth(tuple)) { @@ -673,8 +675,8 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, int i; /* - * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we - * still might be able to cache some offsets for next time. + * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we still + * might be able to cache some offsets for next time. * * Note - This loop is a little tricky. For each non-null attribute, * we have to first account for alignment padding before the attr, @@ -683,12 +685,12 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, * attcacheoff until we reach either a null or a var-width attribute. */ off = 0; - for (i = 0; ; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ + for (i = 0;; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ { if (HeapTupleHasNulls(tuple) && att_isnull(i, bp)) { usecache = false; - continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ + continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ } /* If we know the next offset, we can skip the rest */ @@ -697,10 +699,10 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, else if (att[i]->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be + * no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for + * either an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (usecache && off == att_align_nominal(off, att[i]->attalign)) @@ -771,11 +773,12 @@ heap_getsysattr(HeapTuple tup, int attnum, TupleDesc tupleDesc, bool *isnull) break; case MinCommandIdAttributeNumber: case MaxCommandIdAttributeNumber: + /* - * cmin and cmax are now both aliases for the same field, - * which can in fact also be a combo command id. XXX perhaps we - * should return the "real" cmin or cmax if possible, that is - * if we are inside the originating transaction? + * cmin and cmax are now both aliases for the same field, which + * can in fact also be a combo command id. XXX perhaps we should + * return the "real" cmin or cmax if possible, that is if we are + * inside the originating transaction? */ result = CommandIdGetDatum(HeapTupleHeaderGetRawCommandId(tup->t_data)); break; @@ -855,7 +858,8 @@ heap_form_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, { HeapTuple tuple; /* return tuple */ HeapTupleHeader td; /* tuple data */ - Size len, data_len; + Size len, + data_len; int hoff; bool hasnull = false; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDescriptor->attrs; @@ -965,7 +969,8 @@ heap_formtuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, { HeapTuple tuple; /* return tuple */ HeapTupleHeader td; /* tuple data */ - Size len, data_len; + Size len, + data_len; int hoff; bool hasnull = false; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDescriptor->attrs; @@ -1263,10 +1268,10 @@ heap_deform_tuple(HeapTuple tuple, TupleDesc tupleDesc, else if (thisatt->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be no + * pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for either + * an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (!slow && off == att_align_nominal(off, thisatt->attalign)) @@ -1375,10 +1380,10 @@ heap_deformtuple(HeapTuple tuple, else if (thisatt->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be no + * pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for either + * an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (!slow && off == att_align_nominal(off, thisatt->attalign)) @@ -1484,10 +1489,10 @@ slot_deform_tuple(TupleTableSlot *slot, int natts) else if (thisatt->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be no + * pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for either + * an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (!slow && off == att_align_nominal(off, thisatt->attalign)) @@ -1791,7 +1796,8 @@ heap_form_minimal_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, bool *isnull) { MinimalTuple tuple; /* return tuple */ - Size len, data_len; + Size len, + data_len; int hoff; bool hasnull = false; Form_pg_attribute *att = tupleDescriptor->attrs; diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c index 5412ca0cf3..892363b3a9 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c,v 1.83 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c,v 1.84 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ index_form_tuple(TupleDesc tupleDescriptor, { untoasted_values[i] = PointerGetDatum(heap_tuple_fetch_attr((struct varlena *) - DatumGetPointer(values[i]))); + DatumGetPointer(values[i]))); untoasted_free[i] = true; } @@ -309,8 +309,8 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, /* * Otherwise, check for non-fixed-length attrs up to and including - * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize - * the cached offsets for these attrs. + * target. If there aren't any, it's safe to cheaply initialize the + * cached offsets for these attrs. */ if (IndexTupleHasVarwidths(tup)) { @@ -371,8 +371,8 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, int i; /* - * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we - * still might be able to cache some offsets for next time. + * Now we know that we have to walk the tuple CAREFULLY. But we still + * might be able to cache some offsets for next time. * * Note - This loop is a little tricky. For each non-null attribute, * we have to first account for alignment padding before the attr, @@ -381,12 +381,12 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, * attcacheoff until we reach either a null or a var-width attribute. */ off = 0; - for (i = 0; ; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ + for (i = 0;; i++) /* loop exit is at "break" */ { if (IndexTupleHasNulls(tup) && att_isnull(i, bp)) { usecache = false; - continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ + continue; /* this cannot be the target att */ } /* If we know the next offset, we can skip the rest */ @@ -395,10 +395,10 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, else if (att[i]->attlen == -1) { /* - * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute - * if the offset is already suitably aligned, so that there - * would be no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will - * be valid for either an aligned or unaligned value. + * We can only cache the offset for a varlena attribute if the + * offset is already suitably aligned, so that there would be + * no pad bytes in any case: then the offset will be valid for + * either an aligned or unaligned value. */ if (usecache && off == att_align_nominal(off, att[i]->attalign)) diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c b/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c index 9f40fc59d3..7e4afd70bd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c,v 1.5 2007/06/03 22:16:02 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ parseRelOptions(Datum options, int numkeywords, const char *const * keywords, if (values[j] && validate) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("parameter \"%s\" specified more than once", - keywords[j]))); + errmsg("parameter \"%s\" specified more than once", + keywords[j]))); value_len = text_len - kw_len - 1; value = (char *) palloc(value_len + 1); memcpy(value, text_str + kw_len + 1, value_len); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c index d608bedb60..430b72a92b 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c,v 1.10 2007/08/21 01:11:12 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -60,17 +60,18 @@ ginarrayextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) elmlen, elmbyval, elmalign, &entries, NULL, (int *) nentries); - if ( *nentries == 0 && PG_NARGS() == 3 ) + if (*nentries == 0 && PG_NARGS() == 3) { - switch( PG_GETARG_UINT16(2) ) /* StrategyNumber */ + switch (PG_GETARG_UINT16(2)) /* StrategyNumber */ { case GinOverlapStrategy: - *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ - break; + *nentries = -1; /* nobody can be found */ + break; case GinContainsStrategy: case GinContainedStrategy: case GinEqualStrategy: - default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void arrays */ + default: /* require fullscan: GIN can't find void + * arrays */ break; } } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c index 1a711e93c6..a89c384dfc 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c,v 1.9 2007/06/05 12:47:49 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginbtree.c,v 1.10 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -317,8 +317,8 @@ ginInsertValue(GinBtree btree, GinBtreeStack *stack) Page newlpage; /* - * newlpage is a pointer to memory page, it doesn't associate - * with buffer, stack->buffer should be untouched + * newlpage is a pointer to memory page, it doesn't associate with + * buffer, stack->buffer should be untouched */ newlpage = btree->splitPage(btree, stack->buffer, rbuffer, stack->off, &rdata); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c b/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c index d9242c667a..eb6ccfc0b4 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c,v 1.7 2007/06/04 15:56:28 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c,v 1.8 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda static XLogRecData rdata[3]; int sizeofitem = GinSizeOfItem(page); static ginxlogInsert data; - int cnt=0; + int cnt = 0; *prdata = rdata; Assert(GinPageIsData(page)); @@ -373,14 +373,14 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda data.isData = TRUE; data.isLeaf = GinPageIsLeaf(page) ? TRUE : FALSE; - /* - * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed - * to remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL - * - * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right page) - * for recently splited page. + /* + * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed to + * remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL + * + * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right + * page) for recently splited page. */ - if ( data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber ) + if (data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) { rdata[0].buffer = buf; rdata[0].buffer_std = FALSE; @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; rdata[cnt].data = (char *) &data; rdata[cnt].len = sizeof(ginxlogInsert); - rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt+1]; + rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt + 1]; cnt++; rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c index 2c335aea0c..134c5f99dd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c,v 1.10 2007/10/29 13:49:21 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd static XLogRecData rdata[3]; OffsetNumber placed; static ginxlogInsert data; - int cnt=0; + int cnt = 0; *prdata = rdata; data.updateBlkno = entryPreparePage(btree, page, off); @@ -372,14 +372,14 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd data.isData = false; data.isLeaf = GinPageIsLeaf(page) ? TRUE : FALSE; - /* - * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed - * to remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL + /* + * Prevent full page write if child's split occurs. That is needed to + * remove incomplete splits while replaying WAL * - * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right page) - * for recently splited page. + * data.updateBlkno contains new block number (of newly created right + * page) for recently splited page. */ - if ( data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber ) + if (data.updateBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) { rdata[0].buffer = buf; rdata[0].buffer_std = TRUE; @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; rdata[cnt].data = (char *) &data; rdata[cnt].len = sizeof(ginxlogInsert); - rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt+1]; + rdata[cnt].next = &rdata[cnt + 1]; cnt++; rdata[cnt].buffer = InvalidBuffer; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c index 66949f964c..b964f036a0 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c,v 1.8 2007/06/04 15:56:28 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c,v 1.9 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -23,29 +23,29 @@ findItemInPage(Page page, ItemPointer item, OffsetNumber *off) OffsetNumber maxoff = GinPageGetOpaque(page)->maxoff; int res; - if ( GinPageGetOpaque(page)->flags & GIN_DELETED ) + if (GinPageGetOpaque(page)->flags & GIN_DELETED) /* page was deleted by concurrent vacuum */ return false; - if ( *off > maxoff || *off == InvalidOffsetNumber ) + if (*off > maxoff || *off == InvalidOffsetNumber) res = -1; else res = compareItemPointers(item, (ItemPointer) GinDataPageGetItem(page, *off)); - if ( res == 0 ) + if (res == 0) { /* page isn't changed */ - return true; - } - else if ( res > 0 ) + return true; + } + else if (res > 0) { - /* - * some items was added before our position, look further to find - * it or first greater + /* + * some items was added before our position, look further to find it + * or first greater */ - + (*off)++; - for (; *off <= maxoff; (*off)++) + for (; *off <= maxoff; (*off)++) { res = compareItemPointers(item, (ItemPointer) GinDataPageGetItem(page, *off)); @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ findItemInPage(Page page, ItemPointer item, OffsetNumber *off) return true; if (res < 0) - { + { (*off)--; return true; } @@ -61,20 +61,20 @@ findItemInPage(Page page, ItemPointer item, OffsetNumber *off) } else { - /* - * some items was deleted before our position, look from begining - * to find it or first greater + /* + * some items was deleted before our position, look from begining to + * find it or first greater */ - for(*off = FirstOffsetNumber; *off<= maxoff; (*off)++) + for (*off = FirstOffsetNumber; *off <= maxoff; (*off)++) { res = compareItemPointers(item, (ItemPointer) GinDataPageGetItem(page, *off)); - if ( res == 0 ) + if (res == 0) return true; if (res < 0) - { + { (*off)--; return true; } @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ startScanEntry(Relation index, GinState *ginstate, GinScanEntry entry, bool firs page = BufferGetPage(entry->buffer); /* try to find curItem in current buffer */ - if ( findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset) ) + if (findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset)) return; /* walk to right */ @@ -186,13 +186,13 @@ startScanEntry(Relation index, GinState *ginstate, GinScanEntry entry, bool firs page = BufferGetPage(entry->buffer); entry->offset = InvalidOffsetNumber; - if ( findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset) ) + if (findItemInPage(page, &entry->curItem, &entry->offset)) return; } /* - * curItem and any greated items was deleted by concurrent vacuum, - * so we finished scan with currrent entry + * curItem and any greated items was deleted by concurrent vacuum, so + * we finished scan with currrent entry */ } } @@ -221,10 +221,10 @@ startScanKey(Relation index, GinState *ginstate, GinScanKey key) if (GinFuzzySearchLimit > 0) { /* - * If all of keys more than threshold we will try to reduce result, - * we hope (and only hope, for intersection operation of array our - * supposition isn't true), that total result will not more than - * minimal predictNumberResult. + * If all of keys more than threshold we will try to reduce + * result, we hope (and only hope, for intersection operation of + * array our supposition isn't true), that total result will not + * more than minimal predictNumberResult. */ for (i = 0; i < key->nentries; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c index 2eb1ba95b4..2e40f8b8d8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c,v 1.10 2007/05/27 03:50:38 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ newScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) UInt16GetDatum(scankey[i].sk_strategy) ) ); - if ( nEntryValues < 0 ) + if (nEntryValues < 0) { /* - * extractQueryFn signals that nothing will be found, - * so we can just set isVoidRes flag... + * extractQueryFn signals that nothing will be found, so we can + * just set isVoidRes flag... */ - so->isVoidRes = true; + so->isVoidRes = true; break; } if (entryValues == NULL || nEntryValues == 0) @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ newScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) if (so->nkeys == 0 && !so->isVoidRes) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("GIN index does not support search with void query"))); + errmsg("GIN index does not support search with void query"))); pgstat_count_index_scan(scan->indexRelation); } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c index e704e8051e..488a58beb5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c,v 1.10 2007/01/31 15:09:45 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -126,17 +126,17 @@ compareEntries(GinState *ginstate, Datum a, Datum b) &ginstate->compareFn, a, b ) - ); + ); } typedef struct { FmgrInfo *cmpDatumFunc; bool *needUnique; -} cmpEntriesData; +} cmpEntriesData; static int -cmpEntries(const Datum *a, const Datum *b, cmpEntriesData *arg) +cmpEntries(const Datum *a, const Datum *b, cmpEntriesData * arg) { int res = DatumGetInt32(FunctionCall2(arg->cmpDatumFunc, *a, *b)); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c index 1f26869d64..9c0482a890 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c,v 1.17 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c,v 1.18 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ typedef struct IndexBulkDeleteCallback callback; void *callback_state; GinState ginstate; - BufferAccessStrategy strategy; + BufferAccessStrategy strategy; } GinVacuumState; @@ -160,14 +160,14 @@ ginVacuumPostingTreeLeaves(GinVacuumState *gvs, BlockNumber blkno, bool isRoot, /* * We should be sure that we don't concurrent with inserts, insert process * never release root page until end (but it can unlock it and lock - * again). New scan can't start but previously started - * ones work concurrently. + * again). New scan can't start but previously started ones work + * concurrently. */ - if ( isRoot ) + if (isRoot) LockBufferForCleanup(buffer); else - LockBuffer(buffer, GIN_EXCLUSIVE); + LockBuffer(buffer, GIN_EXCLUSIVE); Assert(GinPageIsData(page)); @@ -240,8 +240,8 @@ ginDeletePage(GinVacuumState *gvs, BlockNumber deleteBlkno, BlockNumber leftBlkn BlockNumber parentBlkno, OffsetNumber myoff, bool isParentRoot) { Buffer dBuffer = ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, deleteBlkno, gvs->strategy); - Buffer lBuffer = (leftBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) ? - InvalidBuffer : ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, leftBlkno, gvs->strategy); + Buffer lBuffer = (leftBlkno == InvalidBlockNumber) ? + InvalidBuffer : ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, leftBlkno, gvs->strategy); Buffer pBuffer = ReadBufferWithStrategy(gvs->index, parentBlkno, gvs->strategy); Page page, parentPage; @@ -268,17 +268,20 @@ ginDeletePage(GinVacuumState *gvs, BlockNumber deleteBlkno, BlockNumber leftBlkn parentPage = BufferGetPage(pBuffer); #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING - do { - PostingItem *tod=(PostingItem *) GinDataPageGetItem(parentPage, myoff); - Assert( PostingItemGetBlockNumber(tod) == deleteBlkno ); - } while(0); + do + { + PostingItem *tod = (PostingItem *) GinDataPageGetItem(parentPage, myoff); + + Assert(PostingItemGetBlockNumber(tod) == deleteBlkno); + } while (0); #endif PageDeletePostingItem(parentPage, myoff); page = BufferGetPage(dBuffer); + /* - * we shouldn't change rightlink field to save - * workability of running search scan + * we shouldn't change rightlink field to save workability of running + * search scan */ GinPageGetOpaque(page)->flags = GIN_DELETED; @@ -363,8 +366,8 @@ typedef struct DataPageDeleteStack struct DataPageDeleteStack *child; struct DataPageDeleteStack *parent; - BlockNumber blkno; /* current block number */ - BlockNumber leftBlkno; /* rightest non-deleted page on left */ + BlockNumber blkno; /* current block number */ + BlockNumber leftBlkno; /* rightest non-deleted page on left */ bool isRoot; } DataPageDeleteStack; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c index 79fbb496b5..7649e4c900 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c,v 1.10 2007/10/29 19:26:57 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c,v 1.11 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) Assert(data->isDelete == FALSE); Assert(GinPageIsData(page)); - if ( ! XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page)) ) + if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { if (data->isLeaf) { @@ -170,6 +170,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) if (!data->isLeaf && data->updateBlkno != InvalidBlockNumber) { PostingItem *pitem = (PostingItem *) (XLogRecGetData(record) + sizeof(ginxlogInsert)); + forgetIncompleteSplit(data->node, PostingItemGetBlockNumber(pitem), data->updateBlkno); } @@ -180,7 +181,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) Assert(!GinPageIsData(page)); - if ( ! XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page)) ) + if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { if (data->updateBlkno != InvalidBlockNumber) { @@ -202,7 +203,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) if (PageAddItem(page, (Item) itup, IndexTupleSize(itup), data->offset, false, false) == InvalidOffsetNumber) elog(ERROR, "failed to add item to index page in %u/%u/%u", - data->node.spcNode, data->node.dbNode, data->node.relNode); + data->node.spcNode, data->node.dbNode, data->node.relNode); } if (!data->isLeaf && data->updateBlkno != InvalidBlockNumber) @@ -212,7 +213,7 @@ ginRedoInsert(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) } } - if ( ! XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page)) ) + if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { PageSetLSN(page, lsn); PageSetTLI(page, ThisTimeLineID); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c index 0c1b94d7d3..770c2023bd 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c,v 1.147 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c,v 1.148 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -360,8 +360,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate) ptr->block.blkno = BufferGetBlockNumber(ptr->buffer); /* - * fill page, we can do it because all these pages are new - * (ie not linked in tree or masked by temp page + * fill page, we can do it because all these pages are new (ie not + * linked in tree or masked by temp page */ data = (char *) (ptr->list); for (i = 0; i < ptr->block.num; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c index ba7a8ab959..cb1919ac6e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c,v 1.67 2007/09/12 22:10:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c,v 1.68 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -383,13 +383,12 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexTuple tuple, /* * On non-leaf page we can't conclude that child hasn't NULL * values because of assumption in GiST: uinon (VAL, NULL) is VAL - * But if on non-leaf page key IS NULL then all childs - * has NULL. + * But if on non-leaf page key IS NULL then all childs has NULL. */ - Assert( key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNULL ); + Assert(key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNULL); - if ( GistPageIsLeaf(p) && !isNull ) + if (GistPageIsLeaf(p) && !isNull) return false; } else if (isNull) @@ -404,12 +403,14 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexTuple tuple, FALSE, isNull); /* - * Call the Consistent function to evaluate the test. The arguments - * are the index datum (as a GISTENTRY*), the comparison datum, and - * the comparison operator's strategy number and subtype from pg_amop. + * Call the Consistent function to evaluate the test. The + * arguments are the index datum (as a GISTENTRY*), the comparison + * datum, and the comparison operator's strategy number and + * subtype from pg_amop. * - * (Presently there's no need to pass the subtype since it'll always - * be zero, but might as well pass it for possible future use.) + * (Presently there's no need to pass the subtype since it'll + * always be zero, but might as well pass it for possible future + * use.) */ test = FunctionCall4(&key->sk_func, PointerGetDatum(&de), diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c index 590be9133f..e461b5923d 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c,v 1.11 2007/09/07 17:04:26 teodor Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c,v 1.12 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -394,20 +394,22 @@ gist_box_picksplit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ADDLIST(listT, unionT, posT, i); } -#define LIMIT_RATIO 0.1 +#define LIMIT_RATIO 0.1 #define _IS_BADRATIO(x,y) ( (y) == 0 || (float)(x)/(float)(y) < LIMIT_RATIO ) #define IS_BADRATIO(x,y) ( _IS_BADRATIO((x),(y)) || _IS_BADRATIO((y),(x)) ) /* bad disposition, try to split by centers of boxes */ - if ( IS_BADRATIO(posR, posL) && IS_BADRATIO(posT, posB) ) + if (IS_BADRATIO(posR, posL) && IS_BADRATIO(posT, posB)) { - double avgCenterX=0.0, avgCenterY=0.0; - double CenterX, CenterY; + double avgCenterX = 0.0, + avgCenterY = 0.0; + double CenterX, + CenterY; for (i = FirstOffsetNumber; i <= maxoff; i = OffsetNumberNext(i)) { cur = DatumGetBoxP(entryvec->vector[i].key); - avgCenterX += ((double)cur->high.x + (double)cur->low.x)/2.0; - avgCenterY += ((double)cur->high.y + (double)cur->low.y)/2.0; + avgCenterX += ((double) cur->high.x + (double) cur->low.x) / 2.0; + avgCenterY += ((double) cur->high.y + (double) cur->low.y) / 2.0; } avgCenterX /= maxoff; @@ -417,11 +419,11 @@ gist_box_picksplit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) for (i = FirstOffsetNumber; i <= maxoff; i = OffsetNumberNext(i)) { cur = DatumGetBoxP(entryvec->vector[i].key); - - CenterX = ((double)cur->high.x + (double)cur->low.x)/2.0; - CenterY = ((double)cur->high.y + (double)cur->low.y)/2.0; - if (CenterX < avgCenterX) + CenterX = ((double) cur->high.x + (double) cur->low.x) / 2.0; + CenterY = ((double) cur->high.y + (double) cur->low.y) / 2.0; + + if (CenterX < avgCenterX) ADDLIST(listL, unionL, posL, i); else if (CenterX == avgCenterX) { @@ -442,7 +444,7 @@ gist_box_picksplit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) else ADDLIST(listB, unionB, posB, i); } - else + else ADDLIST(listT, unionT, posT, i); } } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c index 212995e7c5..dace2c8906 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c,v 1.32 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistvacuum.c,v 1.33 2007/11/15 21:14:31 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ typedef struct Relation index; MemoryContext opCtx; GistBulkDeleteResult *result; - BufferAccessStrategy strategy; + BufferAccessStrategy strategy; } GistVacuum; typedef struct diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c index d3f54c934b..5933b02e8e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c,v 1.96 2007/09/12 22:10:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c,v 1.97 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * This file contains only the public interface routines. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ loop_top: vacuum_delay_point(); buf = _hash_getbuf_with_strategy(rel, blkno, HASH_WRITE, - LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, + LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, info->strategy); page = BufferGetPage(buf); opaque = (HashPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(page); diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c index 71fe34c8a2..4d1b1ed45c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c,v 1.53 2007/09/21 22:52:52 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashfunc.c,v 1.54 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * These functions are stored in pg_amproc. For each operator class @@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ hashfloat4(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * To support cross-type hashing of float8 and float4, we want to return * the same hash value hashfloat8 would produce for an equal float8 value. * So, widen the value to float8 and hash that. (We must do this rather - * than have hashfloat8 try to narrow its value to float4; that could - * fail on overflow.) + * than have hashfloat8 try to narrow its value to float4; that could fail + * on overflow.) */ key8 = key; diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c index e4ea24a62d..c510c6e65b 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c,v 1.60 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c,v 1.61 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Overflow pages look like ordinary relation pages. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ _hash_addovflpage(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf, Buffer buf) /* * _hash_getovflpage() * - * Find an available overflow page and return it. The returned buffer + * Find an available overflow page and return it. The returned buffer * is pinned and write-locked, and has had _hash_pageinit() applied, * but it is caller's responsibility to fill the special space. * @@ -402,9 +402,9 @@ _hash_freeovflpage(Relation rel, Buffer ovflbuf, bucket = ovflopaque->hasho_bucket; /* - * Zero the page for debugging's sake; then write and release it. - * (Note: if we failed to zero the page here, we'd have problems - * with the Assert in _hash_pageinit() when the page is reused.) + * Zero the page for debugging's sake; then write and release it. (Note: + * if we failed to zero the page here, we'd have problems with the Assert + * in _hash_pageinit() when the page is reused.) */ MemSet(ovflpage, 0, BufferGetPageSize(ovflbuf)); _hash_wrtbuf(rel, ovflbuf); @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ _hash_freeovflpage(Relation rel, Buffer ovflbuf, Buffer prevbuf = _hash_getbuf_with_strategy(rel, prevblkno, HASH_WRITE, - LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, + LH_BUCKET_PAGE | LH_OVERFLOW_PAGE, bstrategy); Page prevpage = BufferGetPage(prevbuf); HashPageOpaque prevopaque = (HashPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(prevpage); diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c index 807dbed8a8..07f27001a8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c,v 1.70 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c,v 1.71 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Postgres hash pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ static bool _hash_alloc_buckets(Relation rel, BlockNumber firstblock, - uint32 nblocks); + uint32 nblocks); static void _hash_splitbucket(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf, Bucket obucket, Bucket nbucket, BlockNumber start_oblkno, @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ _hash_getbuf(Relation rel, BlockNumber blkno, int access, int flags) * * This must be used only to fetch pages that are known to be before * the index's filesystem EOF, but are to be filled from scratch. - * _hash_pageinit() is applied automatically. Otherwise it has + * _hash_pageinit() is applied automatically. Otherwise it has * effects similar to _hash_getbuf() with access = HASH_WRITE. * * When this routine returns, a write lock is set on the @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ _hash_getinitbuf(Relation rel, BlockNumber blkno) Buffer _hash_getnewbuf(Relation rel, BlockNumber blkno) { - BlockNumber nblocks = RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(rel); + BlockNumber nblocks = RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(rel); Buffer buf; if (blkno == P_NEW) @@ -354,10 +354,10 @@ _hash_metapinit(Relation rel) ffactor = 10; /* - * We initialize the metapage, the first two bucket pages, and the - * first bitmap page in sequence, using _hash_getnewbuf to cause - * smgrextend() calls to occur. This ensures that the smgr level - * has the right idea of the physical index length. + * We initialize the metapage, the first two bucket pages, and the first + * bitmap page in sequence, using _hash_getnewbuf to cause smgrextend() + * calls to occur. This ensures that the smgr level has the right idea of + * the physical index length. */ metabuf = _hash_getnewbuf(rel, HASH_METAPAGE); pg = BufferGetPage(metabuf); @@ -501,15 +501,16 @@ _hash_expandtable(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf) goto fail; /* - * Can't split anymore if maxbucket has reached its maximum possible value. + * Can't split anymore if maxbucket has reached its maximum possible + * value. * * Ideally we'd allow bucket numbers up to UINT_MAX-1 (no higher because * the calculation maxbucket+1 mustn't overflow). Currently we restrict * to half that because of overflow looping in _hash_log2() and * insufficient space in hashm_spares[]. It's moot anyway because an - * index with 2^32 buckets would certainly overflow BlockNumber and - * hence _hash_alloc_buckets() would fail, but if we supported buckets - * smaller than a disk block then this would be an independent constraint. + * index with 2^32 buckets would certainly overflow BlockNumber and hence + * _hash_alloc_buckets() would fail, but if we supported buckets smaller + * than a disk block then this would be an independent constraint. */ if (metap->hashm_maxbucket >= (uint32) 0x7FFFFFFE) goto fail; @@ -536,10 +537,10 @@ _hash_expandtable(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf) /* * Likewise lock the new bucket (should never fail). * - * Note: it is safe to compute the new bucket's blkno here, even though - * we may still need to update the BUCKET_TO_BLKNO mapping. This is - * because the current value of hashm_spares[hashm_ovflpoint] correctly - * shows where we are going to put a new splitpoint's worth of buckets. + * Note: it is safe to compute the new bucket's blkno here, even though we + * may still need to update the BUCKET_TO_BLKNO mapping. This is because + * the current value of hashm_spares[hashm_ovflpoint] correctly shows + * where we are going to put a new splitpoint's worth of buckets. */ start_nblkno = BUCKET_TO_BLKNO(metap, new_bucket); @@ -557,11 +558,12 @@ _hash_expandtable(Relation rel, Buffer metabuf) if (spare_ndx > metap->hashm_ovflpoint) { Assert(spare_ndx == metap->hashm_ovflpoint + 1); + /* - * The number of buckets in the new splitpoint is equal to the - * total number already in existence, i.e. new_bucket. Currently - * this maps one-to-one to blocks required, but someday we may need - * a more complicated calculation here. + * The number of buckets in the new splitpoint is equal to the total + * number already in existence, i.e. new_bucket. Currently this maps + * one-to-one to blocks required, but someday we may need a more + * complicated calculation here. */ if (!_hash_alloc_buckets(rel, start_nblkno, new_bucket)) { @@ -673,14 +675,14 @@ fail: static bool _hash_alloc_buckets(Relation rel, BlockNumber firstblock, uint32 nblocks) { - BlockNumber lastblock; + BlockNumber lastblock; char zerobuf[BLCKSZ]; lastblock = firstblock + nblocks - 1; /* - * Check for overflow in block number calculation; if so, we cannot - * extend the index anymore. + * Check for overflow in block number calculation; if so, we cannot extend + * the index anymore. */ if (lastblock < firstblock || lastblock == InvalidBlockNumber) return false; diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c index 052393fc6b..20027592b5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.244 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.245 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ static HeapScanDesc heap_beginscan_internal(Relation relation, - Snapshot snapshot, - int nkeys, ScanKey key, - bool is_bitmapscan); + Snapshot snapshot, + int nkeys, ScanKey key, + bool is_bitmapscan); static XLogRecPtr log_heap_update(Relation reln, Buffer oldbuf, ItemPointerData from, Buffer newbuf, HeapTuple newtup, bool move); static bool HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(Relation relation, Bitmapset *hot_attrs, @@ -85,18 +85,18 @@ initscan(HeapScanDesc scan, ScanKey key) * Determine the number of blocks we have to scan. * * It is sufficient to do this once at scan start, since any tuples added - * while the scan is in progress will be invisible to my snapshot - * anyway. (That is not true when using a non-MVCC snapshot. However, - * we couldn't guarantee to return tuples added after scan start anyway, - * since they might go into pages we already scanned. To guarantee - * consistent results for a non-MVCC snapshot, the caller must hold some - * higher-level lock that ensures the interesting tuple(s) won't change.) + * while the scan is in progress will be invisible to my snapshot anyway. + * (That is not true when using a non-MVCC snapshot. However, we couldn't + * guarantee to return tuples added after scan start anyway, since they + * might go into pages we already scanned. To guarantee consistent + * results for a non-MVCC snapshot, the caller must hold some higher-level + * lock that ensures the interesting tuple(s) won't change.) */ scan->rs_nblocks = RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(scan->rs_rd); /* * If the table is large relative to NBuffers, use a bulk-read access - * strategy and enable synchronized scanning (see syncscan.c). Although + * strategy and enable synchronized scanning (see syncscan.c). Although * the thresholds for these features could be different, we make them the * same so that there are only two behaviors to tune rather than four. * @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ initscan(HeapScanDesc scan, ScanKey key) memcpy(scan->rs_key, key, scan->rs_nkeys * sizeof(ScanKeyData)); /* - * Currently, we don't have a stats counter for bitmap heap scans - * (but the underlying bitmap index scans will be counted). + * Currently, we don't have a stats counter for bitmap heap scans (but the + * underlying bitmap index scans will be counted). */ if (!scan->rs_bitmapscan) pgstat_count_heap_scan(scan->rs_rd); @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ heapgettup(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } - page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ + page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ heapgetpage(scan, page); lineoff = FirstOffsetNumber; /* first offnum */ scan->rs_inited = true; @@ -317,6 +317,7 @@ heapgettup(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } + /* * Disable reporting to syncscan logic in a backwards scan; it's * not very likely anyone else is doing the same thing at the same @@ -459,9 +460,9 @@ heapgettup(HeapScanDesc scan, finished = (page == scan->rs_startblock); /* - * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. - * We don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would - * just mess up any other forward-moving scanners. + * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. We + * don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would just + * mess up any other forward-moving scanners. * * Note: we do this before checking for end of scan so that the * final state of the position hint is back at the start of the @@ -554,7 +555,7 @@ heapgettup_pagemode(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } - page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ + page = scan->rs_startblock; /* first page */ heapgetpage(scan, page); lineindex = 0; scan->rs_inited = true; @@ -585,6 +586,7 @@ heapgettup_pagemode(HeapScanDesc scan, tuple->t_data = NULL; return; } + /* * Disable reporting to syncscan logic in a backwards scan; it's * not very likely anyone else is doing the same thing at the same @@ -719,9 +721,9 @@ heapgettup_pagemode(HeapScanDesc scan, finished = (page == scan->rs_startblock); /* - * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. - * We don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would - * just mess up any other forward-moving scanners. + * Report our new scan position for synchronization purposes. We + * don't do that when moving backwards, however. That would just + * mess up any other forward-moving scanners. * * Note: we do this before checking for end of scan so that the * final state of the position hint is back at the start of the @@ -1057,7 +1059,7 @@ heap_openrv(const RangeVar *relation, LOCKMODE lockmode) * heap_beginscan - begin relation scan * * heap_beginscan_bm is an alternative entry point for setting up a HeapScanDesc - * for a bitmap heap scan. Although that scan technology is really quite + * for a bitmap heap scan. Although that scan technology is really quite * unlike a standard seqscan, there is just enough commonality to make it * worth using the same data structure. * ---------------- @@ -1423,10 +1425,10 @@ bool heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, bool *all_dead) { - Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); TransactionId prev_xmax = InvalidTransactionId; OffsetNumber offnum; - bool at_chain_start; + bool at_chain_start; if (all_dead) *all_dead = true; @@ -1438,7 +1440,7 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, /* Scan through possible multiple members of HOT-chain */ for (;;) { - ItemId lp; + ItemId lp; HeapTupleData heapTuple; /* check for bogus TID */ @@ -1472,7 +1474,8 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, break; /* - * The xmin should match the previous xmax value, else chain is broken. + * The xmin should match the previous xmax value, else chain is + * broken. */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(prev_xmax) && !TransactionIdEquals(prev_xmax, @@ -1499,8 +1502,8 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, *all_dead = false; /* - * Check to see if HOT chain continues past this tuple; if so - * fetch the next offnum and loop around. + * Check to see if HOT chain continues past this tuple; if so fetch + * the next offnum and loop around. */ if (HeapTupleIsHotUpdated(&heapTuple)) { @@ -1511,7 +1514,7 @@ heap_hot_search_buffer(ItemPointer tid, Buffer buffer, Snapshot snapshot, prev_xmax = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple.t_data); } else - break; /* end of chain */ + break; /* end of chain */ } return false; @@ -1528,8 +1531,8 @@ bool heap_hot_search(ItemPointer tid, Relation relation, Snapshot snapshot, bool *all_dead) { - bool result; - Buffer buffer; + bool result; + Buffer buffer; buffer = ReadBuffer(relation, ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(tid)); LockBuffer(buffer, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); @@ -1665,7 +1668,7 @@ heap_get_latest_tid(Relation relation, * * This is called after we have waited for the XMAX transaction to terminate. * If the transaction aborted, we guarantee the XMAX_INVALID hint bit will - * be set on exit. If the transaction committed, we set the XMAX_COMMITTED + * be set on exit. If the transaction committed, we set the XMAX_COMMITTED * hint bit if possible --- but beware that that may not yet be possible, * if the transaction committed asynchronously. Hence callers should look * only at XMAX_INVALID. @@ -2069,7 +2072,7 @@ l1: /* * If this transaction commits, the tuple will become DEAD sooner or * later. Set flag that this page is a candidate for pruning once our xid - * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, + * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, * the subsequent page pruning will be a no-op and the hint will be * cleared. */ @@ -2252,15 +2255,15 @@ heap_update(Relation relation, ItemPointer otid, HeapTuple newtup, /* * Fetch the list of attributes to be checked for HOT update. This is - * wasted effort if we fail to update or have to put the new tuple on - * a different page. But we must compute the list before obtaining - * buffer lock --- in the worst case, if we are doing an update on one - * of the relevant system catalogs, we could deadlock if we try to - * fetch the list later. In any case, the relcache caches the data - * so this is usually pretty cheap. + * wasted effort if we fail to update or have to put the new tuple on a + * different page. But we must compute the list before obtaining buffer + * lock --- in the worst case, if we are doing an update on one of the + * relevant system catalogs, we could deadlock if we try to fetch the list + * later. In any case, the relcache caches the data so this is usually + * pretty cheap. * - * Note that we get a copy here, so we need not worry about relcache - * flush happening midway through. + * Note that we get a copy here, so we need not worry about relcache flush + * happening midway through. */ hot_attrs = RelationGetIndexAttrBitmap(relation); @@ -2555,7 +2558,7 @@ l2: { /* * Since the new tuple is going into the same page, we might be able - * to do a HOT update. Check if any of the index columns have been + * to do a HOT update. Check if any of the index columns have been * changed. If not, then HOT update is possible. */ if (HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(relation, hot_attrs, &oldtup, heaptup)) @@ -2573,14 +2576,14 @@ l2: /* * If this transaction commits, the old tuple will become DEAD sooner or * later. Set flag that this page is a candidate for pruning once our xid - * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, + * falls below the OldestXmin horizon. If the transaction finally aborts, * the subsequent page pruning will be a no-op and the hint will be * cleared. * - * XXX Should we set hint on newbuf as well? If the transaction - * aborts, there would be a prunable tuple in the newbuf; but for now - * we choose not to optimize for aborts. Note that heap_xlog_update - * must be kept in sync if this decision changes. + * XXX Should we set hint on newbuf as well? If the transaction aborts, + * there would be a prunable tuple in the newbuf; but for now we choose + * not to optimize for aborts. Note that heap_xlog_update must be kept in + * sync if this decision changes. */ PageSetPrunable(dp, xid); @@ -2695,22 +2698,24 @@ static bool heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, HeapTuple tup1, HeapTuple tup2) { - Datum value1, value2; - bool isnull1, isnull2; + Datum value1, + value2; + bool isnull1, + isnull2; Form_pg_attribute att; /* * If it's a whole-tuple reference, say "not equal". It's not really - * worth supporting this case, since it could only succeed after a - * no-op update, which is hardly a case worth optimizing for. + * worth supporting this case, since it could only succeed after a no-op + * update, which is hardly a case worth optimizing for. */ if (attrnum == 0) return false; /* - * Likewise, automatically say "not equal" for any system attribute - * other than OID and tableOID; we cannot expect these to be consistent - * in a HOT chain, or even to be set correctly yet in the new tuple. + * Likewise, automatically say "not equal" for any system attribute other + * than OID and tableOID; we cannot expect these to be consistent in a HOT + * chain, or even to be set correctly yet in the new tuple. */ if (attrnum < 0) { @@ -2720,17 +2725,17 @@ heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, } /* - * Extract the corresponding values. XXX this is pretty inefficient - * if there are many indexed columns. Should HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate - * do a single heap_deform_tuple call on each tuple, instead? But - * that doesn't work for system columns ... + * Extract the corresponding values. XXX this is pretty inefficient if + * there are many indexed columns. Should HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate do a + * single heap_deform_tuple call on each tuple, instead? But that doesn't + * work for system columns ... */ value1 = heap_getattr(tup1, attrnum, tupdesc, &isnull1); value2 = heap_getattr(tup2, attrnum, tupdesc, &isnull2); /* - * If one value is NULL and other is not, then they are certainly - * not equal + * If one value is NULL and other is not, then they are certainly not + * equal */ if (isnull1 != isnull2) return false; @@ -2744,7 +2749,7 @@ heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, /* * We do simple binary comparison of the two datums. This may be overly * strict because there can be multiple binary representations for the - * same logical value. But we should be OK as long as there are no false + * same logical value. But we should be OK as long as there are no false * positives. Using a type-specific equality operator is messy because * there could be multiple notions of equality in different operator * classes; furthermore, we cannot safely invoke user-defined functions @@ -2758,7 +2763,7 @@ heap_tuple_attr_equals(TupleDesc tupdesc, int attrnum, else { Assert(attrnum <= tupdesc->natts); - att = tupdesc->attrs[attrnum - 1]; + att = tupdesc->attrs[attrnum - 1]; return datumIsEqual(value1, value2, att->attbyval, att->attlen); } } @@ -2779,7 +2784,7 @@ static bool HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(Relation relation, Bitmapset *hot_attrs, HeapTuple oldtup, HeapTuple newtup) { - int attrnum; + int attrnum; while ((attrnum = bms_first_member(hot_attrs)) >= 0) { @@ -3094,15 +3099,15 @@ l3: } /* - * We might already hold the desired lock (or stronger), possibly under - * a different subtransaction of the current top transaction. If so, - * there is no need to change state or issue a WAL record. We already - * handled the case where this is true for xmax being a MultiXactId, - * so now check for cases where it is a plain TransactionId. + * We might already hold the desired lock (or stronger), possibly under a + * different subtransaction of the current top transaction. If so, there + * is no need to change state or issue a WAL record. We already handled + * the case where this is true for xmax being a MultiXactId, so now check + * for cases where it is a plain TransactionId. * * Note in particular that this covers the case where we already hold - * exclusive lock on the tuple and the caller only wants shared lock. - * It would certainly not do to give up the exclusive lock. + * exclusive lock on the tuple and the caller only wants shared lock. It + * would certainly not do to give up the exclusive lock. */ xmax = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple->t_data); old_infomask = tuple->t_data->t_infomask; @@ -3179,8 +3184,8 @@ l3: { /* * If the XMAX is a valid TransactionId, then we need to - * create a new MultiXactId that includes both the old - * locker and our own TransactionId. + * create a new MultiXactId that includes both the old locker + * and our own TransactionId. */ xid = MultiXactIdCreate(xmax, xid); new_infomask |= HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI; @@ -3214,8 +3219,8 @@ l3: /* * Store transaction information of xact locking the tuple. * - * Note: Cmax is meaningless in this context, so don't set it; this - * avoids possibly generating a useless combo CID. + * Note: Cmax is meaningless in this context, so don't set it; this avoids + * possibly generating a useless combo CID. */ tuple->t_data->t_infomask = new_infomask; HeapTupleHeaderClearHotUpdated(tuple->t_data); @@ -3425,6 +3430,7 @@ heap_freeze_tuple(HeapTupleHeader tuple, TransactionId cutoff_xid, buf = InvalidBuffer; } HeapTupleHeaderSetXmin(tuple, FrozenTransactionId); + /* * Might as well fix the hint bits too; usually XMIN_COMMITTED will * already be set here, but there's a small chance not. @@ -3437,9 +3443,9 @@ heap_freeze_tuple(HeapTupleHeader tuple, TransactionId cutoff_xid, /* * When we release shared lock, it's possible for someone else to change * xmax before we get the lock back, so repeat the check after acquiring - * exclusive lock. (We don't need this pushup for xmin, because only - * VACUUM could be interested in changing an existing tuple's xmin, - * and there's only one VACUUM allowed on a table at a time.) + * exclusive lock. (We don't need this pushup for xmin, because only + * VACUUM could be interested in changing an existing tuple's xmin, and + * there's only one VACUUM allowed on a table at a time.) */ recheck_xmax: if (!(tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI)) @@ -3454,13 +3460,14 @@ recheck_xmax: LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE); buf = InvalidBuffer; - goto recheck_xmax; /* see comment above */ + goto recheck_xmax; /* see comment above */ } HeapTupleHeaderSetXmax(tuple, InvalidTransactionId); + /* - * The tuple might be marked either XMAX_INVALID or - * XMAX_COMMITTED + LOCKED. Normalize to INVALID just to be - * sure no one gets confused. + * The tuple might be marked either XMAX_INVALID or XMAX_COMMITTED + * + LOCKED. Normalize to INVALID just to be sure no one gets + * confused. */ tuple->t_infomask &= ~HEAP_XMAX_COMMITTED; tuple->t_infomask |= HEAP_XMAX_INVALID; @@ -3506,8 +3513,9 @@ recheck_xvac: LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); LockBuffer(buf, BUFFER_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE); buf = InvalidBuffer; - goto recheck_xvac; /* see comment above */ + goto recheck_xvac; /* see comment above */ } + /* * If a MOVED_OFF tuple is not dead, the xvac transaction must * have failed; whereas a non-dead MOVED_IN tuple must mean the @@ -3517,9 +3525,10 @@ recheck_xvac: HeapTupleHeaderSetXvac(tuple, InvalidTransactionId); else HeapTupleHeaderSetXvac(tuple, FrozenTransactionId); + /* - * Might as well fix the hint bits too; usually XMIN_COMMITTED will - * already be set here, but there's a small chance not. + * Might as well fix the hint bits too; usually XMIN_COMMITTED + * will already be set here, but there's a small chance not. */ Assert(!(tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_XMIN_INVALID)); tuple->t_infomask |= HEAP_XMIN_COMMITTED; @@ -3632,8 +3641,8 @@ log_heap_clean(Relation reln, Buffer buffer, /* * The OffsetNumber arrays are not actually in the buffer, but we pretend * that they are. When XLogInsert stores the whole buffer, the offset - * arrays need not be stored too. Note that even if all three arrays - * are empty, we want to expose the buffer as a candidate for whole-page + * arrays need not be stored too. Note that even if all three arrays are + * empty, we want to expose the buffer as a candidate for whole-page * storage, since this record type implies a defragmentation operation * even if no item pointers changed state. */ @@ -3686,7 +3695,7 @@ log_heap_clean(Relation reln, Buffer buffer, } /* - * Perform XLogInsert for a heap-freeze operation. Caller must already + * Perform XLogInsert for a heap-freeze operation. Caller must already * have modified the buffer and marked it dirty. */ XLogRecPtr @@ -3711,9 +3720,9 @@ log_heap_freeze(Relation reln, Buffer buffer, rdata[0].next = &(rdata[1]); /* - * The tuple-offsets array is not actually in the buffer, but pretend - * that it is. When XLogInsert stores the whole buffer, the offsets array - * need not be stored too. + * The tuple-offsets array is not actually in the buffer, but pretend that + * it is. When XLogInsert stores the whole buffer, the offsets array need + * not be stored too. */ if (offcnt > 0) { @@ -3853,7 +3862,7 @@ log_heap_move(Relation reln, Buffer oldbuf, ItemPointerData from, * for writing the page to disk after calling this routine. * * Note: all current callers build pages in private memory and write them - * directly to smgr, rather than using bufmgr. Therefore there is no need + * directly to smgr, rather than using bufmgr. Therefore there is no need * to pass a buffer ID to XLogInsert, nor to perform MarkBufferDirty within * the critical section. * @@ -3905,9 +3914,9 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) Page page; OffsetNumber *offnum; OffsetNumber *end; - int nredirected; - int ndead; - int i; + int nredirected; + int ndead; + int i; if (record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_1) return; @@ -3934,12 +3943,12 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) { OffsetNumber fromoff = *offnum++; OffsetNumber tooff = *offnum++; - ItemId fromlp = PageGetItemId(page, fromoff); + ItemId fromlp = PageGetItemId(page, fromoff); if (clean_move) { /* Physically move the "to" item to the "from" slot */ - ItemId tolp = PageGetItemId(page, tooff); + ItemId tolp = PageGetItemId(page, tooff); HeapTupleHeader htup; *fromlp = *tolp; @@ -3962,7 +3971,7 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) for (i = 0; i < ndead; i++) { OffsetNumber off = *offnum++; - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); ItemIdSetDead(lp); } @@ -3971,14 +3980,14 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record, bool clean_move) while (offnum < end) { OffsetNumber off = *offnum++; - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, off); ItemIdSetUnused(lp); } /* - * Finally, repair any fragmentation, and update the page's hint bit - * about whether it has free pointers. + * Finally, repair any fragmentation, and update the page's hint bit about + * whether it has free pointers. */ PageRepairFragmentation(page); @@ -4617,7 +4626,7 @@ heap_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) { xl_heap_update *xlrec = (xl_heap_update *) rec; - if (xl_info & XLOG_HEAP_INIT_PAGE) /* can this case happen? */ + if (xl_info & XLOG_HEAP_INIT_PAGE) /* can this case happen? */ appendStringInfo(buf, "hot_update(init): "); else appendStringInfo(buf, "hot_update: "); @@ -4724,7 +4733,7 @@ heap_sync(Relation rel) /* toast heap, if any */ if (OidIsValid(rel->rd_rel->reltoastrelid)) { - Relation toastrel; + Relation toastrel; toastrel = heap_open(rel->rd_rel->reltoastrelid, AccessShareLock); FlushRelationBuffers(toastrel); diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c b/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c index 9723241547..067b23f24c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.3 2007/10/24 13:05:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.4 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -22,21 +22,21 @@ /* Local functions */ -static int heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, - OffsetNumber rootoffnum, - TransactionId OldestXmin, - OffsetNumber *redirected, int *nredirected, - OffsetNumber *nowdead, int *ndead, - OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, - bool redirect_move); +static int heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, + OffsetNumber rootoffnum, + TransactionId OldestXmin, + OffsetNumber *redirected, int *nredirected, + OffsetNumber *nowdead, int *ndead, + OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, + bool redirect_move); static void heap_prune_record_redirect(OffsetNumber *redirected, - int *nredirected, - OffsetNumber offnum, - OffsetNumber rdoffnum); + int *nredirected, + OffsetNumber offnum, + OffsetNumber rdoffnum); static void heap_prune_record_dead(OffsetNumber *nowdead, int *ndead, - OffsetNumber offnum); + OffsetNumber offnum); static void heap_prune_record_unused(OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, - OffsetNumber offnum); + OffsetNumber offnum); /* @@ -70,16 +70,16 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) return; /* - * We prune when a previous UPDATE failed to find enough space on the - * page for a new tuple version, or when free space falls below the - * relation's fill-factor target (but not less than 10%). + * We prune when a previous UPDATE failed to find enough space on the page + * for a new tuple version, or when free space falls below the relation's + * fill-factor target (but not less than 10%). * - * Checking free space here is questionable since we aren't holding - * any lock on the buffer; in the worst case we could get a bogus - * answer. It's unlikely to be *seriously* wrong, though, since - * reading either pd_lower or pd_upper is probably atomic. Avoiding - * taking a lock seems better than sometimes getting a wrong answer - * in what is after all just a heuristic estimate. + * Checking free space here is questionable since we aren't holding any + * lock on the buffer; in the worst case we could get a bogus answer. + * It's unlikely to be *seriously* wrong, though, since reading either + * pd_lower or pd_upper is probably atomic. Avoiding taking a lock seems + * better than sometimes getting a wrong answer in what is after all just + * a heuristic estimate. */ minfree = RelationGetTargetPageFreeSpace(relation, HEAP_DEFAULT_FILLFACTOR); @@ -93,9 +93,9 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) /* * Now that we have buffer lock, get accurate information about the - * page's free space, and recheck the heuristic about whether to prune. - * (We needn't recheck PageIsPrunable, since no one else could have - * pruned while we hold pin.) + * page's free space, and recheck the heuristic about whether to + * prune. (We needn't recheck PageIsPrunable, since no one else could + * have pruned while we hold pin.) */ if (PageIsFull(dp) || PageGetHeapFreeSpace((Page) dp) < minfree) { @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) * * If redirect_move is set, we remove redirecting line pointers by * updating the root line pointer to point directly to the first non-dead - * tuple in the chain. NOTE: eliminating the redirect changes the first + * tuple in the chain. NOTE: eliminating the redirect changes the first * tuple's effective CTID, and is therefore unsafe except within VACUUM FULL. * The only reason we support this capability at all is that by using it, * VACUUM FULL need not cope with LP_REDIRECT items at all; which seems a @@ -136,18 +136,18 @@ int heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, bool redirect_move, bool report_stats) { - int ndeleted = 0; - Page page = BufferGetPage(buffer); - OffsetNumber offnum, - maxoff; - OffsetNumber redirected[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage * 2]; - OffsetNumber nowdead[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - OffsetNumber nowunused[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - int nredirected = 0; - int ndead = 0; - int nunused = 0; - bool page_was_full = false; - TransactionId save_prune_xid; + int ndeleted = 0; + Page page = BufferGetPage(buffer); + OffsetNumber offnum, + maxoff; + OffsetNumber redirected[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage * 2]; + OffsetNumber nowdead[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + OffsetNumber nowunused[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + int nredirected = 0; + int ndead = 0; + int nunused = 0; + bool page_was_full = false; + TransactionId save_prune_xid; START_CRIT_SECTION(); @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, save_prune_xid = ((PageHeader) page)->pd_prune_xid; PageClearPrunable(page); - /* + /* * Also clear the "page is full" flag if it is set, since there's no point * in repeating the prune/defrag process until something else happens to * the page. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, offnum <= maxoff; offnum = OffsetNumberNext(offnum)) { - ItemId itemid = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); + ItemId itemid = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); /* Nothing to do if slot is empty or already dead */ if (!ItemIdIsUsed(itemid) || ItemIdIsDead(itemid)) @@ -233,9 +233,9 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, END_CRIT_SECTION(); /* - * If requested, report the number of tuples reclaimed to pgstats. - * This is ndeleted minus ndead, because we don't want to count a now-DEAD - * root item as a deletion for this purpose. + * If requested, report the number of tuples reclaimed to pgstats. This is + * ndeleted minus ndead, because we don't want to count a now-DEAD root + * item as a deletion for this purpose. */ if (report_stats && ndeleted > ndead) pgstat_update_heap_dead_tuples(relation, ndeleted - ndead); @@ -243,19 +243,17 @@ heap_page_prune(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin, /* * XXX Should we update the FSM information of this page ? * - * There are two schools of thought here. We may not want to update - * FSM information so that the page is not used for unrelated - * UPDATEs/INSERTs and any free space in this page will remain - * available for further UPDATEs in *this* page, thus improving - * chances for doing HOT updates. + * There are two schools of thought here. We may not want to update FSM + * information so that the page is not used for unrelated UPDATEs/INSERTs + * and any free space in this page will remain available for further + * UPDATEs in *this* page, thus improving chances for doing HOT updates. * - * But for a large table and where a page does not receive further - * UPDATEs for a long time, we might waste this space by not - * updating the FSM information. The relation may get extended and - * fragmented further. + * But for a large table and where a page does not receive further UPDATEs + * for a long time, we might waste this space by not updating the FSM + * information. The relation may get extended and fragmented further. * - * One possibility is to leave "fillfactor" worth of space in this - * page and update FSM with the remaining space. + * One possibility is to leave "fillfactor" worth of space in this page + * and update FSM with the remaining space. * * In any case, the current FSM implementation doesn't accept * one-page-at-a-time updates, so this is all academic for now. @@ -298,17 +296,17 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, bool redirect_move) { - int ndeleted = 0; - Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); - TransactionId priorXmax = InvalidTransactionId; - ItemId rootlp; - HeapTupleHeader htup; - OffsetNumber latestdead = InvalidOffsetNumber, - maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(dp), - offnum; - OffsetNumber chainitems[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - int nchain = 0, - i; + int ndeleted = 0; + Page dp = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + TransactionId priorXmax = InvalidTransactionId; + ItemId rootlp; + HeapTupleHeader htup; + OffsetNumber latestdead = InvalidOffsetNumber, + maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(dp), + offnum; + OffsetNumber chainitems[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + int nchain = 0, + i; rootlp = PageGetItemId(dp, rootoffnum); @@ -321,14 +319,14 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, if (HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(htup)) { /* - * If the tuple is DEAD and doesn't chain to anything else, mark it - * unused immediately. (If it does chain, we can only remove it as - * part of pruning its chain.) + * If the tuple is DEAD and doesn't chain to anything else, mark + * it unused immediately. (If it does chain, we can only remove + * it as part of pruning its chain.) * * We need this primarily to handle aborted HOT updates, that is, - * XMIN_INVALID heap-only tuples. Those might not be linked to - * by any chain, since the parent tuple might be re-updated before - * any pruning occurs. So we have to be able to reap them + * XMIN_INVALID heap-only tuples. Those might not be linked to by + * any chain, since the parent tuple might be re-updated before + * any pruning occurs. So we have to be able to reap them * separately from chain-pruning. * * Note that we might first arrive at a dead heap-only tuple @@ -354,9 +352,9 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, /* while not end of the chain */ for (;;) { - ItemId lp; - bool tupdead, - recent_dead; + ItemId lp; + bool tupdead, + recent_dead; /* Some sanity checks */ if (offnum < FirstOffsetNumber || offnum > maxoff) @@ -368,9 +366,9 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, break; /* - * If we are looking at the redirected root line pointer, - * jump to the first normal tuple in the chain. If we find - * a redirect somewhere else, stop --- it must not be same chain. + * If we are looking at the redirected root line pointer, jump to the + * first normal tuple in the chain. If we find a redirect somewhere + * else, stop --- it must not be same chain. */ if (ItemIdIsRedirected(lp)) { @@ -382,9 +380,9 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, } /* - * Likewise, a dead item pointer can't be part of the chain. - * (We already eliminated the case of dead root tuple outside - * this function.) + * Likewise, a dead item pointer can't be part of the chain. (We + * already eliminated the case of dead root tuple outside this + * function.) */ if (ItemIdIsDead(lp)) break; @@ -417,6 +415,7 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, case HEAPTUPLE_RECENTLY_DEAD: recent_dead = true; + /* * This tuple may soon become DEAD. Update the hint field so * that the page is reconsidered for pruning in future. @@ -425,6 +424,7 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, break; case HEAPTUPLE_DELETE_IN_PROGRESS: + /* * This tuple may soon become DEAD. Update the hint field so * that the page is reconsidered for pruning in future. @@ -434,11 +434,12 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, case HEAPTUPLE_LIVE: case HEAPTUPLE_INSERT_IN_PROGRESS: + /* * If we wanted to optimize for aborts, we might consider * marking the page prunable when we see INSERT_IN_PROGRESS. - * But we don't. See related decisions about when to mark - * the page prunable in heapam.c. + * But we don't. See related decisions about when to mark the + * page prunable in heapam.c. */ break; @@ -486,12 +487,12 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, * Mark as unused each intermediate item that we are able to remove * from the chain. * - * When the previous item is the last dead tuple seen, we are at - * the right candidate for redirection. + * When the previous item is the last dead tuple seen, we are at the + * right candidate for redirection. */ for (i = 1; (i < nchain) && (chainitems[i - 1] != latestdead); i++) { - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(dp, chainitems[i]); + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(dp, chainitems[i]); ItemIdSetUnused(lp); heap_prune_record_unused(nowunused, nunused, chainitems[i]); @@ -499,17 +500,17 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, } /* - * If the root entry had been a normal tuple, we are deleting it, - * so count it in the result. But changing a redirect (even to - * DEAD state) doesn't count. + * If the root entry had been a normal tuple, we are deleting it, so + * count it in the result. But changing a redirect (even to DEAD + * state) doesn't count. */ if (ItemIdIsNormal(rootlp)) ndeleted++; /* * If the DEAD tuple is at the end of the chain, the entire chain is - * dead and the root line pointer can be marked dead. Otherwise - * just redirect the root to the correct chain member. + * dead and the root line pointer can be marked dead. Otherwise just + * redirect the root to the correct chain member. */ if (i >= nchain) { @@ -528,25 +529,25 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, { /* * We found a redirect item that doesn't point to a valid follow-on - * item. This can happen if the loop in heap_page_prune caused us - * to visit the dead successor of a redirect item before visiting - * the redirect item. We can clean up by setting the redirect item - * to DEAD state. + * item. This can happen if the loop in heap_page_prune caused us to + * visit the dead successor of a redirect item before visiting the + * redirect item. We can clean up by setting the redirect item to + * DEAD state. */ ItemIdSetDead(rootlp); heap_prune_record_dead(nowdead, ndead, rootoffnum); } /* - * If requested, eliminate LP_REDIRECT items by moving tuples. Note that + * If requested, eliminate LP_REDIRECT items by moving tuples. Note that * if the root item is LP_REDIRECT and doesn't point to a valid follow-on * item, we already killed it above. */ if (redirect_move && ItemIdIsRedirected(rootlp)) { OffsetNumber firstoffnum = ItemIdGetRedirect(rootlp); - ItemId firstlp = PageGetItemId(dp, firstoffnum); - HeapTupleData firsttup; + ItemId firstlp = PageGetItemId(dp, firstoffnum); + HeapTupleData firsttup; Assert(ItemIdIsNormal(firstlp)); /* Set up firsttup to reference the tuple at its existing CTID */ @@ -558,15 +559,15 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, firsttup.t_tableOid = RelationGetRelid(relation); /* - * Mark the tuple for invalidation. Needed because we're changing - * its CTID. + * Mark the tuple for invalidation. Needed because we're changing its + * CTID. */ CacheInvalidateHeapTuple(relation, &firsttup); /* - * Change heap-only status of the tuple because after the line - * pointer manipulation, it's no longer a heap-only tuple, but is - * directly pointed to by index entries. + * Change heap-only status of the tuple because after the line pointer + * manipulation, it's no longer a heap-only tuple, but is directly + * pointed to by index entries. */ Assert(HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(&firsttup)); HeapTupleClearHeapOnly(&firsttup); @@ -594,7 +595,7 @@ heap_prune_chain(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber rootoffnum, /* Record newly-redirected item pointer */ static void heap_prune_record_redirect(OffsetNumber *redirected, int *nredirected, - OffsetNumber offnum, OffsetNumber rdoffnum) + OffsetNumber offnum, OffsetNumber rdoffnum) { Assert(*nredirected < MaxHeapTuplesPerPage); redirected[*nredirected * 2] = offnum; @@ -641,17 +642,18 @@ heap_prune_record_unused(OffsetNumber *nowunused, int *nunused, void heap_get_root_tuples(Page page, OffsetNumber *root_offsets) { - OffsetNumber offnum, maxoff; + OffsetNumber offnum, + maxoff; MemSet(root_offsets, 0, MaxHeapTuplesPerPage * sizeof(OffsetNumber)); maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page); for (offnum = FirstOffsetNumber; offnum <= maxoff; offnum++) { - ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); - HeapTupleHeader htup; - OffsetNumber nextoffnum; - TransactionId priorXmax; + ItemId lp = PageGetItemId(page, offnum); + HeapTupleHeader htup; + OffsetNumber nextoffnum; + TransactionId priorXmax; /* skip unused and dead items */ if (!ItemIdIsUsed(lp) || ItemIdIsDead(lp)) diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c b/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c index e8c5eec50a..20c5938ff2 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * The caller is responsible for creating the new heap, all catalog * changes, supplying the tuples to be written to the new heap, and - * rebuilding indexes. The caller must hold AccessExclusiveLock on the + * rebuilding indexes. The caller must hold AccessExclusiveLock on the * target table, because we assume no one else is writing into it. * * To use the facility: @@ -18,13 +18,13 @@ * begin_heap_rewrite * while (fetch next tuple) * { - * if (tuple is dead) - * rewrite_heap_dead_tuple - * else - * { - * // do any transformations here if required - * rewrite_heap_tuple - * } + * if (tuple is dead) + * rewrite_heap_dead_tuple + * else + * { + * // do any transformations here if required + * rewrite_heap_tuple + * } * } * end_heap_rewrite * @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ * to substitute the correct ctid instead. * * For each ctid reference from A -> B, we might encounter either A first - * or B first. (Note that a tuple in the middle of a chain is both A and B + * or B first. (Note that a tuple in the middle of a chain is both A and B * of different pairs.) * * If we encounter A first, we'll store the tuple in the unresolved_tups @@ -58,11 +58,11 @@ * and can write A immediately with the correct ctid. * * Entries in the hash tables can be removed as soon as the later tuple - * is encountered. That helps to keep the memory usage down. At the end, + * is encountered. That helps to keep the memory usage down. At the end, * both tables are usually empty; we should have encountered both A and B * of each pair. However, it's possible for A to be RECENTLY_DEAD and B * entirely DEAD according to HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum, because the test - * for deadness using OldestXmin is not exact. In such a case we might + * for deadness using OldestXmin is not exact. In such a case we might * encounter B first, and skip it, and find A later. Then A would be added * to unresolved_tups, and stay there until end of the rewrite. Since * this case is very unusual, we don't worry about the memory usage. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ * of CLUSTERing on an unchanging key column, we'll see all the versions * of a given tuple together anyway, and so the peak memory usage is only * proportional to the number of RECENTLY_DEAD versions of a single row, not - * in the whole table. Note that if we do fail halfway through a CLUSTER, + * in the whole table. Note that if we do fail halfway through a CLUSTER, * the old table is still valid, so failure is not catastrophic. * * We can't use the normal heap_insert function to insert into the new @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c,v 1.7 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c,v 1.8 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -116,20 +116,20 @@ */ typedef struct RewriteStateData { - Relation rs_new_rel; /* destination heap */ - Page rs_buffer; /* page currently being built */ - BlockNumber rs_blockno; /* block where page will go */ - bool rs_buffer_valid; /* T if any tuples in buffer */ - bool rs_use_wal; /* must we WAL-log inserts? */ - TransactionId rs_oldest_xmin; /* oldest xmin used by caller to + Relation rs_new_rel; /* destination heap */ + Page rs_buffer; /* page currently being built */ + BlockNumber rs_blockno; /* block where page will go */ + bool rs_buffer_valid; /* T if any tuples in buffer */ + bool rs_use_wal; /* must we WAL-log inserts? */ + TransactionId rs_oldest_xmin; /* oldest xmin used by caller to * determine tuple visibility */ - TransactionId rs_freeze_xid; /* Xid that will be used as freeze - * cutoff point */ - MemoryContext rs_cxt; /* for hash tables and entries and - * tuples in them */ - HTAB *rs_unresolved_tups; /* unmatched A tuples */ - HTAB *rs_old_new_tid_map; /* unmatched B tuples */ -} RewriteStateData; + TransactionId rs_freeze_xid;/* Xid that will be used as freeze cutoff + * point */ + MemoryContext rs_cxt; /* for hash tables and entries and tuples in + * them */ + HTAB *rs_unresolved_tups; /* unmatched A tuples */ + HTAB *rs_old_new_tid_map; /* unmatched B tuples */ +} RewriteStateData; /* * The lookup keys for the hash tables are tuple TID and xmin (we must check @@ -139,27 +139,27 @@ typedef struct RewriteStateData */ typedef struct { - TransactionId xmin; /* tuple xmin */ + TransactionId xmin; /* tuple xmin */ ItemPointerData tid; /* tuple location in old heap */ -} TidHashKey; +} TidHashKey; /* * Entry structures for the hash tables */ typedef struct { - TidHashKey key; /* expected xmin/old location of B tuple */ + TidHashKey key; /* expected xmin/old location of B tuple */ ItemPointerData old_tid; /* A's location in the old heap */ - HeapTuple tuple; /* A's tuple contents */ -} UnresolvedTupData; + HeapTuple tuple; /* A's tuple contents */ +} UnresolvedTupData; typedef UnresolvedTupData *UnresolvedTup; typedef struct { - TidHashKey key; /* actual xmin/old location of B tuple */ + TidHashKey key; /* actual xmin/old location of B tuple */ ItemPointerData new_tid; /* where we put it in the new heap */ -} OldToNewMappingData; +} OldToNewMappingData; typedef OldToNewMappingData *OldToNewMapping; @@ -189,8 +189,8 @@ begin_heap_rewrite(Relation new_heap, TransactionId oldest_xmin, HASHCTL hash_ctl; /* - * To ease cleanup, make a separate context that will contain - * the RewriteState struct itself plus all subsidiary data. + * To ease cleanup, make a separate context that will contain the + * RewriteState struct itself plus all subsidiary data. */ rw_cxt = AllocSetContextCreate(CurrentMemoryContext, "Table rewrite", @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ begin_heap_rewrite(Relation new_heap, TransactionId oldest_xmin, state->rs_unresolved_tups = hash_create("Rewrite / Unresolved ctids", - 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ + 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ &hash_ctl, HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION | HASH_CONTEXT); @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ begin_heap_rewrite(Relation new_heap, TransactionId oldest_xmin, state->rs_old_new_tid_map = hash_create("Rewrite / Old to new tid map", - 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ + 128, /* arbitrary initial size */ &hash_ctl, HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION | HASH_CONTEXT); @@ -250,8 +250,8 @@ end_heap_rewrite(RewriteState state) UnresolvedTup unresolved; /* - * Write any remaining tuples in the UnresolvedTups table. If we have - * any left, they should in fact be dead, but let's err on the safe side. + * Write any remaining tuples in the UnresolvedTups table. If we have any + * left, they should in fact be dead, but let's err on the safe side. * * XXX this really is a waste of code no? */ @@ -276,15 +276,15 @@ end_heap_rewrite(RewriteState state) } /* - * If the rel isn't temp, must fsync before commit. We use heap_sync - * to ensure that the toast table gets fsync'd too. + * If the rel isn't temp, must fsync before commit. We use heap_sync to + * ensure that the toast table gets fsync'd too. * * It's obvious that we must do this when not WAL-logging. It's less - * obvious that we have to do it even if we did WAL-log the pages. - * The reason is the same as in tablecmds.c's copy_relation_data(): - * we're writing data that's not in shared buffers, and so a CHECKPOINT - * occurring during the rewriteheap operation won't have fsync'd data - * we wrote before the checkpoint. + * obvious that we have to do it even if we did WAL-log the pages. The + * reason is the same as in tablecmds.c's copy_relation_data(): we're + * writing data that's not in shared buffers, and so a CHECKPOINT + * occurring during the rewriteheap operation won't have fsync'd data we + * wrote before the checkpoint. */ if (!state->rs_new_rel->rd_istemp) heap_sync(state->rs_new_rel); @@ -310,17 +310,17 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, { MemoryContext old_cxt; ItemPointerData old_tid; - TidHashKey hashkey; - bool found; - bool free_new; + TidHashKey hashkey; + bool found; + bool free_new; old_cxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(state->rs_cxt); /* * Copy the original tuple's visibility information into new_tuple. * - * XXX we might later need to copy some t_infomask2 bits, too? - * Right now, we intentionally clear the HOT status bits. + * XXX we might later need to copy some t_infomask2 bits, too? Right now, + * we intentionally clear the HOT status bits. */ memcpy(&new_tuple->t_data->t_choice.t_heap, &old_tuple->t_data->t_choice.t_heap, @@ -335,16 +335,16 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, * While we have our hands on the tuple, we may as well freeze any * very-old xmin or xmax, so that future VACUUM effort can be saved. * - * Note we abuse heap_freeze_tuple() a bit here, since it's expecting - * to be given a pointer to a tuple in a disk buffer. It happens - * though that we can get the right things to happen by passing - * InvalidBuffer for the buffer. + * Note we abuse heap_freeze_tuple() a bit here, since it's expecting to + * be given a pointer to a tuple in a disk buffer. It happens though that + * we can get the right things to happen by passing InvalidBuffer for the + * buffer. */ heap_freeze_tuple(new_tuple->t_data, state->rs_freeze_xid, InvalidBuffer); /* - * Invalid ctid means that ctid should point to the tuple itself. - * We'll override it later if the tuple is part of an update chain. + * Invalid ctid means that ctid should point to the tuple itself. We'll + * override it later if the tuple is part of an update chain. */ ItemPointerSetInvalid(&new_tuple->t_data->t_ctid); @@ -369,9 +369,9 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, if (mapping != NULL) { /* - * We've already copied the tuple that t_ctid points to, so we - * can set the ctid of this tuple to point to the new location, - * and insert it right away. + * We've already copied the tuple that t_ctid points to, so we can + * set the ctid of this tuple to point to the new location, and + * insert it right away. */ new_tuple->t_data->t_ctid = mapping->new_tid; @@ -405,10 +405,10 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, } /* - * Now we will write the tuple, and then check to see if it is the - * B tuple in any new or known pair. When we resolve a known pair, - * we will be able to write that pair's A tuple, and then we have to - * check if it resolves some other pair. Hence, we need a loop here. + * Now we will write the tuple, and then check to see if it is the B tuple + * in any new or known pair. When we resolve a known pair, we will be + * able to write that pair's A tuple, and then we have to check if it + * resolves some other pair. Hence, we need a loop here. */ old_tid = old_tuple->t_self; free_new = false; @@ -422,13 +422,12 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, new_tid = new_tuple->t_self; /* - * If the tuple is the updated version of a row, and the prior - * version wouldn't be DEAD yet, then we need to either resolve - * the prior version (if it's waiting in rs_unresolved_tups), - * or make an entry in rs_old_new_tid_map (so we can resolve it - * when we do see it). The previous tuple's xmax would equal this - * one's xmin, so it's RECENTLY_DEAD if and only if the xmin is - * not before OldestXmin. + * If the tuple is the updated version of a row, and the prior version + * wouldn't be DEAD yet, then we need to either resolve the prior + * version (if it's waiting in rs_unresolved_tups), or make an entry + * in rs_old_new_tid_map (so we can resolve it when we do see it). + * The previous tuple's xmax would equal this one's xmin, so it's + * RECENTLY_DEAD if and only if the xmin is not before OldestXmin. */ if ((new_tuple->t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_UPDATED) && !TransactionIdPrecedes(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(new_tuple->t_data), @@ -449,9 +448,9 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, if (unresolved != NULL) { /* - * We have seen and memorized the previous tuple already. - * Now that we know where we inserted the tuple its t_ctid - * points to, fix its t_ctid and insert it to the new heap. + * We have seen and memorized the previous tuple already. Now + * that we know where we inserted the tuple its t_ctid points + * to, fix its t_ctid and insert it to the new heap. */ if (free_new) heap_freetuple(new_tuple); @@ -461,8 +460,8 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, new_tuple->t_data->t_ctid = new_tid; /* - * We don't need the hash entry anymore, but don't free - * its tuple just yet. + * We don't need the hash entry anymore, but don't free its + * tuple just yet. */ hash_search(state->rs_unresolved_tups, &hashkey, HASH_REMOVE, &found); @@ -474,8 +473,8 @@ rewrite_heap_tuple(RewriteState state, else { /* - * Remember the new tid of this tuple. We'll use it to set - * the ctid when we find the previous tuple in the chain. + * Remember the new tid of this tuple. We'll use it to set the + * ctid when we find the previous tuple in the chain. */ OldToNewMapping mapping; @@ -506,22 +505,22 @@ rewrite_heap_dead_tuple(RewriteState state, HeapTuple old_tuple) { /* * If we have already seen an earlier tuple in the update chain that - * points to this tuple, let's forget about that earlier tuple. It's - * in fact dead as well, our simple xmax < OldestXmin test in - * HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum just wasn't enough to detect it. It - * happens when xmin of a tuple is greater than xmax, which sounds + * points to this tuple, let's forget about that earlier tuple. It's in + * fact dead as well, our simple xmax < OldestXmin test in + * HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum just wasn't enough to detect it. It happens + * when xmin of a tuple is greater than xmax, which sounds * counter-intuitive but is perfectly valid. * - * We don't bother to try to detect the situation the other way - * round, when we encounter the dead tuple first and then the - * recently dead one that points to it. If that happens, we'll - * have some unmatched entries in the UnresolvedTups hash table - * at the end. That can happen anyway, because a vacuum might - * have removed the dead tuple in the chain before us. + * We don't bother to try to detect the situation the other way round, + * when we encounter the dead tuple first and then the recently dead one + * that points to it. If that happens, we'll have some unmatched entries + * in the UnresolvedTups hash table at the end. That can happen anyway, + * because a vacuum might have removed the dead tuple in the chain before + * us. */ UnresolvedTup unresolved; - TidHashKey hashkey; - bool found; + TidHashKey hashkey; + bool found; memset(&hashkey, 0, sizeof(hashkey)); hashkey.xmin = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(old_tuple->t_data); @@ -541,7 +540,7 @@ rewrite_heap_dead_tuple(RewriteState state, HeapTuple old_tuple) } /* - * Insert a tuple to the new relation. This has to track heap_insert + * Insert a tuple to the new relation. This has to track heap_insert * and its subsidiary functions! * * t_self of the tuple is set to the new TID of the tuple. If t_ctid of the @@ -551,11 +550,12 @@ rewrite_heap_dead_tuple(RewriteState state, HeapTuple old_tuple) static void raw_heap_insert(RewriteState state, HeapTuple tup) { - Page page = state->rs_buffer; - Size pageFreeSpace, saveFreeSpace; - Size len; - OffsetNumber newoff; - HeapTuple heaptup; + Page page = state->rs_buffer; + Size pageFreeSpace, + saveFreeSpace; + Size len; + OffsetNumber newoff; + HeapTuple heaptup; /* * If the new tuple is too big for storage or contains already toasted @@ -610,7 +610,8 @@ raw_heap_insert(RewriteState state, HeapTuple tup) /* * Now write the page. We say isTemp = true even if it's not a * temp table, because there's no need for smgr to schedule an - * fsync for this write; we'll do it ourselves in end_heap_rewrite. + * fsync for this write; we'll do it ourselves in + * end_heap_rewrite. */ RelationOpenSmgr(state->rs_new_rel); smgrextend(state->rs_new_rel->rd_smgr, state->rs_blockno, @@ -638,12 +639,12 @@ raw_heap_insert(RewriteState state, HeapTuple tup) ItemPointerSet(&(tup->t_self), state->rs_blockno, newoff); /* - * Insert the correct position into CTID of the stored tuple, too, - * if the caller didn't supply a valid CTID. + * Insert the correct position into CTID of the stored tuple, too, if the + * caller didn't supply a valid CTID. */ - if(!ItemPointerIsValid(&tup->t_data->t_ctid)) + if (!ItemPointerIsValid(&tup->t_data->t_ctid)) { - ItemId newitemid; + ItemId newitemid; HeapTupleHeader onpage_tup; newitemid = PageGetItemId(page, newoff); diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c b/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c index 795efccc09..7b0653c9ba 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * heap scan synchronization support * * When multiple backends run a sequential scan on the same table, we try - * to keep them synchronized to reduce the overall I/O needed. The goal is + * to keep them synchronized to reduce the overall I/O needed. The goal is * to read each page into shared buffer cache only once, and let all backends * that take part in the shared scan process the page before it falls out of * the cache. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * don't want such queries to slow down others. * * There can realistically only be a few large sequential scans on different - * tables in progress at any time. Therefore we just keep the scan positions + * tables in progress at any time. Therefore we just keep the scan positions * in a small LRU list which we scan every time we need to look up or update a * scan position. The whole mechanism is only applied for tables exceeding * a threshold size (but that is not the concern of this module). @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c,v 1.1 2007/06/08 18:23:52 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/syncscan.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ /* GUC variables */ #ifdef TRACE_SYNCSCAN -bool trace_syncscan = false; +bool trace_syncscan = false; #endif @@ -89,21 +89,21 @@ typedef struct ss_scan_location_t { RelFileNode relfilenode; /* identity of a relation */ BlockNumber location; /* last-reported location in the relation */ -} ss_scan_location_t; +} ss_scan_location_t; typedef struct ss_lru_item_t { - struct ss_lru_item_t *prev; - struct ss_lru_item_t *next; - ss_scan_location_t location; -} ss_lru_item_t; + struct ss_lru_item_t *prev; + struct ss_lru_item_t *next; + ss_scan_location_t location; +} ss_lru_item_t; typedef struct ss_scan_locations_t { - ss_lru_item_t *head; - ss_lru_item_t *tail; - ss_lru_item_t items[1]; /* SYNC_SCAN_NELEM items */ -} ss_scan_locations_t; + ss_lru_item_t *head; + ss_lru_item_t *tail; + ss_lru_item_t items[1]; /* SYNC_SCAN_NELEM items */ +} ss_scan_locations_t; #define SizeOfScanLocations(N) offsetof(ss_scan_locations_t, items[N]) @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ static ss_scan_locations_t *scan_locations; /* prototypes for internal functions */ static BlockNumber ss_search(RelFileNode relfilenode, - BlockNumber location, bool set); + BlockNumber location, bool set); /* @@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ SyncScanShmemSize(void) void SyncScanShmemInit(void) { - int i; - bool found; + int i; + bool found; scan_locations = (ss_scan_locations_t *) ShmemInitStruct("Sync Scan Locations List", @@ -186,20 +186,20 @@ SyncScanShmemInit(void) static BlockNumber ss_search(RelFileNode relfilenode, BlockNumber location, bool set) { - ss_lru_item_t *item; + ss_lru_item_t *item; item = scan_locations->head; for (;;) { - bool match; + bool match; match = RelFileNodeEquals(item->location.relfilenode, relfilenode); if (match || item->next == NULL) { /* - * If we reached the end of list and no match was found, - * take over the last entry + * If we reached the end of list and no match was found, take over + * the last entry */ if (!match) { @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ ss_search(RelFileNode relfilenode, BlockNumber location, bool set) * relation, or 0 if no valid location is found. * * We expect the caller has just done RelationGetNumberOfBlocks(), and - * so that number is passed in rather than computing it again. The result + * so that number is passed in rather than computing it again. The result * is guaranteed less than relnblocks (assuming that's > 0). */ BlockNumber @@ -257,8 +257,8 @@ ss_get_location(Relation rel, BlockNumber relnblocks) /* * If the location is not a valid block number for this scan, start at 0. * - * This can happen if for instance a VACUUM truncated the table - * since the location was saved. + * This can happen if for instance a VACUUM truncated the table since the + * location was saved. */ if (startloc >= relnblocks) startloc = 0; @@ -294,12 +294,12 @@ ss_report_location(Relation rel, BlockNumber location) #endif /* - * To reduce lock contention, only report scan progress every N pages. - * For the same reason, don't block if the lock isn't immediately - * available. Missing a few updates isn't critical, it just means that a - * new scan that wants to join the pack will start a little bit behind the - * head of the scan. Hopefully the pages are still in OS cache and the - * scan catches up quickly. + * To reduce lock contention, only report scan progress every N pages. For + * the same reason, don't block if the lock isn't immediately available. + * Missing a few updates isn't critical, it just means that a new scan + * that wants to join the pack will start a little bit behind the head of + * the scan. Hopefully the pages are still in OS cache and the scan + * catches up quickly. */ if ((location % SYNC_SCAN_REPORT_INTERVAL) == 0) { diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c b/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c index 4f62b1f859..0a8873f994 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c,v 1.78 2007/10/11 18:19:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c,v 1.79 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -72,9 +72,9 @@ do { \ static void toast_delete_datum(Relation rel, Datum value); static Datum toast_save_datum(Relation rel, Datum value, - bool use_wal, bool use_fsm); -static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr); -static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, + bool use_wal, bool use_fsm); +static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena * attr); +static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena * attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length); @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ static struct varlena *toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, ---------- */ struct varlena * -heap_tuple_fetch_attr(struct varlena *attr) +heap_tuple_fetch_attr(struct varlena * attr) { - struct varlena *result; + struct varlena *result; if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) { @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ heap_tuple_fetch_attr(struct varlena *attr) * ---------- */ struct varlena * -heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena *attr) +heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena * attr) { if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) { @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena *attr) /* * This is a short-header varlena --- convert to 4-byte header format */ - Size data_size = VARSIZE_SHORT(attr) - VARHDRSZ_SHORT; - Size new_size = data_size + VARHDRSZ; + Size data_size = VARSIZE_SHORT(attr) - VARHDRSZ_SHORT; + Size new_size = data_size + VARHDRSZ; struct varlena *new_attr; new_attr = (struct varlena *) palloc(new_size); @@ -178,12 +178,12 @@ heap_tuple_untoast_attr(struct varlena *attr) * ---------- */ struct varlena * -heap_tuple_untoast_attr_slice(struct varlena *attr, +heap_tuple_untoast_attr_slice(struct varlena * attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 slicelength) { struct varlena *preslice; struct varlena *result; - char *attrdata; + char *attrdata; int32 attrsize; if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ heap_tuple_untoast_attr_slice(struct varlena *attr, if (VARATT_IS_COMPRESSED(preslice)) { PGLZ_Header *tmp = (PGLZ_Header *) preslice; - Size size = PGLZ_RAW_SIZE(tmp) + VARHDRSZ; + Size size = PGLZ_RAW_SIZE(tmp) + VARHDRSZ; preslice = (struct varlena *) palloc(size); SET_VARSIZE(preslice, size); @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ toast_raw_datum_size(Datum value) Size toast_datum_size(Datum value) { - struct varlena *attr = (struct varlena *) DatumGetPointer(value); + struct varlena *attr = (struct varlena *) DatumGetPointer(value); Size result; if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(attr)) @@ -469,8 +469,8 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, for (i = 0; i < numAttrs; i++) { - struct varlena *old_value; - struct varlena *new_value; + struct varlena *old_value; + struct varlena *new_value; if (oldtup != NULL) { @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(old_value)) { if (toast_isnull[i] || !VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(new_value) || - memcmp((char *) old_value, (char *) new_value, + memcmp((char *) old_value, (char *) new_value, VARSIZE_EXTERNAL(old_value)) != 0) { /* @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, * We took care of UPDATE above, so any external value we find * still in the tuple must be someone else's we cannot reuse. * Fetch it back (without decompression, unless we are forcing - * PLAIN storage). If necessary, we'll push it out as a new + * PLAIN storage). If necessary, we'll push it out as a new * external value below. */ if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(new_value)) @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ toast_insert_or_update(Relation rel, HeapTuple newtup, HeapTuple oldtup, /* * Second we look for attributes of attstorage 'x' or 'e' that are still - * inline. But skip this if there's no toast table to push them to. + * inline. But skip this if there's no toast table to push them to. */ while (heap_compute_data_size(tupleDesc, toast_values, toast_isnull) > maxDataLen && @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ toast_flatten_tuple_attribute(Datum value, has_nulls = true; else if (att[i]->attlen == -1) { - struct varlena *new_value; + struct varlena *new_value; new_value = (struct varlena *) DatumGetPointer(toast_values[i]); if (VARATT_IS_EXTERNAL(new_value) || @@ -1046,7 +1046,8 @@ toast_compress_datum(Datum value) Assert(!VARATT_IS_COMPRESSED(value)); /* - * No point in wasting a palloc cycle if value is too short for compression + * No point in wasting a palloc cycle if value is too short for + * compression */ if (valsize < PGLZ_strategy_default->min_input_size) return PointerGetDatum(NULL); @@ -1110,8 +1111,8 @@ toast_save_datum(Relation rel, Datum value, /* * Get the data pointer and length, and compute va_rawsize and va_extsize. * - * va_rawsize is the size of the equivalent fully uncompressed datum, - * so we have to adjust for short headers. + * va_rawsize is the size of the equivalent fully uncompressed datum, so + * we have to adjust for short headers. * * va_extsize is the actual size of the data payload in the toast records. */ @@ -1119,7 +1120,7 @@ toast_save_datum(Relation rel, Datum value, { data_p = VARDATA_SHORT(value); data_todo = VARSIZE_SHORT(value) - VARHDRSZ_SHORT; - toast_pointer.va_rawsize = data_todo + VARHDRSZ; /* as if not short */ + toast_pointer.va_rawsize = data_todo + VARHDRSZ; /* as if not short */ toast_pointer.va_extsize = data_todo; } else if (VARATT_IS_COMPRESSED(value)) @@ -1283,7 +1284,7 @@ toast_delete_datum(Relation rel, Datum value) * ---------- */ static struct varlena * -toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) +toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena * attr) { Relation toastrel; Relation toastidx; @@ -1299,7 +1300,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) int32 numchunks; Pointer chunk; bool isnull; - char *chunkdata; + char *chunkdata; int32 chunksize; /* Must copy to access aligned fields */ @@ -1365,7 +1366,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) { /* should never happen */ elog(ERROR, "found toasted toast chunk"); - chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ chunkdata = NULL; } @@ -1384,12 +1385,12 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) residx, numchunks, toast_pointer.va_valueid); } - else if (residx == numchunks-1) + else if (residx == numchunks - 1) { if ((residx * TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE + chunksize) != ressize) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk size %d (expected %d) in final chunk %d for toast value %u", chunksize, - (int) (ressize - residx*TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), + (int) (ressize - residx * TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), residx, toast_pointer.va_valueid); } @@ -1397,7 +1398,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk number %d for toast value %u (out of range %d..%d)", residx, toast_pointer.va_valueid, - 0, numchunks-1); + 0, numchunks - 1); /* * Copy the data into proper place in our result @@ -1435,7 +1436,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum(struct varlena *attr) * ---------- */ static struct varlena * -toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) +toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena * attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) { Relation toastrel; Relation toastidx; @@ -1457,7 +1458,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) int totalchunks; Pointer chunk; bool isnull; - char *chunkdata; + char *chunkdata; int32 chunksize; int32 chcpystrt; int32 chcpyend; @@ -1574,7 +1575,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) { /* should never happen */ elog(ERROR, "found toasted toast chunk"); - chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + chunksize = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ chunkdata = NULL; } @@ -1593,7 +1594,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) residx, totalchunks, toast_pointer.va_valueid); } - else if (residx == totalchunks-1) + else if (residx == totalchunks - 1) { if ((residx * TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE + chunksize) != attrsize) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk size %d (expected %d) in final chunk %d for toast value %u when fetching slice", @@ -1606,7 +1607,7 @@ toast_fetch_datum_slice(struct varlena *attr, int32 sliceoffset, int32 length) elog(ERROR, "unexpected chunk number %d for toast value %u (out of range %d..%d)", residx, toast_pointer.va_valueid, - 0, totalchunks-1); + 0, totalchunks - 1); /* * Copy the data into proper place in our result diff --git a/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c b/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c index fd727ca68c..5f1092db05 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c,v 1.99 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c,v 1.100 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * INTERFACE ROUTINES * index_open - open an index relation by relation OID @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ index_markpos(IndexScanDesc scan) * returnable tuple in each HOT chain, and so restoring the prior state at the * granularity of the index AM is sufficient. Since the only current user * of mark/restore functionality is nodeMergejoin.c, this effectively means - * that merge-join plans only work for MVCC snapshots. This could be fixed + * that merge-join plans only work for MVCC snapshots. This could be fixed * if necessary, but for now it seems unimportant. * ---------------- */ @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ HeapTuple index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) { HeapTuple heapTuple = &scan->xs_ctup; - ItemPointer tid = &heapTuple->t_self; + ItemPointer tid = &heapTuple->t_self; FmgrInfo *procedure; SCAN_CHECKS; @@ -429,14 +429,14 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) for (;;) { OffsetNumber offnum; - bool at_chain_start; - Page dp; + bool at_chain_start; + Page dp; if (scan->xs_next_hot != InvalidOffsetNumber) { /* - * We are resuming scan of a HOT chain after having returned - * an earlier member. Must still hold pin on current heap page. + * We are resuming scan of a HOT chain after having returned an + * earlier member. Must still hold pin on current heap page. */ Assert(BufferIsValid(scan->xs_cbuf)); Assert(ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(tid) == @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) /* Scan through possible multiple members of HOT-chain */ for (;;) { - ItemId lp; + ItemId lp; ItemPointer ctid; /* check for bogus TID */ @@ -532,8 +532,8 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) } /* - * We must initialize all of *heapTuple (ie, scan->xs_ctup) - * since it is returned to the executor on success. + * We must initialize all of *heapTuple (ie, scan->xs_ctup) since + * it is returned to the executor on success. */ heapTuple->t_data = (HeapTupleHeader) PageGetItem(dp, lp); heapTuple->t_len = ItemIdGetLength(lp); @@ -544,20 +544,21 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) /* * Shouldn't see a HEAP_ONLY tuple at chain start. (This test * should be unnecessary, since the chain root can't be removed - * while we have pin on the index entry, but let's make it anyway.) + * while we have pin on the index entry, but let's make it + * anyway.) */ if (at_chain_start && HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(heapTuple)) break; /* * The xmin should match the previous xmax value, else chain is - * broken. (Note: this test is not optional because it protects - * us against the case where the prior chain member's xmax - * aborted since we looked at it.) + * broken. (Note: this test is not optional because it protects + * us against the case where the prior chain member's xmax aborted + * since we looked at it.) */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(scan->xs_prev_xmax) && !TransactionIdEquals(scan->xs_prev_xmax, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) break; /* If it's visible per the snapshot, we must return it */ @@ -565,10 +566,10 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) scan->xs_cbuf)) { /* - * If the snapshot is MVCC, we know that it could accept - * at most one member of the HOT chain, so we can skip - * examining any more members. Otherwise, check for - * continuation of the HOT-chain, and set state for next time. + * If the snapshot is MVCC, we know that it could accept at + * most one member of the HOT chain, so we can skip examining + * any more members. Otherwise, check for continuation of the + * HOT-chain, and set state for next time. */ if (IsMVCCSnapshot(scan->xs_snapshot)) scan->xs_next_hot = InvalidOffsetNumber; @@ -615,7 +616,7 @@ index_getnext(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection direction) } else break; /* end of chain */ - } /* loop over a single HOT chain */ + } /* loop over a single HOT chain */ LockBuffer(scan->xs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); @@ -788,7 +789,7 @@ index_vacuum_cleanup(IndexVacuumInfo *info, * particular indexed attribute are those with both types equal to * the index opclass' opcintype (note that this is subtly different * from the indexed attribute's own type: it may be a binary-compatible - * type instead). Only the default functions are stored in relcache + * type instead). Only the default functions are stored in relcache * entries --- access methods can use the syscache to look up non-default * functions. * @@ -822,7 +823,7 @@ index_getprocid(Relation irel, * index_getprocinfo * * This routine allows index AMs to keep fmgr lookup info for - * support procs in the relcache. As above, only the "default" + * support procs in the relcache. As above, only the "default" * functions for any particular indexed attribute are cached. * * Note: the return value points into cached data that will be lost during diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c index 5f7ecbe16d..413767ffee 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c,v 1.160 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c,v 1.161 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ typedef struct OffsetNumber newitemoff; /* where the new item is to be inserted */ int leftspace; /* space available for items on left page */ int rightspace; /* space available for items on right page */ - int olddataitemstotal; /* space taken by old items */ + int olddataitemstotal; /* space taken by old items */ bool have_split; /* found a valid split? */ @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, if (!ItemIdIsDead(curitemid)) { ItemPointerData htid; - bool all_dead; + bool all_dead; /* * _bt_compare returns 0 for (1,NULL) and (1,NULL) - this's @@ -239,8 +239,8 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, /* * We check the whole HOT-chain to see if there is any tuple - * that satisfies SnapshotDirty. This is necessary because - * we have just a single index entry for the entire chain. + * that satisfies SnapshotDirty. This is necessary because we + * have just a single index entry for the entire chain. */ if (heap_hot_search(&htid, heapRel, &SnapshotDirty, &all_dead)) { @@ -267,15 +267,16 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, * is itself now committed dead --- if so, don't complain. * This is a waste of time in normal scenarios but we must * do it to support CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. - * + * * We must follow HOT-chains here because during * concurrent index build, we insert the root TID though * the actual tuple may be somewhere in the HOT-chain. - * While following the chain we might not stop at the exact - * tuple which triggered the insert, but that's OK because - * if we find a live tuple anywhere in this chain, we have - * a unique key conflict. The other live tuple is not part - * of this chain because it had a different index entry. + * While following the chain we might not stop at the + * exact tuple which triggered the insert, but that's OK + * because if we find a live tuple anywhere in this chain, + * we have a unique key conflict. The other live tuple is + * not part of this chain because it had a different index + * entry. */ htid = itup->t_tid; if (heap_hot_search(&htid, heapRel, SnapshotSelf, NULL)) @@ -293,8 +294,8 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNIQUE_VIOLATION), - errmsg("duplicate key value violates unique constraint \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + errmsg("duplicate key value violates unique constraint \"%s\"", + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); } else if (all_dead) { @@ -372,7 +373,7 @@ _bt_check_unique(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup, Relation heapRel, * On entry, *buf and *offsetptr point to the first legal position * where the new tuple could be inserted. The caller should hold an * exclusive lock on *buf. *offsetptr can also be set to - * InvalidOffsetNumber, in which case the function will search the right + * InvalidOffsetNumber, in which case the function will search the right * location within the page if needed. On exit, they point to the chosen * insert location. If findinsertloc decided to move right, the lock and * pin on the original page will be released and the new page returned to @@ -389,11 +390,12 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, ScanKey scankey, IndexTuple newtup) { - Buffer buf = *bufptr; - Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); - Size itemsz; + Buffer buf = *bufptr; + Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); + Size itemsz; BTPageOpaque lpageop; - bool movedright, vacuumed; + bool movedright, + vacuumed; OffsetNumber newitemoff; OffsetNumber firstlegaloff = *offsetptr; @@ -447,19 +449,21 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, Buffer rbuf; /* - * before considering moving right, see if we can obtain enough - * space by erasing LP_DEAD items + * before considering moving right, see if we can obtain enough space + * by erasing LP_DEAD items */ if (P_ISLEAF(lpageop) && P_HAS_GARBAGE(lpageop)) { _bt_vacuum_one_page(rel, buf); - /* remember that we vacuumed this page, because that makes - * the hint supplied by the caller invalid */ + /* + * remember that we vacuumed this page, because that makes the + * hint supplied by the caller invalid + */ vacuumed = true; if (PageGetFreeSpace(page) >= itemsz) - break; /* OK, now we have enough space */ + break; /* OK, now we have enough space */ } /* @@ -473,11 +477,10 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, /* * step right to next non-dead page * - * must write-lock that page before releasing write lock on - * current page; else someone else's _bt_check_unique scan could - * fail to see our insertion. write locks on intermediate dead - * pages won't do because we don't know when they will get - * de-linked from the tree. + * must write-lock that page before releasing write lock on current + * page; else someone else's _bt_check_unique scan could fail to see + * our insertion. write locks on intermediate dead pages won't do + * because we don't know when they will get de-linked from the tree. */ rbuf = InvalidBuffer; @@ -501,17 +504,16 @@ _bt_findinsertloc(Relation rel, } /* - * Now we are on the right page, so find the insert position. If we - * moved right at all, we know we should insert at the start of the - * page. If we didn't move right, we can use the firstlegaloff hint - * if the caller supplied one, unless we vacuumed the page which - * might have moved tuples around making the hint invalid. If we - * didn't move right or can't use the hint, find the position - * by searching. + * Now we are on the right page, so find the insert position. If we moved + * right at all, we know we should insert at the start of the page. If we + * didn't move right, we can use the firstlegaloff hint if the caller + * supplied one, unless we vacuumed the page which might have moved tuples + * around making the hint invalid. If we didn't move right or can't use + * the hint, find the position by searching. */ if (movedright) newitemoff = P_FIRSTDATAKEY(lpageop); - else if(firstlegaloff != InvalidOffsetNumber && !vacuumed) + else if (firstlegaloff != InvalidOffsetNumber && !vacuumed) newitemoff = firstlegaloff; else newitemoff = _bt_binsrch(rel, buf, keysz, scankey, false); @@ -982,8 +984,8 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, * the data by reinserting it into a new left page. (XXX the latter * comment is probably obsolete.) * - * We need to do this before writing the WAL record, so that XLogInsert can - * WAL log an image of the page if necessary. + * We need to do this before writing the WAL record, so that XLogInsert + * can WAL log an image of the page if necessary. */ PageRestoreTempPage(leftpage, origpage); @@ -1033,10 +1035,10 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, * Log the new item and its offset, if it was inserted on the left * page. (If it was put on the right page, we don't need to explicitly * WAL log it because it's included with all the other items on the - * right page.) Show the new item as belonging to the left page buffer, - * so that it is not stored if XLogInsert decides it needs a full-page - * image of the left page. We store the offset anyway, though, to - * support archive compression of these records. + * right page.) Show the new item as belonging to the left page + * buffer, so that it is not stored if XLogInsert decides it needs a + * full-page image of the left page. We store the offset anyway, + * though, to support archive compression of these records. */ if (newitemonleft) { @@ -1052,31 +1054,31 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, lastrdata->data = (char *) newitem; lastrdata->len = MAXALIGN(newitemsz); - lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ + lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ lastrdata->buffer_std = true; } else { /* - * Although we don't need to WAL-log the new item, we still - * need XLogInsert to consider storing a full-page image of the - * left page, so make an empty entry referencing that buffer. - * This also ensures that the left page is always backup block 1. + * Although we don't need to WAL-log the new item, we still need + * XLogInsert to consider storing a full-page image of the left + * page, so make an empty entry referencing that buffer. This also + * ensures that the left page is always backup block 1. */ lastrdata->next = lastrdata + 1; lastrdata++; lastrdata->data = NULL; lastrdata->len = 0; - lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ + lastrdata->buffer = buf; /* backup block 1 */ lastrdata->buffer_std = true; } /* * Log the contents of the right page in the format understood by * _bt_restore_page(). We set lastrdata->buffer to InvalidBuffer, - * because we're going to recreate the whole page anyway, so it - * should never be stored by XLogInsert. + * because we're going to recreate the whole page anyway, so it should + * never be stored by XLogInsert. * * Direct access to page is not good but faster - we should implement * some new func in page API. Note we only store the tuples @@ -1101,7 +1103,7 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, lastrdata->data = NULL; lastrdata->len = 0; - lastrdata->buffer = sbuf; /* backup block 2 */ + lastrdata->buffer = sbuf; /* backup block 2 */ lastrdata->buffer_std = true; } @@ -1275,9 +1277,10 @@ _bt_findsplitloc(Relation rel, olddataitemstoleft += itemsz; } - /* If the new item goes as the last item, check for splitting so that - * all the old items go to the left page and the new item goes to the - * right page. + /* + * If the new item goes as the last item, check for splitting so that all + * the old items go to the left page and the new item goes to the right + * page. */ if (newitemoff > maxoff && !goodenoughfound) _bt_checksplitloc(&state, newitemoff, false, olddataitemstotal, 0); @@ -1314,16 +1317,16 @@ _bt_checksplitloc(FindSplitData *state, int olddataitemstoleft, Size firstoldonrightsz) { - int leftfree, - rightfree; - Size firstrightitemsz; - bool newitemisfirstonright; + int leftfree, + rightfree; + Size firstrightitemsz; + bool newitemisfirstonright; /* Is the new item going to be the first item on the right page? */ newitemisfirstonright = (firstoldonright == state->newitemoff && !newitemonleft); - if(newitemisfirstonright) + if (newitemisfirstonright) firstrightitemsz = state->newitemsz; else firstrightitemsz = firstoldonrightsz; @@ -1334,9 +1337,8 @@ _bt_checksplitloc(FindSplitData *state, (state->olddataitemstotal - olddataitemstoleft); /* - * The first item on the right page becomes the high key of the - * left page; therefore it counts against left space as well as right - * space. + * The first item on the right page becomes the high key of the left page; + * therefore it counts against left space as well as right space. */ leftfree -= firstrightitemsz; @@ -1875,8 +1877,8 @@ _bt_vacuum_one_page(Relation rel, Buffer buffer) BTPageOpaque opaque = (BTPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(page); /* - * Scan over all items to see which ones need to be deleted - * according to LP_DEAD flags. + * Scan over all items to see which ones need to be deleted according to + * LP_DEAD flags. */ minoff = P_FIRSTDATAKEY(opaque); maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page); diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c index f62e4b3c5e..8eee5a74cc 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.103 2007/09/12 22:10:26 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.104 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Postgres btree pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque @@ -751,8 +751,8 @@ _bt_parent_deletion_safe(Relation rel, BlockNumber target, BTStack stack) /* * In recovery mode, assume the deletion being replayed is valid. We - * can't always check it because we won't have a full search stack, - * and we should complain if there's a problem, anyway. + * can't always check it because we won't have a full search stack, and we + * should complain if there's a problem, anyway. */ if (InRecovery) return true; @@ -781,8 +781,8 @@ _bt_parent_deletion_safe(Relation rel, BlockNumber target, BTStack stack) { /* * It's only child, so safe if parent would itself be removable. - * We have to check the parent itself, and then recurse to - * test the conditions at the parent's parent. + * We have to check the parent itself, and then recurse to test + * the conditions at the parent's parent. */ if (P_RIGHTMOST(opaque) || P_ISROOT(opaque)) { @@ -887,18 +887,18 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) targetkey = CopyIndexTuple((IndexTuple) PageGetItem(page, itemid)); /* - * To avoid deadlocks, we'd better drop the target page lock before - * going further. + * To avoid deadlocks, we'd better drop the target page lock before going + * further. */ _bt_relbuf(rel, buf); /* - * We need an approximate pointer to the page's parent page. We use - * the standard search mechanism to search for the page's high key; this - * will give us a link to either the current parent or someplace to its - * left (if there are multiple equal high keys). In recursion cases, - * the caller already generated a search stack and we can just re-use - * that work. + * We need an approximate pointer to the page's parent page. We use the + * standard search mechanism to search for the page's high key; this will + * give us a link to either the current parent or someplace to its left + * (if there are multiple equal high keys). In recursion cases, the + * caller already generated a search stack and we can just re-use that + * work. */ if (stack == NULL) { @@ -933,11 +933,11 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) /* * During WAL recovery, we can't use _bt_search (for one reason, * it might invoke user-defined comparison functions that expect - * facilities not available in recovery mode). Instead, just - * set up a dummy stack pointing to the left end of the parent - * tree level, from which _bt_getstackbuf will walk right to the - * parent page. Painful, but we don't care too much about - * performance in this scenario. + * facilities not available in recovery mode). Instead, just set + * up a dummy stack pointing to the left end of the parent tree + * level, from which _bt_getstackbuf will walk right to the parent + * page. Painful, but we don't care too much about performance in + * this scenario. */ pbuf = _bt_get_endpoint(rel, targetlevel + 1, false); stack = (BTStack) palloc(sizeof(BTStackData)); @@ -951,10 +951,10 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) /* * We cannot delete a page that is the rightmost child of its immediate - * parent, unless it is the only child --- in which case the parent has - * to be deleted too, and the same condition applies recursively to it. - * We have to check this condition all the way up before trying to delete. - * We don't need to re-test when deleting a non-leaf page, though. + * parent, unless it is the only child --- in which case the parent has to + * be deleted too, and the same condition applies recursively to it. We + * have to check this condition all the way up before trying to delete. We + * don't need to re-test when deleting a non-leaf page, though. */ if (targetlevel == 0 && !_bt_parent_deletion_safe(rel, target, stack)) @@ -1072,8 +1072,8 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) * might be possible to push the fast root even further down, but the odds * of doing so are slim, and the locking considerations daunting.) * - * We don't support handling this in the case where the parent is - * becoming half-dead, even though it theoretically could occur. + * We don't support handling this in the case where the parent is becoming + * half-dead, even though it theoretically could occur. * * We can safely acquire a lock on the metapage here --- see comments for * _bt_newroot(). @@ -1287,10 +1287,10 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack, bool vacuum_full) _bt_relbuf(rel, lbuf); /* - * If parent became half dead, recurse to delete it. Otherwise, if - * right sibling is empty and is now the last child of the parent, recurse - * to try to delete it. (These cases cannot apply at the same time, - * though the second case might itself recurse to the first.) + * If parent became half dead, recurse to delete it. Otherwise, if right + * sibling is empty and is now the last child of the parent, recurse to + * try to delete it. (These cases cannot apply at the same time, though + * the second case might itself recurse to the first.) * * When recursing to parent, we hold the lock on the target page until * done. This delays any insertions into the keyspace that was just diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c index b947d770aa..7b71f544f8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c,v 1.113 2007/05/27 03:50:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c,v 1.114 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -637,17 +637,17 @@ _bt_first(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection dir) * even if the row comparison is of ">" or "<" type, because the * condition applied to all but the last row member is effectively * ">=" or "<=", and so the extra keys don't break the positioning - * scheme. But, by the same token, if we aren't able to use all + * scheme. But, by the same token, if we aren't able to use all * the row members, then the part of the row comparison that we - * did use has to be treated as just a ">=" or "<=" condition, - * and so we'd better adjust strat_total accordingly. + * did use has to be treated as just a ">=" or "<=" condition, and + * so we'd better adjust strat_total accordingly. */ if (i == keysCount - 1) { bool used_all_subkeys = false; Assert(!(subkey->sk_flags & SK_ROW_END)); - for(;;) + for (;;) { subkey++; Assert(subkey->sk_flags & SK_ROW_MEMBER); diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c index 6d85695c3d..a1b0125f78 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c,v 1.86 2007/09/12 22:10:26 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c,v 1.87 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ _bt_freestack(BTStack stack) * that's the only one returned. (So, we return either a single = key, * or one or two boundary-condition keys for each attr.) However, if we * cannot compare two keys for lack of a suitable cross-type operator, - * we cannot eliminate either. If there are two such keys of the same + * we cannot eliminate either. If there are two such keys of the same * operator strategy, the second one is just pushed into the output array * without further processing here. We may also emit both >/>= or both * </<= keys if we can't compare them. The logic about required keys still @@ -265,13 +265,13 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) { /* * We treat all btree operators as strict (even if they're not so - * marked in pg_proc). This means that it is impossible for an - * operator condition with a NULL comparison constant to succeed, - * and we can reject it right away. + * marked in pg_proc). This means that it is impossible for an + * operator condition with a NULL comparison constant to succeed, and + * we can reject it right away. * * However, we now also support "x IS NULL" clauses as search - * conditions, so in that case keep going. The planner has not - * filled in any particular strategy in this case, so set it to + * conditions, so in that case keep going. The planner has not filled + * in any particular strategy in this case, so set it to * BTEqualStrategyNumber --- we can treat IS NULL as an equality * operator for purposes of search strategy. */ @@ -303,8 +303,8 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) /* * Initialize for processing of keys for attr 1. * - * xform[i] points to the currently best scan key of strategy type i+1; - * it is NULL if we haven't yet found such a key for this attr. + * xform[i] points to the currently best scan key of strategy type i+1; it + * is NULL if we haven't yet found such a key for this attr. */ attno = 1; memset(xform, 0, sizeof(xform)); @@ -464,6 +464,7 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) memcpy(outkey, cur, sizeof(ScanKeyData)); if (numberOfEqualCols == attno - 1) _bt_mark_scankey_required(outkey); + /* * We don't support RowCompare using equality; such a qual would * mess up the numberOfEqualCols tracking. @@ -514,9 +515,9 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) else { /* - * We can't determine which key is more restrictive. Keep - * the previous one in xform[j] and push this one directly - * to the output array. + * We can't determine which key is more restrictive. Keep the + * previous one in xform[j] and push this one directly to the + * output array. */ ScanKey outkey = &outkeys[new_numberOfKeys++]; @@ -542,7 +543,7 @@ _bt_preprocess_keys(IndexScanDesc scan) * and amoplefttype/amoprighttype equal to the two argument datatypes. * * If the opfamily doesn't supply a complete set of cross-type operators we - * may not be able to make the comparison. If we can make the comparison + * may not be able to make the comparison. If we can make the comparison * we store the operator result in *result and return TRUE. We return FALSE * if the comparison could not be made. * @@ -608,8 +609,8 @@ _bt_compare_scankey_args(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanKey op, * indexscan initiated by syscache lookup will use cross-data-type * operators.) * - * If the sk_strategy was flipped by _bt_mark_scankey_with_indoption, - * we have to un-flip it to get the correct opfamily member. + * If the sk_strategy was flipped by _bt_mark_scankey_with_indoption, we + * have to un-flip it to get the correct opfamily member. */ strat = op->sk_strategy; if (op->sk_flags & SK_BT_DESC) @@ -654,7 +655,7 @@ _bt_compare_scankey_args(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanKey op, static void _bt_mark_scankey_with_indoption(ScanKey skey, int16 *indoption) { - int addflags; + int addflags; addflags = indoption[skey->sk_attno - 1] << SK_BT_INDOPTION_SHIFT; if ((addflags & SK_BT_DESC) && !(skey->sk_flags & SK_BT_DESC)) @@ -874,8 +875,8 @@ _bt_checkkeys(IndexScanDesc scan, /* * Since NULLs are sorted before non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the lower limit of the range of values for this - * index attr. On a backward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, + * index attr. On a backward scan, we can stop if this qual + * is one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((key->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQBKWD) && @@ -887,8 +888,8 @@ _bt_checkkeys(IndexScanDesc scan, /* * Since NULLs are sorted after non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the upper limit of the range of values for this - * index attr. On a forward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, + * index attr. On a forward scan, we can stop if this qual is + * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((key->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQFWD) && @@ -978,7 +979,7 @@ _bt_check_rowcompare(ScanKey skey, IndexTuple tuple, TupleDesc tupdesc, * Since NULLs are sorted before non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the lower limit of the range of values for this * index attr. On a backward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, + * one of the "must match" subset. On a forward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((subkey->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQBKWD) && @@ -991,7 +992,7 @@ _bt_check_rowcompare(ScanKey skey, IndexTuple tuple, TupleDesc tupdesc, * Since NULLs are sorted after non-NULLs, we know we have * reached the upper limit of the range of values for this * index attr. On a forward scan, we can stop if this qual is - * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, + * one of the "must match" subset. On a backward scan, * however, we should keep going. */ if ((subkey->sk_flags & SK_BT_REQFWD) && @@ -1264,8 +1265,8 @@ _bt_start_vacuum(Relation rel) LWLockAcquire(BtreeVacuumLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); /* - * Assign the next cycle ID, being careful to avoid zero as well as - * the reserved high values. + * Assign the next cycle ID, being careful to avoid zero as well as the + * reserved high values. */ result = ++(btvacinfo->cycle_ctr); if (result == 0 || result > MAX_BT_CYCLE_ID) diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c index 499129c48f..79aae66201 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.46 2007/09/20 17:56:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.47 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ typedef struct bt_incomplete_action BlockNumber rightblk; /* right half of split */ /* these fields are for a delete: */ BlockNumber delblk; /* parent block to be deleted */ -} bt_incomplete_action; +} bt_incomplete_action; static List *incomplete_actions; @@ -271,8 +271,8 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, char *datapos; int datalen; OffsetNumber newitemoff = 0; - Item newitem = NULL; - Size newitemsz = 0; + Item newitem = NULL; + Size newitemsz = 0; reln = XLogOpenRelation(xlrec->node); @@ -343,15 +343,15 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, * Reconstruct left (original) sibling if needed. Note that this code * ensures that the items remaining on the left page are in the correct * item number order, but it does not reproduce the physical order they - * would have had. Is this worth changing? See also _bt_restore_page(). + * would have had. Is this worth changing? See also _bt_restore_page(). */ if (!(record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_1)) { - Buffer lbuf = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->leftsib, false); + Buffer lbuf = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->leftsib, false); if (BufferIsValid(lbuf)) { - Page lpage = (Page) BufferGetPage(lbuf); + Page lpage = (Page) BufferGetPage(lbuf); BTPageOpaque lopaque = (BTPageOpaque) PageGetSpecialPointer(lpage); if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(lpage))) @@ -359,19 +359,20 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, OffsetNumber off; OffsetNumber maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(lpage); OffsetNumber deletable[MaxOffsetNumber]; - int ndeletable = 0; - ItemId hiItemId; - Item hiItem; + int ndeletable = 0; + ItemId hiItemId; + Item hiItem; /* - * Remove the items from the left page that were copied to - * the right page. Also remove the old high key, if any. - * (We must remove everything before trying to insert any - * items, else we risk not having enough space.) + * Remove the items from the left page that were copied to the + * right page. Also remove the old high key, if any. (We must + * remove everything before trying to insert any items, else + * we risk not having enough space.) */ if (!P_RIGHTMOST(lopaque)) { deletable[ndeletable++] = P_HIKEY; + /* * newitemoff is given to us relative to the original * page's item numbering, so adjust it for this deletion. @@ -421,11 +422,11 @@ btree_xlog_split(bool onleft, bool isroot, /* Fix left-link of the page to the right of the new right sibling */ if (xlrec->rnext != P_NONE && !(record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_2)) { - Buffer buffer = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->rnext, false); + Buffer buffer = XLogReadBuffer(reln, xlrec->rnext, false); if (BufferIsValid(buffer)) { - Page page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + Page page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { @@ -795,7 +796,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } @@ -807,7 +808,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } @@ -819,7 +820,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } @@ -831,7 +832,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode); appendStringInfo(buf, "left %u, right %u, next %u, level %u, firstright %d", - xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, + xlrec->leftsib, xlrec->rightsib, xlrec->rnext, xlrec->level, xlrec->firstright); break; } diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c index 419c865606..72be0e855a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c @@ -14,19 +14,19 @@ * CLOG page is initialized to zeroes. Other writes of CLOG come from * recording of transaction commit or abort in xact.c, which generates its * own XLOG records for these events and will re-perform the status update - * on redo; so we need make no additional XLOG entry here. For synchronous + * on redo; so we need make no additional XLOG entry here. For synchronous * transaction commits, the XLOG is guaranteed flushed through the XLOG commit * record before we are called to log a commit, so the WAL rule "write xlog * before data" is satisfied automatically. However, for async commits we * must track the latest LSN affecting each CLOG page, so that we can flush - * XLOG that far and satisfy the WAL rule. We don't have to worry about this + * XLOG that far and satisfy the WAL rule. We don't have to worry about this * for aborts (whether sync or async), since the post-crash assumption would * be that such transactions failed anyway. * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c,v 1.44 2007/09/05 18:10:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c,v 1.45 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ #define TransactionIdToBIndex(xid) ((xid) % (TransactionId) CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE) /* We store the latest async LSN for each group of transactions */ -#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP 32 /* keep this a power of 2 */ -#define CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE (CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) +#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP 32 /* keep this a power of 2 */ +#define CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE (CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) #define GetLSNIndex(slotno, xid) ((slotno) * CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE + \ ((xid) % (TransactionId) CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE) / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ static void WriteTruncateXlogRec(int pageno); * Record the final state of a transaction in the commit log. * * lsn must be the WAL location of the commit record when recording an async - * commit. For a synchronous commit it can be InvalidXLogRecPtr, since the + * commit. For a synchronous commit it can be InvalidXLogRecPtr, since the * caller guarantees the commit record is already flushed in that case. It * should be InvalidXLogRecPtr for abort cases, too. * @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ TransactionIdSetStatus(TransactionId xid, XidStatus status, XLogRecPtr lsn) * an LSN that is late enough to be able to guarantee that if we flush up to * that LSN then we will have flushed the transaction's commit record to disk. * The result is not necessarily the exact LSN of the transaction's commit - * record! For example, for long-past transactions (those whose clog pages + * record! For example, for long-past transactions (those whose clog pages * already migrated to disk), we'll return InvalidXLogRecPtr. Also, because * we group transactions on the same clog page to conserve storage, we might * return the LSN of a later transaction that falls into the same group. @@ -486,8 +486,8 @@ clog_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) memcpy(&pageno, XLogRecGetData(record), sizeof(int)); /* - * During XLOG replay, latest_page_number isn't set up yet; insert - * a suitable value to bypass the sanity test in SimpleLruTruncate. + * During XLOG replay, latest_page_number isn't set up yet; insert a + * suitable value to bypass the sanity test in SimpleLruTruncate. */ ClogCtl->shared->latest_page_number = pageno; diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c index b34fa9be78..61a59961d7 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c,v 1.25 2007/09/05 18:10:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c,v 1.26 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -380,9 +380,9 @@ MultiXactIdIsRunning(MultiXactId multi) } /* - * Checking for myself is cheap compared to looking in shared memory, - * so first do the equivalent of MultiXactIdIsCurrent(). This is not - * needed for correctness, it's just a fast path. + * Checking for myself is cheap compared to looking in shared memory, so + * first do the equivalent of MultiXactIdIsCurrent(). This is not needed + * for correctness, it's just a fast path. */ for (i = 0; i < nmembers; i++) { diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c b/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c index e53b05e04d..db0f79c47c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c,v 1.71 2007/09/08 20:31:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/transam.c,v 1.72 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * This file contains the high level access-method interface to the @@ -440,14 +440,14 @@ TransactionId TransactionIdLatest(TransactionId mainxid, int nxids, const TransactionId *xids) { - TransactionId result; + TransactionId result; /* - * In practice it is highly likely that the xids[] array is sorted, and - * so we could save some cycles by just taking the last child XID, but - * this probably isn't so performance-critical that it's worth depending - * on that assumption. But just to show we're not totally stupid, scan - * the array back-to-front to avoid useless assignments. + * In practice it is highly likely that the xids[] array is sorted, and so + * we could save some cycles by just taking the last child XID, but this + * probably isn't so performance-critical that it's worth depending on + * that assumption. But just to show we're not totally stupid, scan the + * array back-to-front to avoid useless assignments. */ result = mainxid; while (--nxids >= 0) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c index 6ce9d1b586..2888adbc37 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.37 2007/10/24 20:55:36 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.38 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Each global transaction is associated with a global transaction @@ -397,15 +397,15 @@ LockGXact(const char *gid, Oid user) errhint("Must be superuser or the user that prepared the transaction."))); /* - * Note: it probably would be possible to allow committing from another - * database; but at the moment NOTIFY is known not to work and there - * may be some other issues as well. Hence disallow until someone - * gets motivated to make it work. + * Note: it probably would be possible to allow committing from + * another database; but at the moment NOTIFY is known not to work and + * there may be some other issues as well. Hence disallow until + * someone gets motivated to make it work. */ if (MyDatabaseId != gxact->proc.databaseId) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("prepared transaction belongs to another database"), + errmsg("prepared transaction belongs to another database"), errhint("Connect to the database where the transaction was prepared to finish it."))); /* OK for me to lock it */ @@ -937,11 +937,11 @@ EndPrepare(GlobalTransaction gxact) * odds of a PANIC actually occurring should be very tiny given that we * were able to write the bogus CRC above. * - * We have to set inCommit here, too; otherwise a checkpoint - * starting immediately after the WAL record is inserted could complete - * without fsync'ing our state file. (This is essentially the same kind - * of race condition as the COMMIT-to-clog-write case that - * RecordTransactionCommit uses inCommit for; see notes there.) + * We have to set inCommit here, too; otherwise a checkpoint starting + * immediately after the WAL record is inserted could complete without + * fsync'ing our state file. (This is essentially the same kind of race + * condition as the COMMIT-to-clog-write case that RecordTransactionCommit + * uses inCommit for; see notes there.) * * We save the PREPARE record's location in the gxact for later use by * CheckPointTwoPhase. @@ -985,8 +985,8 @@ EndPrepare(GlobalTransaction gxact) MarkAsPrepared(gxact); /* - * Now we can mark ourselves as out of the commit critical section: - * a checkpoint starting after this will certainly see the gxact as a + * Now we can mark ourselves as out of the commit critical section: a + * checkpoint starting after this will certainly see the gxact as a * candidate for fsyncing. */ MyProc->inCommit = false; @@ -1272,8 +1272,8 @@ RemoveTwoPhaseFile(TransactionId xid, bool giveWarning) if (errno != ENOENT || giveWarning) ereport(WARNING, (errcode_for_file_access(), - errmsg("could not remove two-phase state file \"%s\": %m", - path))); + errmsg("could not remove two-phase state file \"%s\": %m", + path))); } /* @@ -1500,8 +1500,8 @@ PrescanPreparedTransactions(void) if (buf == NULL) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", - clde->d_name))); + (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", + clde->d_name))); RemoveTwoPhaseFile(xid, true); continue; } @@ -1511,8 +1511,8 @@ PrescanPreparedTransactions(void) if (!TransactionIdEquals(hdr->xid, xid)) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", - clde->d_name))); + (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", + clde->d_name))); RemoveTwoPhaseFile(xid, true); pfree(buf); continue; @@ -1599,8 +1599,8 @@ RecoverPreparedTransactions(void) if (buf == NULL) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", - clde->d_name))); + (errmsg("removing corrupt two-phase state file \"%s\"", + clde->d_name))); RemoveTwoPhaseFile(xid, true); continue; } @@ -1711,9 +1711,9 @@ RecordTransactionCommitPrepared(TransactionId xid, recptr = XLogInsert(RM_XACT_ID, XLOG_XACT_COMMIT_PREPARED, rdata); /* - * We don't currently try to sleep before flush here ... nor is there - * any support for async commit of a prepared xact (the very idea is - * probably a contradiction) + * We don't currently try to sleep before flush here ... nor is there any + * support for async commit of a prepared xact (the very idea is probably + * a contradiction) */ /* Flush XLOG to disk */ diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c index 9c2f14a1a3..84d1e9caef 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c,v 1.5 2007/05/27 03:50:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ const TwoPhaseCallback twophase_postcommit_callbacks[TWOPHASE_RM_MAX_ID + 1] = lock_twophase_postcommit, /* Lock */ inval_twophase_postcommit, /* Inval */ flatfile_twophase_postcommit, /* flat file update */ - notify_twophase_postcommit, /* notify/listen */ + notify_twophase_postcommit, /* notify/listen */ pgstat_twophase_postcommit /* pgstat */ }; diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c b/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c index 14332c6ab2..d7a5183d4c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2000-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c,v 1.79 2007/09/08 20:31:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c,v 1.80 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -73,9 +73,9 @@ GetNewTransactionId(bool isSubXact) TransactionIdIsValid(ShmemVariableCache->xidVacLimit)) { /* - * To avoid swamping the postmaster with signals, we issue the - * autovac request only once per 64K transaction starts. This - * still gives plenty of chances before we get into real trouble. + * To avoid swamping the postmaster with signals, we issue the autovac + * request only once per 64K transaction starts. This still gives + * plenty of chances before we get into real trouble. */ if (IsUnderPostmaster && (xid % 65536) == 0) SendPostmasterSignal(PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER); @@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ GetNewTransactionId(bool isSubXact) /* * We must store the new XID into the shared ProcArray before releasing - * XidGenLock. This ensures that every active XID older than - * latestCompletedXid is present in the ProcArray, which is essential - * for correct OldestXmin tracking; see src/backend/access/transam/README. + * XidGenLock. This ensures that every active XID older than + * latestCompletedXid is present in the ProcArray, which is essential for + * correct OldestXmin tracking; see src/backend/access/transam/README. * * XXX by storing xid into MyProc without acquiring ProcArrayLock, we are * relying on fetch/store of an xid to be atomic, else other backends @@ -249,18 +249,18 @@ SetTransactionIdLimit(TransactionId oldest_datfrozenxid, xidWarnLimit -= FirstNormalTransactionId; /* - * We'll start trying to force autovacuums when oldest_datfrozenxid - * gets to be more than autovacuum_freeze_max_age transactions old. + * We'll start trying to force autovacuums when oldest_datfrozenxid gets + * to be more than autovacuum_freeze_max_age transactions old. * - * Note: guc.c ensures that autovacuum_freeze_max_age is in a sane - * range, so that xidVacLimit will be well before xidWarnLimit. + * Note: guc.c ensures that autovacuum_freeze_max_age is in a sane range, + * so that xidVacLimit will be well before xidWarnLimit. * * Note: autovacuum_freeze_max_age is a PGC_POSTMASTER parameter so that * we don't have to worry about dealing with on-the-fly changes in its * value. It doesn't look practical to update shared state from a GUC * assign hook (too many processes would try to execute the hook, - * resulting in race conditions as well as crashes of those not - * connected to shared memory). Perhaps this can be improved someday. + * resulting in race conditions as well as crashes of those not connected + * to shared memory). Perhaps this can be improved someday. */ xidVacLimit = oldest_datfrozenxid + autovacuum_freeze_max_age; if (xidVacLimit < FirstNormalTransactionId) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c index b7ab958586..04804c3871 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.252 2007/11/10 14:36:44 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.253 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -274,8 +274,8 @@ IsTransactionState(void) TransactionState s = CurrentTransactionState; /* - * TRANS_DEFAULT and TRANS_ABORT are obviously unsafe states. However, - * we also reject the startup/shutdown states TRANS_START, TRANS_COMMIT, + * TRANS_DEFAULT and TRANS_ABORT are obviously unsafe states. However, we + * also reject the startup/shutdown states TRANS_START, TRANS_COMMIT, * TRANS_PREPARE since it might be too soon or too late within those * transition states to do anything interesting. Hence, the only "valid" * state is TRANS_INPROGRESS. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ GetCurrentTransactionIdIfAny(void) static void AssignTransactionId(TransactionState s) { - bool isSubXact = (s->parent != NULL); + bool isSubXact = (s->parent != NULL); ResourceOwner currentOwner; /* Assert that caller didn't screw up */ @@ -400,9 +400,9 @@ AssignTransactionId(TransactionState s) SubTransSetParent(s->transactionId, s->parent->transactionId); /* - * Acquire lock on the transaction XID. (We assume this cannot block.) - * We have to ensure that the lock is assigned to the transaction's - * own ResourceOwner. + * Acquire lock on the transaction XID. (We assume this cannot block.) We + * have to ensure that the lock is assigned to the transaction's own + * ResourceOwner. */ currentOwner = CurrentResourceOwner; PG_TRY(); @@ -626,9 +626,9 @@ AtStart_Memory(void) /* * If this is the first time through, create a private context for * AbortTransaction to work in. By reserving some space now, we can - * insulate AbortTransaction from out-of-memory scenarios. Like - * ErrorContext, we set it up with slow growth rate and a nonzero - * minimum size, so that space will be reserved immediately. + * insulate AbortTransaction from out-of-memory scenarios. Like + * ErrorContext, we set it up with slow growth rate and a nonzero minimum + * size, so that space will be reserved immediately. */ if (TransactionAbortContext == NULL) TransactionAbortContext = @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ AtSubStart_ResourceOwner(void) * RecordTransactionCommit * * Returns latest XID among xact and its children, or InvalidTransactionId - * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) + * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) * * This is exported only to support an ugly hack in VACUUM FULL. */ @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ TransactionId RecordTransactionCommit(void) { TransactionId xid = GetTopTransactionIdIfAny(); - bool markXidCommitted = TransactionIdIsValid(xid); + bool markXidCommitted = TransactionIdIsValid(xid); TransactionId latestXid = InvalidTransactionId; int nrels; RelFileNode *rels; @@ -770,29 +770,29 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) nchildren = xactGetCommittedChildren(&children); /* - * If we haven't been assigned an XID yet, we neither can, nor do we - * want to write a COMMIT record. + * If we haven't been assigned an XID yet, we neither can, nor do we want + * to write a COMMIT record. */ if (!markXidCommitted) { /* * We expect that every smgrscheduleunlink is followed by a catalog - * update, and hence XID assignment, so we shouldn't get here with - * any pending deletes. Use a real test not just an Assert to check - * this, since it's a bit fragile. + * update, and hence XID assignment, so we shouldn't get here with any + * pending deletes. Use a real test not just an Assert to check this, + * since it's a bit fragile. */ if (nrels != 0) elog(ERROR, "cannot commit a transaction that deleted files but has no xid"); /* Can't have child XIDs either; AssignTransactionId enforces this */ Assert(nchildren == 0); - + /* * If we didn't create XLOG entries, we're done here; otherwise we - * should flush those entries the same as a commit record. (An + * should flush those entries the same as a commit record. (An * example of a possible record that wouldn't cause an XID to be - * assigned is a sequence advance record due to nextval() --- we - * want to flush that to disk before reporting commit.) + * assigned is a sequence advance record due to nextval() --- we want + * to flush that to disk before reporting commit.) */ if (XactLastRecEnd.xrecoff == 0) goto cleanup; @@ -802,30 +802,29 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Begin commit critical section and insert the commit XLOG record. */ - XLogRecData rdata[3]; - int lastrdata = 0; - xl_xact_commit xlrec; + XLogRecData rdata[3]; + int lastrdata = 0; + xl_xact_commit xlrec; /* Tell bufmgr and smgr to prepare for commit */ BufmgrCommit(); /* - * Mark ourselves as within our "commit critical section". This + * Mark ourselves as within our "commit critical section". This * forces any concurrent checkpoint to wait until we've updated - * pg_clog. Without this, it is possible for the checkpoint to - * set REDO after the XLOG record but fail to flush the pg_clog - * update to disk, leading to loss of the transaction commit if - * the system crashes a little later. + * pg_clog. Without this, it is possible for the checkpoint to set + * REDO after the XLOG record but fail to flush the pg_clog update to + * disk, leading to loss of the transaction commit if the system + * crashes a little later. * * Note: we could, but don't bother to, set this flag in - * RecordTransactionAbort. That's because loss of a transaction - * abort is noncritical; the presumption would be that it aborted, - * anyway. + * RecordTransactionAbort. That's because loss of a transaction abort + * is noncritical; the presumption would be that it aborted, anyway. * - * It's safe to change the inCommit flag of our own backend - * without holding the ProcArrayLock, since we're the only one - * modifying it. This makes checkpoint's determination of which - * xacts are inCommit a bit fuzzy, but it doesn't matter. + * It's safe to change the inCommit flag of our own backend without + * holding the ProcArrayLock, since we're the only one modifying it. + * This makes checkpoint's determination of which xacts are inCommit a + * bit fuzzy, but it doesn't matter. */ START_CRIT_SECTION(); MyProc->inCommit = true; @@ -864,7 +863,7 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) * Check if we want to commit asynchronously. If the user has set * synchronous_commit = off, and we're not doing cleanup of any non-temp * rels nor committing any command that wanted to force sync commit, then - * we can defer flushing XLOG. (We must not allow asynchronous commit if + * we can defer flushing XLOG. (We must not allow asynchronous commit if * there are any non-temp tables to be deleted, because we might delete * the files before the COMMIT record is flushed to disk. We do allow * asynchronous commit if all to-be-deleted tables are temporary though, @@ -875,15 +874,14 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Synchronous commit case. * - * Sleep before flush! So we can flush more than one commit - * records per single fsync. (The idea is some other backend - * may do the XLogFlush while we're sleeping. This needs work - * still, because on most Unixen, the minimum select() delay - * is 10msec or more, which is way too long.) + * Sleep before flush! So we can flush more than one commit records + * per single fsync. (The idea is some other backend may do the + * XLogFlush while we're sleeping. This needs work still, because on + * most Unixen, the minimum select() delay is 10msec or more, which is + * way too long.) * - * We do not sleep if enableFsync is not turned on, nor if - * there are fewer than CommitSiblings other backends with - * active transactions. + * We do not sleep if enableFsync is not turned on, nor if there are + * fewer than CommitSiblings other backends with active transactions. */ if (CommitDelay > 0 && enableFsync && CountActiveBackends() >= CommitSiblings) @@ -906,15 +904,15 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Asynchronous commit case. * - * Report the latest async commit LSN, so that - * the WAL writer knows to flush this commit. + * Report the latest async commit LSN, so that the WAL writer knows to + * flush this commit. */ XLogSetAsyncCommitLSN(XactLastRecEnd); /* - * We must not immediately update the CLOG, since we didn't - * flush the XLOG. Instead, we store the LSN up to which - * the XLOG must be flushed before the CLOG may be updated. + * We must not immediately update the CLOG, since we didn't flush the + * XLOG. Instead, we store the LSN up to which the XLOG must be + * flushed before the CLOG may be updated. */ if (markXidCommitted) { @@ -925,8 +923,8 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) } /* - * If we entered a commit critical section, leave it now, and - * let checkpoints proceed. + * If we entered a commit critical section, leave it now, and let + * checkpoints proceed. */ if (markXidCommitted) { @@ -1068,11 +1066,11 @@ RecordSubTransactionCommit(void) * We do not log the subcommit in XLOG; it doesn't matter until the * top-level transaction commits. * - * We must mark the subtransaction subcommitted in the CLOG if - * it had a valid XID assigned. If it did not, nobody else will - * ever know about the existence of this subxact. We don't - * have to deal with deletions scheduled for on-commit here, since - * they'll be reassigned to our parent (who might still abort). + * We must mark the subtransaction subcommitted in the CLOG if it had a + * valid XID assigned. If it did not, nobody else will ever know about + * the existence of this subxact. We don't have to deal with deletions + * scheduled for on-commit here, since they'll be reassigned to our parent + * (who might still abort). */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(xid)) { @@ -1095,7 +1093,7 @@ RecordSubTransactionCommit(void) * RecordTransactionAbort * * Returns latest XID among xact and its children, or InvalidTransactionId - * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) + * if the xact has no XID. (We compute that here just because it's easier.) */ static TransactionId RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) @@ -1106,15 +1104,15 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) RelFileNode *rels; int nchildren; TransactionId *children; - XLogRecData rdata[3]; - int lastrdata = 0; - xl_xact_abort xlrec; + XLogRecData rdata[3]; + int lastrdata = 0; + xl_xact_abort xlrec; /* - * If we haven't been assigned an XID, nobody will care whether we - * aborted or not. Hence, we're done in that case. It does not matter - * if we have rels to delete (note that this routine is not responsible - * for actually deleting 'em). We cannot have any child XIDs, either. + * If we haven't been assigned an XID, nobody will care whether we aborted + * or not. Hence, we're done in that case. It does not matter if we have + * rels to delete (note that this routine is not responsible for actually + * deleting 'em). We cannot have any child XIDs, either. */ if (!TransactionIdIsValid(xid)) { @@ -1128,7 +1126,7 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) * We have a valid XID, so we should write an ABORT record for it. * * We do not flush XLOG to disk here, since the default assumption after a - * crash would be that we aborted, anyway. For the same reason, we don't + * crash would be that we aborted, anyway. For the same reason, we don't * need to worry about interlocking against checkpoint start. */ @@ -1189,10 +1187,10 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) * having flushed the ABORT record to disk, because in event of a crash * we'd be assumed to have aborted anyway. * - * The ordering here isn't critical but it seems best to mark the - * parent first. This assures an atomic transition of all the - * subtransactions to aborted state from the point of view of - * concurrent TransactionIdDidAbort calls. + * The ordering here isn't critical but it seems best to mark the parent + * first. This assures an atomic transition of all the subtransactions to + * aborted state from the point of view of concurrent + * TransactionIdDidAbort calls. */ TransactionIdAbort(xid); TransactionIdAbortTree(nchildren, children); @@ -1231,9 +1229,9 @@ static void AtAbort_Memory(void) { /* - * Switch into TransactionAbortContext, which should have some free - * space even if nothing else does. We'll work in this context until - * we've finished cleaning up. + * Switch into TransactionAbortContext, which should have some free space + * even if nothing else does. We'll work in this context until we've + * finished cleaning up. * * It is barely possible to get here when we've not been able to create * TransactionAbortContext yet; if so use TopMemoryContext. @@ -1438,7 +1436,7 @@ StartTransaction(void) VirtualXactLockTableInsert(vxid); /* - * Advertise it in the proc array. We assume assignment of + * Advertise it in the proc array. We assume assignment of * LocalTransactionID is atomic, and the backendId should be set already. */ Assert(MyProc->backendId == vxid.backendId); @@ -1449,8 +1447,8 @@ StartTransaction(void) /* * set transaction_timestamp() (a/k/a now()). We want this to be the same * as the first command's statement_timestamp(), so don't do a fresh - * GetCurrentTimestamp() call (which'd be expensive anyway). Also, - * mark xactStopTimestamp as unset. + * GetCurrentTimestamp() call (which'd be expensive anyway). Also, mark + * xactStopTimestamp as unset. */ xactStartTimestamp = stmtStartTimestamp; xactStopTimestamp = 0; @@ -1576,8 +1574,8 @@ CommitTransaction(void) PG_TRACE1(transaction__commit, MyProc->lxid); /* - * Let others know about no transaction in progress by me. Note that - * this must be done _before_ releasing locks we hold and _after_ + * Let others know about no transaction in progress by me. Note that this + * must be done _before_ releasing locks we hold and _after_ * RecordTransactionCommit. */ ProcArrayEndTransaction(MyProc, latestXid); @@ -2503,7 +2501,7 @@ AbortCurrentTransaction(void) * inside a function or multi-query querystring. (We will always fail if * this is false, but it's convenient to centralize the check here instead of * making callers do it.) - * stmtType: statement type name, for error messages. + * stmtType: statement type name, for error messages. */ void PreventTransactionChain(bool isTopLevel, const char *stmtType) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c index 36adc20848..3218c134e5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.287 2007/11/15 20:36:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.288 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ bool XLOG_DEBUG = false; * future XLOG segment as long as there aren't already XLOGfileslop future * segments; else we'll delete it. This could be made a separate GUC * variable, but at present I think it's sufficient to hardwire it as - * 2*CheckPointSegments+1. Under normal conditions, a checkpoint will free + * 2*CheckPointSegments+1. Under normal conditions, a checkpoint will free * no more than 2*CheckPointSegments log segments, and we want to recycle all * of them; the +1 allows boundary cases to happen without wasting a * delete/create-segment cycle. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData XLogwrtResult LogwrtResult; uint32 ckptXidEpoch; /* nextXID & epoch of latest checkpoint */ TransactionId ckptXid; - XLogRecPtr asyncCommitLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit */ + XLogRecPtr asyncCommitLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit */ /* Protected by WALWriteLock: */ XLogCtlWrite Write; @@ -737,8 +737,8 @@ begin:; * full-block records into the non-full-block format. * * Note: we could just set the flag whenever !forcePageWrites, but - * defining it like this leaves the info bit free for some potential - * other use in records without any backup blocks. + * defining it like this leaves the info bit free for some potential other + * use in records without any backup blocks. */ if ((info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_MASK) && !Insert->forcePageWrites) info |= XLR_BKP_REMOVABLE; @@ -1345,10 +1345,10 @@ static bool XLogCheckpointNeeded(void) { /* - * A straight computation of segment number could overflow 32 - * bits. Rather than assuming we have working 64-bit - * arithmetic, we compare the highest-order bits separately, - * and force a checkpoint immediately when they change. + * A straight computation of segment number could overflow 32 bits. + * Rather than assuming we have working 64-bit arithmetic, we compare the + * highest-order bits separately, and force a checkpoint immediately when + * they change. */ uint32 old_segno, new_segno; @@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@ XLogCheckpointNeeded(void) new_segno = (openLogId % XLogSegSize) * XLogSegsPerFile + openLogSeg; new_highbits = openLogId / XLogSegSize; if (new_highbits != old_highbits || - new_segno >= old_segno + (uint32) (CheckPointSegments-1)) + new_segno >= old_segno + (uint32) (CheckPointSegments - 1)) return true; return false; } @@ -1558,9 +1558,9 @@ XLogWrite(XLogwrtRqst WriteRqst, bool flexible, bool xlog_switch) /* * Signal bgwriter to start a checkpoint if we've consumed too * much xlog since the last one. For speed, we first check - * using the local copy of RedoRecPtr, which might be - * out of date; if it looks like a checkpoint is needed, - * forcibly update RedoRecPtr and recheck. + * using the local copy of RedoRecPtr, which might be out of + * date; if it looks like a checkpoint is needed, forcibly + * update RedoRecPtr and recheck. */ if (IsUnderPostmaster && XLogCheckpointNeeded()) @@ -1779,9 +1779,9 @@ XLogFlush(XLogRecPtr record) * We normally flush only completed blocks; but if there is nothing to do on * that basis, we check for unflushed async commits in the current incomplete * block, and flush through the latest one of those. Thus, if async commits - * are not being used, we will flush complete blocks only. We can guarantee + * are not being used, we will flush complete blocks only. We can guarantee * that async commits reach disk after at most three cycles; normally only - * one or two. (We allow XLogWrite to write "flexibly", meaning it can stop + * one or two. (We allow XLogWrite to write "flexibly", meaning it can stop * at the end of the buffer ring; this makes a difference only with very high * load or long wal_writer_delay, but imposes one extra cycle for the worst * case for async commits.) @@ -1861,6 +1861,7 @@ void XLogAsyncCommitFlush(void) { XLogRecPtr WriteRqstPtr; + /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; @@ -2252,7 +2253,7 @@ InstallXLogFileSegment(uint32 *log, uint32 *seg, char *tmppath, LWLockRelease(ControlFileLock); return false; } -#endif /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* WIN32 */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), @@ -2432,8 +2433,8 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, int rc; bool signaled; struct stat stat_buf; - uint32 restartLog; - uint32 restartSeg; + uint32 restartLog; + uint32 restartSeg; /* * When doing archive recovery, we always prefer an archived log file even @@ -2511,8 +2512,8 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, sp++; XLByteToSeg(ControlFile->checkPointCopy.redo, restartLog, restartSeg); - XLogFileName(lastRestartPointFname, - ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID, + XLogFileName(lastRestartPointFname, + ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID, restartLog, restartSeg); StrNCpy(dp, lastRestartPointFname, endp - dp); dp += strlen(dp); @@ -2594,17 +2595,17 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, * incorrectly. We have to assume the former. * * However, if the failure was due to any sort of signal, it's best to - * punt and abort recovery. (If we "return false" here, upper levels - * will assume that recovery is complete and start up the database!) - * It's essential to abort on child SIGINT and SIGQUIT, because per spec + * punt and abort recovery. (If we "return false" here, upper levels will + * assume that recovery is complete and start up the database!) It's + * essential to abort on child SIGINT and SIGQUIT, because per spec * system() ignores SIGINT and SIGQUIT while waiting; if we see one of * those it's a good bet we should have gotten it too. Aborting on other * signals such as SIGTERM seems a good idea as well. * - * Per the Single Unix Spec, shells report exit status > 128 when - * a called command died on a signal. Also, 126 and 127 are used to - * report problems such as an unfindable command; treat those as fatal - * errors too. + * Per the Single Unix Spec, shells report exit status > 128 when a called + * command died on a signal. Also, 126 and 127 are used to report + * problems such as an unfindable command; treat those as fatal errors + * too. */ signaled = WIFSIGNALED(rc) || WEXITSTATUS(rc) > 125; @@ -3981,8 +3982,8 @@ ReadControlFile(void) ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("database files are incompatible with server"), errdetail("The database cluster was initialized with TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE %d," - " but the server was compiled with TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE %d.", - ControlFile->toast_max_chunk_size, (int) TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), + " but the server was compiled with TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE %d.", + ControlFile->toast_max_chunk_size, (int) TOAST_MAX_CHUNK_SIZE), errhint("It looks like you need to recompile or initdb."))); #ifdef HAVE_INT64_TIMESTAMP @@ -4430,7 +4431,7 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void) */ recoveryTargetTime = DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in, - CStringGetDatum(tok2), + CStringGetDatum(tok2), ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid), Int32GetDatum(-1))); ereport(LOG, @@ -4629,7 +4630,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis) { bool stopsHere; uint8 record_info; - TimestampTz recordXtime; + TimestampTz recordXtime; /* We only consider stopping at COMMIT or ABORT records */ if (record->xl_rmid != RM_XACT_ID) @@ -4781,11 +4782,11 @@ StartupXLOG(void) (errmsg("database system was interrupted while in recovery at log time %s", str_time(ControlFile->checkPointCopy.time)), errhint("If this has occurred more than once some data might be corrupted" - " and you might need to choose an earlier recovery target."))); + " and you might need to choose an earlier recovery target."))); else if (ControlFile->state == DB_IN_PRODUCTION) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("database system was interrupted; last known up at %s", - str_time(ControlFile->time)))); + (errmsg("database system was interrupted; last known up at %s", + str_time(ControlFile->time)))); /* This is just to allow attaching to startup process with a debugger */ #ifdef XLOG_REPLAY_DELAY @@ -4879,9 +4880,9 @@ StartupXLOG(void) wasShutdown = (record->xl_info == XLOG_CHECKPOINT_SHUTDOWN); ereport(DEBUG1, - (errmsg("redo record is at %X/%X; shutdown %s", - checkPoint.redo.xlogid, checkPoint.redo.xrecoff, - wasShutdown ? "TRUE" : "FALSE"))); + (errmsg("redo record is at %X/%X; shutdown %s", + checkPoint.redo.xlogid, checkPoint.redo.xrecoff, + wasShutdown ? "TRUE" : "FALSE"))); ereport(DEBUG1, (errmsg("next transaction ID: %u/%u; next OID: %u", checkPoint.nextXidEpoch, checkPoint.nextXid, @@ -4920,7 +4921,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) { if (wasShutdown) ereport(PANIC, - (errmsg("invalid redo record in shutdown checkpoint"))); + (errmsg("invalid redo record in shutdown checkpoint"))); InRecovery = true; } else if (ControlFile->state != DB_SHUTDOWNED) @@ -5045,7 +5046,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) */ if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply)) { - reachedStopPoint = true; /* see below */ + reachedStopPoint = true; /* see below */ recoveryContinue = false; if (!recoveryApply) break; @@ -5087,8 +5088,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void) ReadRecPtr.xlogid, ReadRecPtr.xrecoff))); if (recoveryLastXTime) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("last completed transaction was at log time %s", - timestamptz_to_str(recoveryLastXTime)))); + (errmsg("last completed transaction was at log time %s", + timestamptz_to_str(recoveryLastXTime)))); InRedo = false; } else @@ -5116,7 +5117,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) if (reachedStopPoint) /* stopped because of stop request */ ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("requested recovery stop point is before end time of backup dump"))); - else /* ran off end of WAL */ + else /* ran off end of WAL */ ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("WAL ends before end time of backup dump"))); } @@ -5124,12 +5125,12 @@ StartupXLOG(void) /* * Consider whether we need to assign a new timeline ID. * - * If we are doing an archive recovery, we always assign a new ID. This - * handles a couple of issues. If we stopped short of the end of WAL + * If we are doing an archive recovery, we always assign a new ID. This + * handles a couple of issues. If we stopped short of the end of WAL * during recovery, then we are clearly generating a new timeline and must * assign it a unique new ID. Even if we ran to the end, modifying the - * current last segment is problematic because it may result in trying - * to overwrite an already-archived copy of that segment, and we encourage + * current last segment is problematic because it may result in trying to + * overwrite an already-archived copy of that segment, and we encourage * DBAs to make their archive_commands reject that. We can dodge the * problem by making the new active segment have a new timeline ID. * @@ -5472,7 +5473,7 @@ GetInsertRecPtr(void) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; - XLogRecPtr recptr; + XLogRecPtr recptr; SpinLockAcquire(&xlogctl->info_lck); recptr = xlogctl->LogwrtRqst.Write; @@ -5576,8 +5577,12 @@ LogCheckpointStart(int flags) static void LogCheckpointEnd(void) { - long write_secs, sync_secs, total_secs; - int write_usecs, sync_usecs, total_usecs; + long write_secs, + sync_secs, + total_secs; + int write_usecs, + sync_usecs, + total_usecs; CheckpointStats.ckpt_end_t = GetCurrentTimestamp(); @@ -5601,9 +5606,9 @@ LogCheckpointEnd(void) CheckpointStats.ckpt_segs_added, CheckpointStats.ckpt_segs_removed, CheckpointStats.ckpt_segs_recycled, - write_secs, write_usecs/1000, - sync_secs, sync_usecs/1000, - total_secs, total_usecs/1000); + write_secs, write_usecs / 1000, + sync_secs, sync_usecs / 1000, + total_secs, total_usecs / 1000); } /* @@ -5665,9 +5670,9 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) } /* - * Let smgr prepare for checkpoint; this has to happen before we - * determine the REDO pointer. Note that smgr must not do anything - * that'd have to be undone if we decide no checkpoint is needed. + * Let smgr prepare for checkpoint; this has to happen before we determine + * the REDO pointer. Note that smgr must not do anything that'd have to + * be undone if we decide no checkpoint is needed. */ smgrpreckpt(); @@ -5761,8 +5766,8 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) LWLockRelease(WALInsertLock); /* - * If enabled, log checkpoint start. We postpone this until now - * so as not to log anything if we decided to skip the checkpoint. + * If enabled, log checkpoint start. We postpone this until now so as not + * to log anything if we decided to skip the checkpoint. */ if (log_checkpoints) LogCheckpointStart(flags); @@ -5782,11 +5787,11 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) * checkpoint take a bit longer than to hold locks longer than necessary. * (In fact, the whole reason we have this issue is that xact.c does * commit record XLOG insertion and clog update as two separate steps - * protected by different locks, but again that seems best on grounds - * of minimizing lock contention.) + * protected by different locks, but again that seems best on grounds of + * minimizing lock contention.) * - * A transaction that has not yet set inCommit when we look cannot be - * at risk, since he's not inserted his commit record yet; and one that's + * A transaction that has not yet set inCommit when we look cannot be at + * risk, since he's not inserted his commit record yet; and one that's * already cleared it is not at risk either, since he's done fixing clog * and we will correctly flush the update below. So we cannot miss any * xacts we need to wait for. @@ -5794,8 +5799,9 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) nInCommit = GetTransactionsInCommit(&inCommitXids); if (nInCommit > 0) { - do { - pg_usleep(10000L); /* wait for 10 msec */ + do + { + pg_usleep(10000L); /* wait for 10 msec */ } while (HaveTransactionsInCommit(inCommitXids, nInCommit)); } pfree(inCommitXids); @@ -5946,7 +5952,7 @@ CheckPointGuts(XLogRecPtr checkPointRedo, int flags) CheckPointCLOG(); CheckPointSUBTRANS(); CheckPointMultiXact(); - CheckPointBuffers(flags); /* performs all required fsyncs */ + CheckPointBuffers(flags); /* performs all required fsyncs */ /* We deliberately delay 2PC checkpointing as long as possible */ CheckPointTwoPhase(checkPointRedo); } @@ -6046,14 +6052,14 @@ XLogPutNextOid(Oid nextOid) * does. * * Note, however, that the above statement only covers state "within" the - * database. When we use a generated OID as a file or directory name, - * we are in a sense violating the basic WAL rule, because that filesystem + * database. When we use a generated OID as a file or directory name, we + * are in a sense violating the basic WAL rule, because that filesystem * change may reach disk before the NEXTOID WAL record does. The impact - * of this is that if a database crash occurs immediately afterward, - * we might after restart re-generate the same OID and find that it - * conflicts with the leftover file or directory. But since for safety's - * sake we always loop until finding a nonconflicting filename, this poses - * no real problem in practice. See pgsql-hackers discussion 27-Sep-2006. + * of this is that if a database crash occurs immediately afterward, we + * might after restart re-generate the same OID and find that it conflicts + * with the leftover file or directory. But since for safety's sake we + * always loop until finding a nonconflicting filename, this poses no real + * problem in practice. See pgsql-hackers discussion 27-Sep-2006. */ } @@ -6673,7 +6679,7 @@ pg_switch_xlog(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("must be superuser to switch transaction log files")))); + (errmsg("must be superuser to switch transaction log files")))); switchpoint = RequestXLogSwitch(); diff --git a/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c b/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c index c142085637..83b5ee878c 100644 --- a/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c +++ b/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c,v 1.236 2007/08/02 23:39:44 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c,v 1.237 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ AuxiliaryProcessMain(int argc, char *argv[]) { char *progname = argv[0]; int flag; - AuxProcType auxType = CheckerProcess; + AuxProcType auxType = CheckerProcess; char *userDoption = NULL; /* @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ AuxiliaryProcessMain(int argc, char *argv[]) InitXLOGAccess(); WalWriterMain(); proc_exit(1); /* should never return */ - + default: elog(PANIC, "unrecognized process type: %d", auxType); proc_exit(1); @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ bootstrap_signals(void) } /* - * Begin shutdown of an auxiliary process. This is approximately the equivalent + * Begin shutdown of an auxiliary process. This is approximately the equivalent * of ShutdownPostgres() in postinit.c. We can't run transactions in an * auxiliary process, so most of the work of AbortTransaction() is not needed, * but we do need to make sure we've released any LWLocks we are holding. diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c index 622901a69d..e8c9ea296f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.141 2007/10/12 18:55:11 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.142 2007/11/15 21:14:32 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * See acl.h. @@ -2348,8 +2348,8 @@ pg_ts_config_ownercheck(Oid cfg_oid, Oid roleid) if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("text search configuration with OID %u does not exist", - cfg_oid))); + errmsg("text search configuration with OID %u does not exist", + cfg_oid))); ownerId = ((Form_pg_ts_config) GETSTRUCT(tuple))->cfgowner; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c b/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c index 51bb4ba17f..c562223ddb 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c,v 1.67 2007/08/21 01:11:13 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c,v 1.68 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -85,29 +85,29 @@ typedef struct * See also getObjectClass(). */ static const Oid object_classes[MAX_OCLASS] = { - RelationRelationId, /* OCLASS_CLASS */ - ProcedureRelationId, /* OCLASS_PROC */ - TypeRelationId, /* OCLASS_TYPE */ - CastRelationId, /* OCLASS_CAST */ - ConstraintRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONSTRAINT */ - ConversionRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONVERSION */ - AttrDefaultRelationId, /* OCLASS_DEFAULT */ - LanguageRelationId, /* OCLASS_LANGUAGE */ - OperatorRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPERATOR */ - OperatorClassRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPCLASS */ - OperatorFamilyRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPFAMILY */ + RelationRelationId, /* OCLASS_CLASS */ + ProcedureRelationId, /* OCLASS_PROC */ + TypeRelationId, /* OCLASS_TYPE */ + CastRelationId, /* OCLASS_CAST */ + ConstraintRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONSTRAINT */ + ConversionRelationId, /* OCLASS_CONVERSION */ + AttrDefaultRelationId, /* OCLASS_DEFAULT */ + LanguageRelationId, /* OCLASS_LANGUAGE */ + OperatorRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPERATOR */ + OperatorClassRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPCLASS */ + OperatorFamilyRelationId, /* OCLASS_OPFAMILY */ AccessMethodOperatorRelationId, /* OCLASS_AMOP */ AccessMethodProcedureRelationId, /* OCLASS_AMPROC */ - RewriteRelationId, /* OCLASS_REWRITE */ - TriggerRelationId, /* OCLASS_TRIGGER */ - NamespaceRelationId, /* OCLASS_SCHEMA */ - TSParserRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSPARSER */ - TSDictionaryRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSDICT */ - TSTemplateRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSTEMPLATE */ - TSConfigRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSCONFIG */ - AuthIdRelationId, /* OCLASS_ROLE */ - DatabaseRelationId, /* OCLASS_DATABASE */ - TableSpaceRelationId /* OCLASS_TBLSPACE */ + RewriteRelationId, /* OCLASS_REWRITE */ + TriggerRelationId, /* OCLASS_TRIGGER */ + NamespaceRelationId, /* OCLASS_SCHEMA */ + TSParserRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSPARSER */ + TSDictionaryRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSDICT */ + TSTemplateRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSTEMPLATE */ + TSConfigRelationId, /* OCLASS_TSCONFIG */ + AuthIdRelationId, /* OCLASS_ROLE */ + DatabaseRelationId, /* OCLASS_DATABASE */ + TableSpaceRelationId /* OCLASS_TBLSPACE */ }; @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ doDeletion(const ObjectAddress *object) RemoveTSConfigurationById(object->objectId); break; - /* OCLASS_ROLE, OCLASS_DATABASE, OCLASS_TBLSPACE not handled */ + /* OCLASS_ROLE, OCLASS_DATABASE, OCLASS_TBLSPACE not handled */ default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized object class: %u", @@ -2162,7 +2162,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search parser %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search parser %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_parser) GETSTRUCT(tup))->prsname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_parser) GETSTRUCT(tup))->prsname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } @@ -2178,7 +2178,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search dictionary %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search dictionary %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_dict) GETSTRUCT(tup))->dictname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_dict) GETSTRUCT(tup))->dictname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } @@ -2194,7 +2194,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search template %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search template %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_template) GETSTRUCT(tup))->tmplname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_template) GETSTRUCT(tup))->tmplname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } @@ -2210,7 +2210,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for text search configuration %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("text search configuration %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_config) GETSTRUCT(tup))->cfgname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_ts_config) GETSTRUCT(tup))->cfgname)); ReleaseSysCache(tup); break; } diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/heap.c b/src/backend/catalog/heap.c index d22bb77a50..d436760b97 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/heap.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/heap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.325 2007/10/29 19:40:39 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.326 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid) { /* * Warn user, but don't fail, if column to be created has UNKNOWN type - * (usually as a result of a 'retrieve into' - jolly) + * (usually as a result of a 'retrieve into' - jolly) */ ereport(WARNING, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), @@ -418,8 +418,8 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid) else if (att_typtype == TYPTYPE_PSEUDO) { /* - * Refuse any attempt to create a pseudo-type column, except for - * a special hack for pg_statistic: allow ANYARRAY during initdb + * Refuse any attempt to create a pseudo-type column, except for a + * special hack for pg_statistic: allow ANYARRAY during initdb */ if (atttypid != ANYARRAYOID || IsUnderPostmaster) ereport(ERROR, @@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid) else if (att_typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE) { /* - * For a composite type, recurse into its attributes. You might - * think this isn't necessary, but since we allow system catalogs - * to break the rule, we have to guard against the case. + * For a composite type, recurse into its attributes. You might think + * this isn't necessary, but since we allow system catalogs to break + * the rule, we have to guard against the case. */ - Relation relation; - TupleDesc tupdesc; - int i; + Relation relation; + TupleDesc tupdesc; + int i; relation = relation_open(get_typ_typrelid(atttypid), AccessShareLock); @@ -702,17 +702,17 @@ AddNewRelationTuple(Relation pg_class_desc, { /* * Initialize to the minimum XID that could put tuples in the table. - * We know that no xacts older than RecentXmin are still running, - * so that will do. + * We know that no xacts older than RecentXmin are still running, so + * that will do. */ new_rel_reltup->relfrozenxid = RecentXmin; } else { /* - * Other relation types will not contain XIDs, so set relfrozenxid - * to InvalidTransactionId. (Note: a sequence does contain a tuple, - * but we force its xmin to be FrozenTransactionId always; see + * Other relation types will not contain XIDs, so set relfrozenxid to + * InvalidTransactionId. (Note: a sequence does contain a tuple, but + * we force its xmin to be FrozenTransactionId always; see * commands/sequence.c.) */ new_rel_reltup->relfrozenxid = InvalidTransactionId; @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ AddNewRelationType(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace, Oid new_rel_oid, char new_rel_kind, - Oid new_array_type) + Oid new_array_type) { return TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined OID */ @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ AddNewRelationType(const char *typeName, InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ InvalidOid, /* array element type - irrelevant */ false, /* this is not an array type */ - new_array_type, /* array type if any */ + new_array_type, /* array type if any */ InvalidOid, /* domain base type - irrelevant */ NULL, /* default value - none */ NULL, /* default binary representation */ @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, Relation new_rel_desc; Oid old_type_oid; Oid new_type_oid; - Oid new_array_oid = InvalidOid; + Oid new_array_oid = InvalidOid; pg_class_desc = heap_open(RelationRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -815,9 +815,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, /* * Since we are going to create a rowtype as well, also check for - * collision with an existing type name. If there is one and it's - * an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way; otherwise - * we can at least give a good error message. + * collision with an existing type name. If there is one and it's an + * autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way; otherwise we can + * at least give a good error message. */ old_type_oid = GetSysCacheOid(TYPENAMENSP, CStringGetDatum(relname), @@ -829,9 +829,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), errmsg("type \"%s\" already exists", relname), - errhint("A relation has an associated type of the same name, " - "so you must use a name that doesn't conflict " - "with any existing type."))); + errhint("A relation has an associated type of the same name, " + "so you must use a name that doesn't conflict " + "with any existing type."))); } /* @@ -880,9 +880,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, Assert(relid == RelationGetRelid(new_rel_desc)); /* - * Decide whether to create an array type over the relation's rowtype. - * We do not create any array types for system catalogs (ie, those made - * during initdb). We create array types for regular relations, views, + * Decide whether to create an array type over the relation's rowtype. We + * do not create any array types for system catalogs (ie, those made + * during initdb). We create array types for regular relations, views, * and composite types ... but not, eg, for toast tables or sequences. */ if (IsUnderPostmaster && (relkind == RELKIND_RELATION || @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE)) { /* OK, so pre-assign a type OID for the array type */ - Relation pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); + Relation pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); new_array_oid = GetNewOid(pg_type); heap_close(pg_type, AccessShareLock); @@ -901,14 +901,15 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, * system type corresponding to the new relation. * * NOTE: we could get a unique-index failure here, in case someone else is - * creating the same type name in parallel but hadn't committed yet - * when we checked for a duplicate name above. + * creating the same type name in parallel but hadn't committed yet when + * we checked for a duplicate name above. */ new_type_oid = AddNewRelationType(relname, relnamespace, relid, relkind, - new_array_oid); + new_array_oid); + /* * Now make the array type if wanted. */ @@ -919,32 +920,32 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, relarrayname = makeArrayTypeName(relname, relnamespace); TypeCreate(new_array_oid, /* force the type's OID to this */ - relarrayname, /* Array type name */ - relnamespace, /* Same namespace as parent */ - InvalidOid, /* Not composite, no relationOid */ - 0, /* relkind, also N/A here */ - -1, /* Internal size (varlena) */ - TYPTYPE_BASE, /* Not composite - typelem is */ + relarrayname, /* Array type name */ + relnamespace, /* Same namespace as parent */ + InvalidOid, /* Not composite, no relationOid */ + 0, /* relkind, also N/A here */ + -1, /* Internal size (varlena) */ + TYPTYPE_BASE, /* Not composite - typelem is */ DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* default array delimiter */ - F_ARRAY_IN, /* array input proc */ - F_ARRAY_OUT, /* array output proc */ - F_ARRAY_RECV, /* array recv (bin) proc */ - F_ARRAY_SEND, /* array send (bin) proc */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ - new_type_oid, /* array element type - the rowtype */ - true, /* yes, this is an array type */ - InvalidOid, /* this has no array type */ - InvalidOid, /* domain base type - irrelevant */ - NULL, /* default value - none */ - NULL, /* default binary representation */ - false, /* passed by reference */ - 'd', /* alignment - must be the largest! */ - 'x', /* fully TOASTable */ - -1, /* typmod */ - 0, /* array dimensions for typBaseType */ - false); /* Type NOT NULL */ + F_ARRAY_IN, /* array input proc */ + F_ARRAY_OUT, /* array output proc */ + F_ARRAY_RECV, /* array recv (bin) proc */ + F_ARRAY_SEND, /* array send (bin) proc */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ + new_type_oid, /* array element type - the rowtype */ + true, /* yes, this is an array type */ + InvalidOid, /* this has no array type */ + InvalidOid, /* domain base type - irrelevant */ + NULL, /* default value - none */ + NULL, /* default binary representation */ + false, /* passed by reference */ + 'd', /* alignment - must be the largest! */ + 'x', /* fully TOASTable */ + -1, /* typmod */ + 0, /* array dimensions for typBaseType */ + false); /* Type NOT NULL */ pfree(relarrayname); } @@ -1723,9 +1724,9 @@ AddRelationRawConstraints(Relation rel, NameStr(atp->attname)); /* - * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we do not bother - * to make an explicit pg_attrdef entry, since the default behavior - * is equivalent. + * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we do not bother to make + * an explicit pg_attrdef entry, since the default behavior is + * equivalent. * * Note a nonobvious property of this test: if the column is of a * domain type, what we'll get is not a bare null Const but a @@ -1734,7 +1735,7 @@ AddRelationRawConstraints(Relation rel, * override any default that the domain might have. */ if (expr == NULL || - (IsA(expr, Const) && ((Const *) expr)->constisnull)) + (IsA(expr, Const) &&((Const *) expr)->constisnull)) continue; StoreAttrDefault(rel, colDef->attnum, nodeToString(expr)); diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/index.c b/src/backend/catalog/index.c index 7f2bad8c0f..28caf71595 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/index.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/index.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.287 2007/11/08 23:22:54 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.288 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ index_create(Oid heapRelationId, } else { - bool have_simple_col = false; + bool have_simple_col = false; /* Create auto dependencies on simply-referenced columns */ for (i = 0; i < indexInfo->ii_NumIndexAttrs; i++) @@ -742,15 +742,15 @@ index_create(Oid heapRelationId, } /* - * It's possible for an index to not depend on any columns of - * the table at all, in which case we need to give it a dependency - * on the table as a whole; else it won't get dropped when the - * table is dropped. This edge case is not totally useless; - * for example, a unique index on a constant expression can serve - * to prevent a table from containing more than one row. + * It's possible for an index to not depend on any columns of the + * table at all, in which case we need to give it a dependency on + * the table as a whole; else it won't get dropped when the table + * is dropped. This edge case is not totally useless; for + * example, a unique index on a constant expression can serve to + * prevent a table from containing more than one row. */ if (!have_simple_col && - !contain_vars_of_level((Node *) indexInfo->ii_Expressions, 0) && + !contain_vars_of_level((Node *) indexInfo->ii_Expressions, 0) && !contain_vars_of_level((Node *) indexInfo->ii_Predicate, 0)) { referenced.classId = RelationRelationId; @@ -1360,15 +1360,15 @@ index_build(Relation heapRelation, Assert(PointerIsValid(stats)); /* - * If we found any potentially broken HOT chains, mark the index as - * not being usable until the current transaction is below the event - * horizon. See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. + * If we found any potentially broken HOT chains, mark the index as not + * being usable until the current transaction is below the event horizon. + * See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. */ if (indexInfo->ii_BrokenHotChain) { - Oid indexId = RelationGetRelid(indexRelation); - Relation pg_index; - HeapTuple indexTuple; + Oid indexId = RelationGetRelid(indexRelation); + Relation pg_index; + HeapTuple indexTuple; Form_pg_index indexForm; pg_index = heap_open(IndexRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1515,19 +1515,19 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); /* - * When dealing with a HOT-chain of updated tuples, we want to - * index the values of the live tuple (if any), but index it - * under the TID of the chain's root tuple. This approach is - * necessary to preserve the HOT-chain structure in the heap. - * So we need to be able to find the root item offset for every - * tuple that's in a HOT-chain. When first reaching a new page - * of the relation, call heap_get_root_tuples() to build a map - * of root item offsets on the page. + * When dealing with a HOT-chain of updated tuples, we want to index + * the values of the live tuple (if any), but index it under the TID + * of the chain's root tuple. This approach is necessary to preserve + * the HOT-chain structure in the heap. So we need to be able to find + * the root item offset for every tuple that's in a HOT-chain. When + * first reaching a new page of the relation, call + * heap_get_root_tuples() to build a map of root item offsets on the + * page. * * It might look unsafe to use this information across buffer * lock/unlock. However, we hold ShareLock on the table so no - * ordinary insert/update/delete should occur; and we hold pin on - * the buffer continuously while visiting the page, so no pruning + * ordinary insert/update/delete should occur; and we hold pin on the + * buffer continuously while visiting the page, so no pruning * operation can occur either. * * Note the implied assumption that there is no more than one live @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, */ if (scan->rs_cblock != root_blkno) { - Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); + Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); heap_get_root_tuples(page, root_offsets); @@ -1549,12 +1549,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, /* do our own time qual check */ bool indexIt; - recheck: + recheck: + /* * We could possibly get away with not locking the buffer here, * since caller should hold ShareLock on the relation, but let's - * be conservative about it. (This remark is still correct - * even with HOT-pruning: our pin on the buffer prevents pruning.) + * be conservative about it. (This remark is still correct even + * with HOT-pruning: our pin on the buffer prevents pruning.) */ LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); @@ -1580,9 +1581,9 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * building it, and may need to see such tuples.) * * However, if it was HOT-updated then we must only index - * the live tuple at the end of the HOT-chain. Since this - * breaks semantics for pre-existing snapshots, mark - * the index as unusable for them. + * the live tuple at the end of the HOT-chain. Since this + * breaks semantics for pre-existing snapshots, mark the + * index as unusable for them. * * If we've already decided that the index will be unsafe * for old snapshots, we may as well stop indexing @@ -1611,13 +1612,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * followed by CREATE INDEX within a transaction.) An * exception occurs when reindexing a system catalog, * because we often release lock on system catalogs before - * committing. In that case we wait for the inserting + * committing. In that case we wait for the inserting * transaction to finish and check again. (We could do * that on user tables too, but since the case is not * expected it seems better to throw an error.) */ if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data))) { if (!IsSystemRelation(heapRelation)) elog(ERROR, "concurrent insert in progress"); @@ -1627,11 +1628,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * Must drop the lock on the buffer before we wait */ TransactionId xwait = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(heapTuple->t_data); + LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); XactLockTableWait(xwait); goto recheck; } } + /* * We must index such tuples, since if the index build * commits then they're good. @@ -1648,14 +1651,14 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * followed by CREATE INDEX within a transaction.) An * exception occurs when reindexing a system catalog, * because we often release lock on system catalogs before - * committing. In that case we wait for the deleting + * committing. In that case we wait for the deleting * transaction to finish and check again. (We could do * that on user tables too, but since the case is not * expected it seems better to throw an error.) */ Assert(!(heapTuple->t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI)); if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple->t_data))) { if (!IsSystemRelation(heapRelation)) elog(ERROR, "concurrent delete in progress"); @@ -1665,11 +1668,13 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * Must drop the lock on the buffer before we wait */ TransactionId xwait = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(heapTuple->t_data); + LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_UNLOCK); XactLockTableWait(xwait); goto recheck; } } + /* * Otherwise, we have to treat these tuples just like * RECENTLY_DELETED ones. @@ -1689,7 +1694,7 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, break; default: elog(ERROR, "unexpected HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum result"); - indexIt = tupleIsAlive = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ + indexIt = tupleIsAlive = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } @@ -1741,11 +1746,11 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, if (HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(heapTuple)) { /* - * For a heap-only tuple, pretend its TID is that of the root. - * See src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. + * For a heap-only tuple, pretend its TID is that of the root. See + * src/backend/access/heap/README.HOT for discussion. */ - HeapTupleData rootTuple; - OffsetNumber offnum; + HeapTupleData rootTuple; + OffsetNumber offnum; rootTuple = *heapTuple; offnum = ItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(&heapTuple->t_self); @@ -1787,11 +1792,11 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * We do a concurrent index build by first inserting the catalog entry for the * index via index_create(), marking it not indisready and not indisvalid. * Then we commit our transaction and start a new one, then we wait for all - * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now + * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now * we know that any subsequently-started transactions will see the index and * honor its constraints on HOT updates; so while existing HOT-chains might * be broken with respect to the index, no currently live tuple will have an - * incompatible HOT update done to it. We now build the index normally via + * incompatible HOT update done to it. We now build the index normally via * index_build(), while holding a weak lock that allows concurrent * insert/update/delete. Also, we index only tuples that are valid * as of the start of the scan (see IndexBuildHeapScan), whereas a normal @@ -1805,7 +1810,7 @@ IndexBuildHeapScan(Relation heapRelation, * * Next, we mark the index "indisready" (but still not "indisvalid") and * commit the second transaction and start a third. Again we wait for all - * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now + * transactions that could have been modifying the table to terminate. Now * we know that any subsequently-started transactions will see the index and * insert their new tuples into it. We then take a new reference snapshot * which is passed to validate_index(). Any tuples that are valid according @@ -1945,8 +1950,8 @@ validate_index_heapscan(Relation heapRelation, EState *estate; ExprContext *econtext; BlockNumber root_blkno = InvalidBlockNumber; - OffsetNumber root_offsets[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; - bool in_index[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + OffsetNumber root_offsets[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; + bool in_index[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; /* state variables for the merge */ ItemPointer indexcursor = NULL; @@ -1989,29 +1994,29 @@ validate_index_heapscan(Relation heapRelation, { ItemPointer heapcursor = &heapTuple->t_self; ItemPointerData rootTuple; - OffsetNumber root_offnum; + OffsetNumber root_offnum; CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); state->htups += 1; /* - * As commented in IndexBuildHeapScan, we should index heap-only tuples - * under the TIDs of their root tuples; so when we advance onto a new - * heap page, build a map of root item offsets on the page. + * As commented in IndexBuildHeapScan, we should index heap-only + * tuples under the TIDs of their root tuples; so when we advance onto + * a new heap page, build a map of root item offsets on the page. * * This complicates merging against the tuplesort output: we will * visit the live tuples in order by their offsets, but the root - * offsets that we need to compare against the index contents might - * be ordered differently. So we might have to "look back" within - * the tuplesort output, but only within the current page. We handle - * that by keeping a bool array in_index[] showing all the - * already-passed-over tuplesort output TIDs of the current page. - * We clear that array here, when advancing onto a new heap page. + * offsets that we need to compare against the index contents might be + * ordered differently. So we might have to "look back" within the + * tuplesort output, but only within the current page. We handle that + * by keeping a bool array in_index[] showing all the + * already-passed-over tuplesort output TIDs of the current page. We + * clear that array here, when advancing onto a new heap page. */ if (scan->rs_cblock != root_blkno) { - Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); + Page page = BufferGetPage(scan->rs_cbuf); LockBuffer(scan->rs_cbuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); heap_get_root_tuples(page, root_offsets); @@ -2102,14 +2107,14 @@ validate_index_heapscan(Relation heapRelation, /* * If the tuple is already committed dead, you might think we - * could suppress uniqueness checking, but this is no longer - * true in the presence of HOT, because the insert is actually - * a proxy for a uniqueness check on the whole HOT-chain. That - * is, the tuple we have here could be dead because it was already + * could suppress uniqueness checking, but this is no longer true + * in the presence of HOT, because the insert is actually a proxy + * for a uniqueness check on the whole HOT-chain. That is, the + * tuple we have here could be dead because it was already * HOT-updated, and if so the updating transaction will not have - * thought it should insert index entries. The index AM will - * check the whole HOT-chain and correctly detect a conflict - * if there is one. + * thought it should insert index entries. The index AM will + * check the whole HOT-chain and correctly detect a conflict if + * there is one. */ index_insert(indexRelation, diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c b/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c index 46e0312b99..4e2bb1de5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.99 2007/08/27 03:36:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.100 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ * * The textual specification of search_path can include "$user" to refer to * the namespace named the same as the current user, if any. (This is just - * ignored if there is no such namespace.) Also, it can include "pg_temp" + * ignored if there is no such namespace.) Also, it can include "pg_temp" * to refer to the current backend's temp namespace. This is usually also * ignorable if the temp namespace hasn't been set up, but there's a special * case: if "pg_temp" appears first then it should be the default creation - * target. We kluge this case a little bit so that the temp namespace isn't + * target. We kluge this case a little bit so that the temp namespace isn't * set up until the first attempt to create something in it. (The reason for * klugery is that we can't create the temp namespace outside a transaction, * but initial GUC processing of search_path happens outside a transaction.) @@ -144,10 +144,10 @@ static bool baseSearchPathValid = true; typedef struct { - List *searchPath; /* the desired search path */ + List *searchPath; /* the desired search path */ Oid creationNamespace; /* the desired creation namespace */ - int nestLevel; /* subtransaction nesting level */ -} OverrideStackEntry; + int nestLevel; /* subtransaction nesting level */ +} OverrideStackEntry; static List *overrideStack = NIL; @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ static List *overrideStack = NIL; * command is first executed). Thereafter it's the OID of the temp namespace. * * myTempToastNamespace is the OID of the namespace for my temp tables' toast - * tables. It is set when myTempNamespace is, and is InvalidOid before that. + * tables. It is set when myTempNamespace is, and is InvalidOid before that. * * myTempNamespaceSubID shows whether we've created the TEMP namespace in the * current subtransaction. The flag propagates up the subtransaction tree, @@ -241,10 +241,10 @@ RangeVarGetRelid(const RangeVar *relation, bool failOK) if (relation->schemaname) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); + errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); if (OidIsValid(myTempNamespace)) relId = get_relname_relid(relation->relname, myTempNamespace); - else /* this probably can't happen? */ + else /* this probably can't happen? */ relId = InvalidOid; } else if (relation->schemaname) @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ RangeVarGetCreationNamespace(const RangeVar *newRelation) if (newRelation->schemaname) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); + errmsg("temporary tables cannot specify a schema name"))); /* Initialize temp namespace if first time through */ if (!OidIsValid(myTempNamespace)) InitTempTableNamespace(); @@ -619,8 +619,8 @@ FuncnameGetCandidates(List *names, int nargs) else { /* - * Consider only procs that are in the search path and are not - * in the temp namespace. + * Consider only procs that are in the search path and are not in + * the temp namespace. */ ListCell *nsp; @@ -949,8 +949,8 @@ OpernameGetCandidates(List *names, char oprkind) else { /* - * Consider only opers that are in the search path and are not - * in the temp namespace. + * Consider only opers that are in the search path and are not in + * the temp namespace. */ ListCell *nsp; @@ -1377,7 +1377,7 @@ TSParserGetPrsid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ prsoid = GetSysCacheOid(TSPARSERNAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(parser_name), @@ -1433,8 +1433,8 @@ TSParserIsVisible(Oid prsId) { /* * If it is in the path, it might still not be visible; it could be - * hidden by another parser of the same name earlier in the path. So we - * must do a slow check for conflicting parsers. + * hidden by another parser of the same name earlier in the path. So + * we must do a slow check for conflicting parsers. */ char *name = NameStr(form->prsname); ListCell *l; @@ -1445,7 +1445,7 @@ TSParserIsVisible(Oid prsId) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ TSDictionaryGetDictid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ dictoid = GetSysCacheOid(TSDICTNAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(dict_name), @@ -1562,8 +1562,8 @@ TSDictionaryIsVisible(Oid dictId) { /* * If it is in the path, it might still not be visible; it could be - * hidden by another dictionary of the same name earlier in the - * path. So we must do a slow check for conflicting dictionaries. + * hidden by another dictionary of the same name earlier in the path. + * So we must do a slow check for conflicting dictionaries. */ char *name = NameStr(form->dictname); ListCell *l; @@ -1574,7 +1574,7 @@ TSDictionaryIsVisible(Oid dictId) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1634,7 +1634,7 @@ TSTemplateGetTmplid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ tmploid = GetSysCacheOid(TSTEMPLATENAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(template_name), @@ -1690,8 +1690,8 @@ TSTemplateIsVisible(Oid tmplId) { /* * If it is in the path, it might still not be visible; it could be - * hidden by another template of the same name earlier in the path. - * So we must do a slow check for conflicting templates. + * hidden by another template of the same name earlier in the path. So + * we must do a slow check for conflicting templates. */ char *name = NameStr(form->tmplname); ListCell *l; @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@ TSTemplateIsVisible(Oid tmplId) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ TSConfigGetCfgid(List *names, bool failOK) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ cfgoid = GetSysCacheOid(TSCONFIGNAMENSP, PointerGetDatum(config_name), @@ -1785,7 +1785,7 @@ TSConfigGetCfgid(List *names, bool failOK) /* * TSConfigIsVisible * Determine whether a text search configuration (identified by OID) - * is visible in the current search path. Visible means "would be found + * is visible in the current search path. Visible means "would be found * by searching for the unqualified text search configuration name". */ bool @@ -1831,7 +1831,7 @@ TSConfigIsVisible(Oid cfgid) Oid namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ if (namespaceId == namespace) { @@ -1925,11 +1925,12 @@ LookupExplicitNamespace(const char *nspname) { if (OidIsValid(myTempNamespace)) return myTempNamespace; + /* - * Since this is used only for looking up existing objects, there - * is no point in trying to initialize the temp namespace here; - * and doing so might create problems for some callers. - * Just fall through and give the "does not exist" error. + * Since this is used only for looking up existing objects, there is + * no point in trying to initialize the temp namespace here; and doing + * so might create problems for some callers. Just fall through and + * give the "does not exist" error. */ } @@ -2166,7 +2167,7 @@ bool isTempOrToastNamespace(Oid namespaceId) { if (OidIsValid(myTempNamespace) && - (myTempNamespace == namespaceId || myTempToastNamespace == namespaceId)) + (myTempNamespace == namespaceId || myTempToastNamespace == namespaceId)) return true; return false; } @@ -2208,7 +2209,7 @@ isOtherTempNamespace(Oid namespaceId) /* * GetTempToastNamespace - get the OID of my temporary-toast-table namespace, - * which must already be assigned. (This is only used when creating a toast + * which must already be assigned. (This is only used when creating a toast * table for a temp table, so we must have already done InitTempTableNamespace) */ Oid @@ -2265,7 +2266,7 @@ GetOverrideSearchPath(MemoryContext context) * search_path variable is ignored while an override is active. */ void -PushOverrideSearchPath(OverrideSearchPath *newpath) +PushOverrideSearchPath(OverrideSearchPath * newpath) { OverrideStackEntry *entry; List *oidlist; @@ -2315,7 +2316,7 @@ PushOverrideSearchPath(OverrideSearchPath *newpath) /* And make it active. */ activeSearchPath = entry->searchPath; activeCreationNamespace = entry->creationNamespace; - activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ + activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt); } @@ -2349,7 +2350,7 @@ PopOverrideSearchPath(void) entry = (OverrideStackEntry *) linitial(overrideStack); activeSearchPath = entry->searchPath; activeCreationNamespace = entry->creationNamespace; - activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ + activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ } else { @@ -2392,7 +2393,7 @@ FindConversionByName(List *name) namespaceId = lfirst_oid(l); if (namespaceId == myTempNamespace) - continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ + continue; /* do not look in temp namespace */ conoid = FindConversion(conversion_name, namespaceId); if (OidIsValid(conoid)) @@ -2533,7 +2534,7 @@ recomputeNamespacePath(void) } /* - * Remember the first member of the explicit list. (Note: this is + * Remember the first member of the explicit list. (Note: this is * nominally wrong if temp_missing, but we need it anyway to distinguish * explicit from implicit mention of pg_catalog.) */ @@ -2696,7 +2697,7 @@ AtEOXact_Namespace(bool isCommit) { myTempNamespace = InvalidOid; myTempToastNamespace = InvalidOid; - baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ + baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ } myTempNamespaceSubID = InvalidSubTransactionId; } @@ -2748,7 +2749,7 @@ AtEOSubXact_Namespace(bool isCommit, SubTransactionId mySubid, /* TEMP namespace creation failed, so reset state */ myTempNamespace = InvalidOid; myTempToastNamespace = InvalidOid; - baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ + baseSearchPathValid = false; /* need to rebuild list */ } } @@ -2773,7 +2774,7 @@ AtEOSubXact_Namespace(bool isCommit, SubTransactionId mySubid, entry = (OverrideStackEntry *) linitial(overrideStack); activeSearchPath = entry->searchPath; activeCreationNamespace = entry->creationNamespace; - activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ + activeTempCreationPending = false; /* XXX is this OK? */ } else { @@ -2983,9 +2984,9 @@ fetch_search_path(bool includeImplicit) recomputeNamespacePath(); /* - * If the temp namespace should be first, force it to exist. This is - * so that callers can trust the result to reflect the actual default - * creation namespace. It's a bit bogus to do this here, since + * If the temp namespace should be first, force it to exist. This is so + * that callers can trust the result to reflect the actual default + * creation namespace. It's a bit bogus to do this here, since * current_schema() is supposedly a stable function without side-effects, * but the alternatives seem worse. */ diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c index 3c161ba512..d43823f287 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c,v 1.87 2007/09/03 00:39:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c,v 1.88 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -172,8 +172,8 @@ AggregateCreate(const char *aggName, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), errmsg("cannot determine result data type"), - errdetail("An aggregate returning a polymorphic type " - "must have at least one polymorphic argument."))); + errdetail("An aggregate returning a polymorphic type " + "must have at least one polymorphic argument."))); /* handle sortop, if supplied */ if (aggsortopName) @@ -213,8 +213,8 @@ AggregateCreate(const char *aggName, PointerGetDatum(NULL), /* parameterModes */ PointerGetDatum(NULL), /* parameterNames */ PointerGetDatum(NULL), /* proconfig */ - 1, /* procost */ - 0); /* prorows */ + 1, /* procost */ + 0); /* prorows */ /* * Okay to create the pg_aggregate entry. diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c index ede6607b85..2e10b11e71 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c,v 1.35 2007/02/14 01:58:56 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c,v 1.36 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -286,10 +286,10 @@ CreateConstraintEntry(const char *constraintName, if (foreignNKeys > 0) { /* - * Register normal dependencies on the equality operators that - * support a foreign-key constraint. If the PK and FK types - * are the same then all three operators for a column are the - * same; otherwise they are different. + * Register normal dependencies on the equality operators that support + * a foreign-key constraint. If the PK and FK types are the same then + * all three operators for a column are the same; otherwise they are + * different. */ ObjectAddress oprobject; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c index e9c75ebdb6..22292e00f2 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c,v 1.38 2007/09/24 01:29:28 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_conversion.c,v 1.39 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -275,4 +275,3 @@ FindConversion(const char *conname, Oid connamespace) return conoid; } - diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c index 6a09886435..c82b3aff3f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c,v 1.2 2007/04/02 22:14:17 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -37,32 +37,33 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) TupleDesc tupDesc; NameData enumlabel; Oid *oids; - int i, n; + int i, + n; Datum values[Natts_pg_enum]; char nulls[Natts_pg_enum]; ListCell *lc; - HeapTuple tup; + HeapTuple tup; n = list_length(vals); /* - * XXX we do not bother to check the list of values for duplicates --- - * if you have any, you'll get a less-than-friendly unique-index - * violation. Is it worth trying harder? + * XXX we do not bother to check the list of values for duplicates --- if + * you have any, you'll get a less-than-friendly unique-index violation. + * Is it worth trying harder? */ pg_enum = heap_open(EnumRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); tupDesc = pg_enum->rd_att; /* - * Allocate oids. While this method does not absolutely guarantee - * that we generate no duplicate oids (since we haven't entered each - * oid into the table before allocating the next), trouble could only - * occur if the oid counter wraps all the way around before we finish. - * Which seems unlikely. + * Allocate oids. While this method does not absolutely guarantee that we + * generate no duplicate oids (since we haven't entered each oid into the + * table before allocating the next), trouble could only occur if the oid + * counter wraps all the way around before we finish. Which seems + * unlikely. */ oids = (Oid *) palloc(n * sizeof(Oid)); - for(i = 0; i < n; i++) + for (i = 0; i < n; i++) { oids[i] = GetNewOid(pg_enum); } @@ -76,9 +77,9 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) i = 0; foreach(lc, vals) { - char *lab = strVal(lfirst(lc)); + char *lab = strVal(lfirst(lc)); - /* + /* * labels are stored in a name field, for easier syscache lookup, so * check the length to make sure it's within range. */ @@ -86,9 +87,9 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) if (strlen(lab) > (NAMEDATALEN - 1)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME), - errmsg("invalid enum label \"%s\", must be %d characters or less", - lab, - NAMEDATALEN - 1))); + errmsg("invalid enum label \"%s\", must be %d characters or less", + lab, + NAMEDATALEN - 1))); values[Anum_pg_enum_enumtypid - 1] = ObjectIdGetDatum(enumTypeOid); @@ -148,8 +149,8 @@ EnumValuesDelete(Oid enumTypeOid) static int oid_cmp(const void *p1, const void *p2) { - Oid v1 = *((const Oid *) p1); - Oid v2 = *((const Oid *) p2); + Oid v1 = *((const Oid *) p1); + Oid v2 = *((const Oid *) p2); if (v1 < v2) return -1; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c index 55a0cc0839..99a5959252 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c,v 1.101 2007/11/07 12:24:24 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_operator.c,v 1.102 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * these routines moved here from commands/define.c and somewhat cleaned up. @@ -868,7 +868,7 @@ makeOperatorDependencies(HeapTuple tuple) * operators oprcom and oprnegate. We would not want to delete this * operator if those go away, but only reset the link fields; which is not * a function that the dependency code can presently handle. (Something - * could perhaps be done with objectSubId though.) For now, it's okay to + * could perhaps be done with objectSubId though.) For now, it's okay to * let those links dangle if a referenced operator is removed. */ diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c index 6b5a7d0fd9..9487b66dde 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.146 2007/09/03 00:39:14 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.147 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ ProcedureCreate(const char *procedureName, /* * Do not allow polymorphic return type unless at least one input argument - * is polymorphic. Also, do not allow return type INTERNAL unless at + * is polymorphic. Also, do not allow return type INTERNAL unless at * least one input argument is INTERNAL. */ for (i = 0; i < parameterCount; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c index ef1a83b4e4..5272edfe19 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.20 2007/05/14 20:07:01 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.21 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ checkSharedDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId) /* * We limit the number of dependencies reported to the client to * MAX_REPORTED_DEPS, since client software may not deal well with - * enormous error strings. The server log always gets a full report, + * enormous error strings. The server log always gets a full report, * which is collected in a separate StringInfo if and only if we detect * that the client report is going to be truncated. */ @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ checkSharedDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId) if (numNotReportedDeps > 0 || numNotReportedDbs > 0) { - ObjectAddress obj; + ObjectAddress obj; obj.classId = classId; obj.objectId = objectId; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c index 7419b36338..bcfc14195f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c,v 1.113 2007/05/12 00:54:59 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c,v 1.114 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ TypeShellMake(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(GetUserId()); /* typowner */ values[i++] = Int16GetDatum(sizeof(int4)); /* typlen */ values[i++] = BoolGetDatum(true); /* typbyval */ - values[i++] = CharGetDatum(TYPTYPE_PSEUDO); /* typtype */ + values[i++] = CharGetDatum(TYPTYPE_PSEUDO); /* typtype */ values[i++] = BoolGetDatum(false); /* typisdefined */ values[i++] = CharGetDatum(DEFAULT_TYPDELIM); /* typdelim */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid); /* typrelid */ @@ -255,13 +255,13 @@ TypeCreate(Oid newTypeOid, values[i++] = CharGetDatum(typDelim); /* typdelim */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(relationOid); /* typrelid */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(elementType); /* typelem */ - values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(arrayType); /* typarray */ + values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(arrayType); /* typarray */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(inputProcedure); /* typinput */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(outputProcedure); /* typoutput */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(receiveProcedure); /* typreceive */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(sendProcedure); /* typsend */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typmodinProcedure); /* typmodin */ - values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typmodoutProcedure); /* typmodout */ + values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typmodoutProcedure); /* typmodout */ values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(analyzeProcedure); /* typanalyze */ values[i++] = CharGetDatum(alignment); /* typalign */ values[i++] = CharGetDatum(storage); /* typstorage */ @@ -397,8 +397,8 @@ TypeCreate(Oid newTypeOid, void GenerateTypeDependencies(Oid typeNamespace, Oid typeObjectId, - Oid relationOid, /* only for relation rowtypes */ - char relationKind, /* ditto */ + Oid relationOid, /* only for relation rowtypes */ + char relationKind, /* ditto */ Oid owner, Oid inputProcedure, Oid outputProcedure, @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ GenerateTypeDependencies(Oid typeNamespace, referenced.objectId = elementType; referenced.objectSubId = 0; recordDependencyOn(&myself, &referenced, - isImplicitArray ? DEPENDENCY_INTERNAL : DEPENDENCY_NORMAL); + isImplicitArray ? DEPENDENCY_INTERNAL : DEPENDENCY_NORMAL); } /* Normal dependency from a domain to its base type. */ @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ TypeRename(Oid typeOid, const char *newTypeName, Oid typeNamespace) /* If the type has an array type, recurse to handle that */ if (OidIsValid(arrayOid)) { - char *arrname = makeArrayTypeName(newTypeName, typeNamespace); + char *arrname = makeArrayTypeName(newTypeName, typeNamespace); TypeRename(arrayOid, arrname, typeNamespace); pfree(arrname); @@ -622,12 +622,12 @@ char * makeArrayTypeName(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) { char *arr; - int i; + int i; Relation pg_type_desc; /* - * The idea is to prepend underscores as needed until we make a name - * that doesn't collide with anything... + * The idea is to prepend underscores as needed until we make a name that + * doesn't collide with anything... */ arr = palloc(NAMEDATALEN); @@ -647,10 +647,10 @@ makeArrayTypeName(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) heap_close(pg_type_desc, AccessShareLock); - if (i >= NAMEDATALEN-1) + if (i >= NAMEDATALEN - 1) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), - errmsg("could not form array type name for type \"%s\"", + errmsg("could not form array type name for type \"%s\"", typeName))); return arr; @@ -698,10 +698,10 @@ moveArrayTypeName(Oid typeOid, const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace) return false; /* - * OK, use makeArrayTypeName to pick an unused modification of the - * name. Note that since makeArrayTypeName is an iterative process, - * this will produce a name that it might have produced the first time, - * had the conflicting type we are about to create already existed. + * OK, use makeArrayTypeName to pick an unused modification of the name. + * Note that since makeArrayTypeName is an iterative process, this will + * produce a name that it might have produced the first time, had the + * conflicting type we are about to create already existed. */ newname = makeArrayTypeName(typeName, typeNamespace); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 51944c54c2..20ece6d6eb 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/analyze.c,v 1.110 2007/10/24 20:55:36 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/analyze.c,v 1.111 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ analyze_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, totaldeadrows; HeapTuple *rows; PGRUsage ru0; - TimestampTz starttime = 0; + TimestampTz starttime = 0; if (vacstmt->verbose) elevel = INFO; @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ typedef struct FmgrInfo *cmpFn; int cmpFlags; int *tupnoLink; -} CompareScalarsContext; +} CompareScalarsContext; static void compute_minimal_stats(VacAttrStatsP stats, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/cluster.c b/src/backend/commands/cluster.c index 736e74882d..0789d1a1e5 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/cluster.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/cluster.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.164 2007/09/29 18:05:20 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.165 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ static List *get_tables_to_cluster(MemoryContext cluster_context); * * The single-relation case does not have any such overhead. * - * We also allow a relation to be specified without index. In that case, + * We also allow a relation to be specified without index. In that case, * the indisclustered bit will be looked up, and an ERROR will be thrown * if there is no index with the bit set. *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ cluster(ClusterStmt *stmt, bool isTopLevel) RelationGetRelationName(rel)); /* - * Reject clustering a remote temp table ... their local buffer manager - * is not going to cope. + * Reject clustering a remote temp table ... their local buffer + * manager is not going to cope. */ if (isOtherTempNamespace(RelationGetNamespace(rel))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("cannot cluster temporary tables of other sessions"))); + errmsg("cannot cluster temporary tables of other sessions"))); if (stmt->indexname == NULL) { @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ cluster_rel(RelToCluster *rvtc, bool recheck) * check in the "recheck" case is appropriate (which currently means * somebody is executing a database-wide CLUSTER), because there is * another check in cluster() which will stop any attempt to cluster - * remote temp tables by name. There is another check in + * remote temp tables by name. There is another check in * check_index_is_clusterable which is redundant, but we leave it for * extra safety. */ @@ -733,8 +733,8 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex) /* * compute xids used to freeze and weed out dead tuples. We use -1 - * freeze_min_age to avoid having CLUSTER freeze tuples earlier than - * a plain VACUUM would. + * freeze_min_age to avoid having CLUSTER freeze tuples earlier than a + * plain VACUUM would. */ vacuum_set_xid_limits(-1, OldHeap->rd_rel->relisshared, &OldestXmin, &FreezeXid); @@ -745,8 +745,8 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex) /* * Scan through the OldHeap in OldIndex order and copy each tuple into the * NewHeap. To ensure we see recently-dead tuples that still need to be - * copied, we scan with SnapshotAny and use HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum - * for the visibility test. + * copied, we scan with SnapshotAny and use HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum for + * the visibility test. */ scan = index_beginscan(OldHeap, OldIndex, SnapshotAny, 0, (ScanKey) NULL); @@ -774,31 +774,33 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex) isdead = false; break; case HEAPTUPLE_INSERT_IN_PROGRESS: + /* - * We should not see this unless it's been inserted earlier - * in our own transaction. + * We should not see this unless it's been inserted earlier in + * our own transaction. */ if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data))) elog(ERROR, "concurrent insert in progress"); /* treat as live */ isdead = false; break; case HEAPTUPLE_DELETE_IN_PROGRESS: + /* - * We should not see this unless it's been deleted earlier - * in our own transaction. + * We should not see this unless it's been deleted earlier in + * our own transaction. */ Assert(!(tuple->t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI)); if (!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId( - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple->t_data))) + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple->t_data))) elog(ERROR, "concurrent delete in progress"); /* treat as recently dead */ isdead = false; break; default: elog(ERROR, "unexpected HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum result"); - isdead = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ + isdead = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/comment.c b/src/backend/commands/comment.c index c175523c36..38c9b7c9a5 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/comment.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/comment.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/comment.c,v 1.98 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/comment.c,v 1.99 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ CommentTSParser(List *qualname, char *comment) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search parser"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search parser"))); CreateComments(prsId, TSParserRelationId, 0, comment); } @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ CommentTSTemplate(List *qualname, char *comment) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search template"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to comment on text search template"))); CreateComments(tmplId, TSTemplateRelationId, 0, comment); } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/copy.c b/src/backend/commands/copy.c index fdfe5ea965..ef7e04ca28 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/copy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/copy.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/copy.c,v 1.287 2007/09/12 20:49:27 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/copy.c,v 1.288 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ DoCopy(const CopyStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) errmsg("COPY (SELECT) WITH OIDS is not supported"))); /* - * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient + * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient * locks on the source table(s). * * Because the parser and planner tend to scribble on their input, we @@ -1638,8 +1638,8 @@ CopyFrom(CopyState cstate) MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext; ErrorContextCallback errcontext; CommandId mycid = GetCurrentCommandId(); - bool use_wal = true; /* by default, use WAL logging */ - bool use_fsm = true; /* by default, use FSM for free space */ + bool use_wal = true; /* by default, use WAL logging */ + bool use_fsm = true; /* by default, use FSM for free space */ Assert(cstate->rel); @@ -2148,7 +2148,7 @@ CopyFrom(CopyState cstate) cstate->filename))); } - /* + /* * If we skipped writing WAL, then we need to sync the heap (but not * indexes since those use WAL anyway) */ @@ -2685,7 +2685,7 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) char *start_ptr; char *end_ptr; int input_len; - bool saw_high_bit = false; + bool saw_high_bit = false; /* Make sure space remains in fieldvals[] */ if (fieldno >= maxfields) @@ -2776,7 +2776,7 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) } c = val & 0xff; if (IS_HIGHBIT_SET(c)) - saw_high_bit = true; + saw_high_bit = true; } } break; @@ -2804,7 +2804,7 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) * literally */ } - } + } /* Add c to output string */ *output_ptr++ = c; @@ -2813,13 +2813,15 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate, int maxfields, char **fieldvals) /* Terminate attribute value in output area */ *output_ptr++ = '\0'; - /* If we de-escaped a char with the high bit set, make sure - * we still have valid data for the db encoding. Avoid calling strlen - * here for the sake of efficiency. + /* + * If we de-escaped a char with the high bit set, make sure we still + * have valid data for the db encoding. Avoid calling strlen here for + * the sake of efficiency. */ if (saw_high_bit) { - char *fld = fieldvals[fieldno]; + char *fld = fieldvals[fieldno]; + pg_verifymbstr(fld, output_ptr - (fld + 1), false); } @@ -3077,15 +3079,15 @@ CopyAttributeOutText(CopyState cstate, char *string) * We have to grovel through the string searching for control characters * and instances of the delimiter character. In most cases, though, these * are infrequent. To avoid overhead from calling CopySendData once per - * character, we dump out all characters between escaped characters in - * a single call. The loop invariant is that the data from "start" to - * "ptr" can be sent literally, but hasn't yet been. + * character, we dump out all characters between escaped characters in a + * single call. The loop invariant is that the data from "start" to "ptr" + * can be sent literally, but hasn't yet been. * * We can skip pg_encoding_mblen() overhead when encoding is safe, because * in valid backend encodings, extra bytes of a multibyte character never * look like ASCII. This loop is sufficiently performance-critical that - * it's worth making two copies of it to get the IS_HIGHBIT_SET() test - * out of the normal safe-encoding path. + * it's worth making two copies of it to get the IS_HIGHBIT_SET() test out + * of the normal safe-encoding path. */ if (cstate->encoding_embeds_ascii) { @@ -3096,13 +3098,16 @@ CopyAttributeOutText(CopyState cstate, char *string) { DUMPSOFAR(); CopySendChar(cstate, '\\'); - start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ + start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ } else if ((unsigned char) c < (unsigned char) 0x20) { switch (c) { - /* \r and \n must be escaped, the others are traditional */ + /* + * \r and \n must be escaped, the others are + * traditional + */ case '\b': case '\f': case '\n': @@ -3134,13 +3139,16 @@ CopyAttributeOutText(CopyState cstate, char *string) { DUMPSOFAR(); CopySendChar(cstate, '\\'); - start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ + start = ptr++; /* we include char in next run */ } else if ((unsigned char) c < (unsigned char) 0x20) { switch (c) { - /* \r and \n must be escaped, the others are traditional */ + /* + * \r and \n must be escaped, the others are + * traditional + */ case '\b': case '\f': case '\n': diff --git a/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c b/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c index 3090ae0af4..2d455ed31f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.202 2007/10/16 11:30:16 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.203 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -260,17 +260,17 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) * Check whether encoding matches server locale settings. We allow * mismatch in three cases: * - * 1. ctype_encoding = SQL_ASCII, which means either that the locale - * is C/POSIX which works with any encoding, or that we couldn't determine + * 1. ctype_encoding = SQL_ASCII, which means either that the locale is + * C/POSIX which works with any encoding, or that we couldn't determine * the locale's encoding and have to trust the user to get it right. * - * 2. selected encoding is SQL_ASCII, but only if you're a superuser. - * This is risky but we have historically allowed it --- notably, the + * 2. selected encoding is SQL_ASCII, but only if you're a superuser. This + * is risky but we have historically allowed it --- notably, the * regression tests require it. * * 3. selected encoding is UTF8 and platform is win32. This is because - * UTF8 is a pseudo codepage that is supported in all locales since - * it's converted to UTF16 before being used. + * UTF8 is a pseudo codepage that is supported in all locales since it's + * converted to UTF16 before being used. * * Note: if you change this policy, fix initdb to match. */ @@ -286,8 +286,8 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) (errmsg("encoding %s does not match server's locale %s", pg_encoding_to_char(encoding), setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL)), - errdetail("The server's LC_CTYPE setting requires encoding %s.", - pg_encoding_to_char(ctype_encoding)))); + errdetail("The server's LC_CTYPE setting requires encoding %s.", + pg_encoding_to_char(ctype_encoding)))); /* Resolve default tablespace for new database */ if (dtablespacename && dtablespacename->arg) @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) if (dst_deftablespace == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("pg_global cannot be used as default tablespace"))); + errmsg("pg_global cannot be used as default tablespace"))); /* * If we are trying to change the default tablespace of the template, @@ -375,12 +375,12 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) if (CheckOtherDBBackends(src_dboid)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_IN_USE), - errmsg("source database \"%s\" is being accessed by other users", - dbtemplate))); + errmsg("source database \"%s\" is being accessed by other users", + dbtemplate))); /* - * Select an OID for the new database, checking that it doesn't have - * a filename conflict with anything already existing in the tablespace + * Select an OID for the new database, checking that it doesn't have a + * filename conflict with anything already existing in the tablespace * directories. */ pg_database_rel = heap_open(DatabaseRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -558,9 +558,9 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) /* * Set flag to update flat database file at commit. Note: this also * forces synchronous commit, which minimizes the window between - * creation of the database files and commital of the transaction. - * If we crash before committing, we'll have a DB that's taking up - * disk space but is not in pg_database, which is not good. + * creation of the database files and commital of the transaction. If + * we crash before committing, we'll have a DB that's taking up disk + * space but is not in pg_database, which is not good. */ database_file_update_needed(); } @@ -721,10 +721,10 @@ dropdb(const char *dbname, bool missing_ok) /* * Set flag to update flat database file at commit. Note: this also - * forces synchronous commit, which minimizes the window between - * removal of the database files and commital of the transaction. - * If we crash before committing, we'll have a DB that's gone on disk - * but still there according to pg_database, which is not good. + * forces synchronous commit, which minimizes the window between removal + * of the database files and commital of the transaction. If we crash + * before committing, we'll have a DB that's gone on disk but still there + * according to pg_database, which is not good. */ database_file_update_needed(); } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/discard.c b/src/backend/commands/discard.c index d2ae6defd0..7af6ce0122 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/discard.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/discard.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/discard.c,v 1.1 2007/04/26 16:13:10 neilc Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/discard.c,v 1.2 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ static void DiscardAll(bool isTopLevel); * DISCARD { ALL | TEMP | PLANS } */ void -DiscardCommand(DiscardStmt *stmt, bool isTopLevel) +DiscardCommand(DiscardStmt * stmt, bool isTopLevel) { switch (stmt->target) { @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ DiscardAll(bool isTopLevel) { /* * Disallow DISCARD ALL in a transaction block. This is arguably - * inconsistent (we don't make a similar check in the command - * sequence that DISCARD ALL is equivalent to), but the idea is - * to catch mistakes: DISCARD ALL inside a transaction block - * would leave the transaction still uncommitted. + * inconsistent (we don't make a similar check in the command sequence + * that DISCARD ALL is equivalent to), but the idea is to catch mistakes: + * DISCARD ALL inside a transaction block would leave the transaction + * still uncommitted. */ PreventTransactionChain(isTopLevel, "DISCARD ALL"); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/explain.c b/src/backend/commands/explain.c index c9d454bc49..c385d952d2 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/explain.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/explain.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/explain.c,v 1.165 2007/08/15 21:39:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/explain.c,v 1.166 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ /* Hook for plugins to get control in ExplainOneQuery() */ ExplainOneQuery_hook_type ExplainOneQuery_hook = NULL; + /* Hook for plugins to get control in explain_get_index_name() */ explain_get_index_name_hook_type explain_get_index_name_hook = NULL; @@ -50,10 +51,10 @@ typedef struct ExplainState } ExplainState; static void ExplainOneQuery(Query *query, ExplainStmt *stmt, - const char *queryString, - ParamListInfo params, TupOutputState *tstate); + const char *queryString, + ParamListInfo params, TupOutputState *tstate); static void report_triggers(ResultRelInfo *rInfo, bool show_relname, - StringInfo buf); + StringInfo buf); static double elapsed_time(instr_time *starttime); static void explain_outNode(StringInfo str, Plan *plan, PlanState *planstate, @@ -90,14 +91,14 @@ ExplainQuery(ExplainStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, getParamListTypes(params, ¶m_types, &num_params); /* - * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient + * Run parse analysis and rewrite. Note this also acquires sufficient * locks on the source table(s). * - * Because the parser and planner tend to scribble on their input, we - * make a preliminary copy of the source querytree. This prevents - * problems in the case that the EXPLAIN is in a portal or plpgsql - * function and is executed repeatedly. (See also the same hack in - * DECLARE CURSOR and PREPARE.) XXX FIXME someday. + * Because the parser and planner tend to scribble on their input, we make + * a preliminary copy of the source querytree. This prevents problems in + * the case that the EXPLAIN is in a portal or plpgsql function and is + * executed repeatedly. (See also the same hack in DECLARE CURSOR and + * PREPARE.) XXX FIXME someday. */ rewritten = pg_analyze_and_rewrite((Node *) copyObject(stmt->query), queryString, param_types, num_params); @@ -215,7 +216,7 @@ ExplainOneUtility(Node *utilityStmt, ExplainStmt *stmt, * to call it. */ void -ExplainOnePlan(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt, ParamListInfo params, +ExplainOnePlan(PlannedStmt * plannedstmt, ParamListInfo params, ExplainStmt *stmt, TupOutputState *tstate) { QueryDesc *queryDesc; @@ -376,8 +377,8 @@ report_triggers(ResultRelInfo *rInfo, bool show_relname, StringInfo buf) InstrEndLoop(instr); /* - * We ignore triggers that were never invoked; they likely - * aren't relevant to the current query type. + * We ignore triggers that were never invoked; they likely aren't + * relevant to the current query type. */ if (instr->ntuples == 0) continue; @@ -624,7 +625,7 @@ explain_outNode(StringInfo str, if (ScanDirectionIsBackward(((IndexScan *) plan)->indexorderdir)) appendStringInfoString(str, " Backward"); appendStringInfo(str, " using %s", - explain_get_index_name(((IndexScan *) plan)->indexid)); + explain_get_index_name(((IndexScan *) plan)->indexid)); /* FALL THRU */ case T_SeqScan: case T_BitmapHeapScan: @@ -1137,7 +1138,7 @@ show_sort_keys(Plan *sortplan, int nkeys, AttrNumber *keycols, /* Set up deparsing context */ context = deparse_context_for_plan((Node *) outerPlan(sortplan), - NULL, /* Sort has no innerPlan */ + NULL, /* Sort has no innerPlan */ es->rtable); useprefix = list_length(es->rtable) > 1; @@ -1192,7 +1193,7 @@ show_sort_info(SortState *sortstate, static const char * explain_get_index_name(Oid indexId) { - const char *result; + const char *result; if (explain_get_index_name_hook) result = (*explain_get_index_name_hook) (indexId); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c b/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c index 3a55661502..892bd7c9f3 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c,v 1.86 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c,v 1.87 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * These routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ static void AlterFunctionOwner_internal(Relation rel, HeapTuple tup, - Oid newOwnerId); + Oid newOwnerId); /* @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ compute_return_type(TypeName *returnType, Oid languageOid, if (returnType->typmods != NIL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("type modifier cannot be specified for shell type \"%s\"", - typnam))); + errmsg("type modifier cannot be specified for shell type \"%s\"", + typnam))); /* Otherwise, go ahead and make a shell type */ ereport(NOTICE, @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ examine_parameter_list(List *parameters, Oid languageOid, * FUNCTION and ALTER FUNCTION and return it via one of the out * parameters. Returns true if the passed option was recognized. If * the out parameter we were going to assign to points to non-NULL, - * raise a duplicate-clause error. (We don't try to detect duplicate + * raise a duplicate-clause error. (We don't try to detect duplicate * SET parameters though --- if you're redundant, the last one wins.) */ static bool @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ update_proconfig_value(ArrayType *a, List *set_items) if (valuestr) a = GUCArrayAdd(a, sstmt->name, valuestr); - else /* RESET */ + else /* RESET */ a = GUCArrayDelete(a, sstmt->name); } } @@ -1598,9 +1598,9 @@ DropCast(DropCastStmt *stmt) TypeNameToString(stmt->targettype)))); else ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg("cast from type %s to type %s does not exist, skipping", - TypeNameToString(stmt->sourcetype), - TypeNameToString(stmt->targettype)))); + (errmsg("cast from type %s to type %s does not exist, skipping", + TypeNameToString(stmt->sourcetype), + TypeNameToString(stmt->targettype)))); return; } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c index 943978e589..dc53546a05 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.166 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.167 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -396,10 +396,9 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, } /* - * Parse AM-specific options, convert to text array form, - * validate. The src_options introduced due to using indexes - * via the "CREATE LIKE INCLUDING INDEXES" statement also need to - * be merged here + * Parse AM-specific options, convert to text array form, validate. The + * src_options introduced due to using indexes via the "CREATE LIKE + * INCLUDING INDEXES" statement also need to be merged here */ if (src_options) reloptions = unflatten_reloptions(src_options); @@ -452,7 +451,7 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, { indexRelationId = index_create(relationId, indexRelationName, indexRelationId, - indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId, + indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId, coloptions, reloptions, primary, isconstraint, allowSystemTableMods, skip_build, concurrent); @@ -461,18 +460,18 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, /* * For a concurrent build, we next insert the catalog entry and add - * constraints. We don't build the index just yet; we must first make - * the catalog entry so that the new index is visible to updating + * constraints. We don't build the index just yet; we must first make the + * catalog entry so that the new index is visible to updating * transactions. That will prevent them from making incompatible HOT * updates. The new index will be marked not indisready and not * indisvalid, so that no one else tries to either insert into it or use - * it for queries. We pass skip_build = true to prevent the build. + * it for queries. We pass skip_build = true to prevent the build. */ indexRelationId = index_create(relationId, indexRelationName, indexRelationId, indexInfo, accessMethodId, tablespaceId, classObjectId, coloptions, reloptions, primary, isconstraint, - allowSystemTableMods, true, concurrent); + allowSystemTableMods, true, concurrent); /* * We must commit our current transaction so that the index becomes @@ -506,15 +505,15 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * xacts that open the table for writing after this point; they will see * the new index when they open it. * - * Note: the reason we use actual lock acquisition here, rather than - * just checking the ProcArray and sleeping, is that deadlock is possible - * if one of the transactions in question is blocked trying to acquire - * an exclusive lock on our table. The lock code will detect deadlock - * and error out properly. + * Note: the reason we use actual lock acquisition here, rather than just + * checking the ProcArray and sleeping, is that deadlock is possible if + * one of the transactions in question is blocked trying to acquire an + * exclusive lock on our table. The lock code will detect deadlock and + * error out properly. * * Note: GetLockConflicts() never reports our own xid, hence we need not - * check for that. Also, prepared xacts are not reported, which is - * fine since they certainly aren't going to do anything more. + * check for that. Also, prepared xacts are not reported, which is fine + * since they certainly aren't going to do anything more. */ old_lockholders = GetLockConflicts(&heaplocktag, ShareLock); @@ -530,15 +529,15 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * indexes. We have waited out all the existing transactions and any new * transaction will have the new index in its list, but the index is still * marked as "not-ready-for-inserts". The index is consulted while - * deciding HOT-safety though. This arrangement ensures that no new HOT + * deciding HOT-safety though. This arrangement ensures that no new HOT * chains can be created where the new tuple and the old tuple in the * chain have different index keys. * * We now take a new snapshot, and build the index using all tuples that - * are visible in this snapshot. We can be sure that any HOT updates - * to these tuples will be compatible with the index, since any updates - * made by transactions that didn't know about the index are now committed - * or rolled back. Thus, each visible tuple is either the end of its + * are visible in this snapshot. We can be sure that any HOT updates to + * these tuples will be compatible with the index, since any updates made + * by transactions that didn't know about the index are now committed or + * rolled back. Thus, each visible tuple is either the end of its * HOT-chain or the extension of the chain is HOT-safe for this index. */ @@ -565,10 +564,9 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, index_close(indexRelation, NoLock); /* - * Update the pg_index row to mark the index as ready for inserts. - * Once we commit this transaction, any new transactions that - * open the table must insert new entries into the index for insertions - * and non-HOT updates. + * Update the pg_index row to mark the index as ready for inserts. Once we + * commit this transaction, any new transactions that open the table must + * insert new entries into the index for insertions and non-HOT updates. */ pg_index = heap_open(IndexRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -611,8 +609,8 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, /* * Now take the "reference snapshot" that will be used by validate_index() - * to filter candidate tuples. Beware! There might still be snapshots - * in use that treat some transaction as in-progress that our reference + * to filter candidate tuples. Beware! There might still be snapshots in + * use that treat some transaction as in-progress that our reference * snapshot treats as committed. If such a recently-committed transaction * deleted tuples in the table, we will not include them in the index; yet * those transactions which see the deleting one as still-in-progress will @@ -636,15 +634,15 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * The index is now valid in the sense that it contains all currently * interesting tuples. But since it might not contain tuples deleted just * before the reference snap was taken, we have to wait out any - * transactions that might have older snapshots. Obtain a list of - * VXIDs of such transactions, and wait for them individually. + * transactions that might have older snapshots. Obtain a list of VXIDs + * of such transactions, and wait for them individually. * * We can exclude any running transactions that have xmin >= the xmax of * our reference snapshot, since they are clearly not interested in any * missing older tuples. Transactions in other DBs aren't a problem - * either, since they'll never even be able to see this index. - * Also, GetCurrentVirtualXIDs never reports our own vxid, so we - * need not check for that. + * either, since they'll never even be able to see this index. Also, + * GetCurrentVirtualXIDs never reports our own vxid, so we need not check + * for that. */ old_snapshots = GetCurrentVirtualXIDs(ActiveSnapshot->xmax, false); @@ -681,8 +679,8 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, * relcache entries for the index itself, but we should also send a * relcache inval on the parent table to force replanning of cached plans. * Otherwise existing sessions might fail to use the new index where it - * would be useful. (Note that our earlier commits did not create - * reasons to replan; relcache flush on the index itself was sufficient.) + * would be useful. (Note that our earlier commits did not create reasons + * to replan; relcache flush on the index itself was sufficient.) */ CacheInvalidateRelcacheByRelid(heaprelid.relId); @@ -837,9 +835,9 @@ ComputeIndexAttrs(IndexInfo *indexInfo, accessMethodId); /* - * Set up the per-column options (indoption field). For now, this - * is zero for any un-ordered index, while ordered indexes have DESC - * and NULLS FIRST/LAST options. + * Set up the per-column options (indoption field). For now, this is + * zero for any un-ordered index, while ordered indexes have DESC and + * NULLS FIRST/LAST options. */ colOptionP[attn] = 0; if (amcanorder) diff --git a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c index cc15e2b2cd..05b94d6283 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c,v 1.55 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c,v 1.56 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -52,33 +52,33 @@ typedef struct Oid lefttype; /* lefttype */ Oid righttype; /* righttype */ bool recheck; /* oper recheck flag (unused for proc) */ -} OpFamilyMember; +} OpFamilyMember; static void AlterOpFamilyAdd(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, int maxOpNumber, int maxProcNumber, List *items); static void AlterOpFamilyDrop(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, - int maxOpNumber, int maxProcNumber, - List *items); + int maxOpNumber, int maxProcNumber, + List *items); static void processTypesSpec(List *args, Oid *lefttype, Oid *righttype); -static void assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); -static void assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); -static void addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember *member, bool isProc); +static void assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); +static void assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid); +static void addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember * member, bool isProc); static void storeOperators(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, - Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, - List *operators, bool isAdd); + Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, + List *operators, bool isAdd); static void storeProcedures(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, - Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, - List *procedures, bool isAdd); + Oid opfamilyoid, Oid opclassoid, + List *procedures, bool isAdd); static void dropOperators(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, - List *operators); + List *operators); static void dropProcedures(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, - List *procedures); + List *procedures); static void AlterOpClassOwner_internal(Relation rel, HeapTuple tuple, Oid newOwnerId); static void AlterOpFamilyOwner_internal(Relation rel, HeapTuple tuple, - Oid newOwnerId); + Oid newOwnerId); /* @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ OpFamilyCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname) else { /* Unqualified opfamily name, so search the search path */ - Oid opfID = OpfamilynameGetOpfid(amID, opfname); + Oid opfID = OpfamilynameGetOpfid(amID, opfname); if (!OidIsValid(opfID)) return NULL; @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ OpClassCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opclassname) else { /* Unqualified opclass name, so search the search path */ - Oid opcID = OpclassnameGetOpcid(amID, opcname); + Oid opcID = OpclassnameGetOpcid(amID, opcname); if (!OidIsValid(opcID)) return NULL; @@ -348,8 +348,9 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); opfamilyoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); + /* * XXX given the superuser check above, there's no need for an * ownership check here @@ -367,6 +368,7 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) if (HeapTupleIsValid(tup)) { opfamilyoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); + /* * XXX given the superuser check above, there's no need for an * ownership check here @@ -597,7 +599,7 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) opclassoid, procedures, false); /* - * Create dependencies for the opclass proper. Note: we do not create a + * Create dependencies for the opclass proper. Note: we do not create a * dependency link to the AM, because we don't currently support DROP * ACCESS METHOD. */ @@ -644,7 +646,7 @@ DefineOpClass(CreateOpClassStmt *stmt) * Define a new index operator family. */ void -DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt *stmt) +DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt * stmt) { char *opfname; /* name of opfamily we're creating */ Oid amoid, /* our AM's oid */ @@ -686,8 +688,8 @@ DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt *stmt) ReleaseSysCache(tup); /* - * Currently, we require superuser privileges to create an opfamily. - * See comments in DefineOpClass. + * Currently, we require superuser privileges to create an opfamily. See + * comments in DefineOpClass. * * XXX re-enable NOT_USED code sections below if you remove this test. */ @@ -763,7 +765,7 @@ DefineOpFamily(CreateOpFamilyStmt *stmt) * different code paths. */ void -AlterOpFamily(AlterOpFamilyStmt *stmt) +AlterOpFamily(AlterOpFamilyStmt * stmt) { Oid amoid, /* our AM's oid */ opfamilyoid; /* oid of opfamily */ @@ -876,7 +878,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyAdd(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), errmsg("operator argument types must be specified in ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY"))); - operOid = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ + operOid = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ } #ifdef NOT_USED @@ -932,7 +934,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyAdd(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, Oid opfamilyoid, case OPCLASS_ITEM_STORAGETYPE: ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("STORAGE cannot be specified in ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY"))); + errmsg("STORAGE cannot be specified in ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY"))); break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized item type: %d", item->itemtype); @@ -1057,7 +1059,7 @@ processTypesSpec(List *args, Oid *lefttype, Oid *righttype) * and do any validity checking we can manage. */ static void -assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) +assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) { Operator optup; Form_pg_operator opform; @@ -1098,7 +1100,7 @@ assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) * and do any validity checking we can manage. */ static void -assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) +assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember * member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) { HeapTuple proctup; Form_pg_proc procform; @@ -1156,10 +1158,10 @@ assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) else { /* - * The default for GiST and GIN in CREATE OPERATOR CLASS is to use - * the class' opcintype as lefttype and righttype. In CREATE or - * ALTER OPERATOR FAMILY, opcintype isn't available, so make the - * user specify the types. + * The default for GiST and GIN in CREATE OPERATOR CLASS is to use the + * class' opcintype as lefttype and righttype. In CREATE or ALTER + * OPERATOR FAMILY, opcintype isn't available, so make the user + * specify the types. */ if (!OidIsValid(member->lefttype)) member->lefttype = typeoid; @@ -1179,7 +1181,7 @@ assignProcTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) * duplicated strategy or proc number. */ static void -addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember *member, bool isProc) +addFamilyMember(List **list, OpFamilyMember * member, bool isProc) { ListCell *l; @@ -1560,7 +1562,7 @@ RemoveOpClass(RemoveOpClassStmt *stmt) * Deletes an opfamily. */ void -RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *stmt) +RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt * stmt) { Oid amID, opfID; @@ -1589,11 +1591,11 @@ RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *stmt) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); else ereport(NOTICE, (errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); return; } @@ -2120,7 +2122,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyOwner(List *name, const char *access_method, Oid newOwnerId) } /* - * The first parameter is pg_opfamily, opened and suitably locked. The second + * The first parameter is pg_opfamily, opened and suitably locked. The second * parameter is a copy of the tuple from pg_opfamily we want to modify. */ static void diff --git a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c index 8de6b4bebf..1ae9d5186b 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c,v 1.37 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c,v 1.38 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ DefineOperator(List *names, List *parameters) Oid oprNamespace; AclResult aclresult; bool canMerge = false; /* operator merges */ - bool canHash = false; /* operator hashes */ + bool canHash = false; /* operator hashes */ List *functionName = NIL; /* function for operator */ TypeName *typeName1 = NULL; /* first type name */ TypeName *typeName2 = NULL; /* second type name */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c index e8f21d4f08..ba9e9a2320 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c,v 1.66 2007/10/24 23:27:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c,v 1.67 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ * utilityStmt field is set. */ void -PerformCursorOpen(PlannedStmt *stmt, ParamListInfo params, +PerformCursorOpen(PlannedStmt * stmt, ParamListInfo params, const char *queryString, bool isTopLevel) { DeclareCursorStmt *cstmt = (DeclareCursorStmt *) stmt->utilityStmt; @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ PerformCursorOpen(PlannedStmt *stmt, ParamListInfo params, * * If the user didn't specify a SCROLL type, allow or disallow scrolling * based on whether it would require any additional runtime overhead to do - * so. Also, we disallow scrolling for FOR UPDATE cursors. + * so. Also, we disallow scrolling for FOR UPDATE cursors. */ portal->cursorOptions = cstmt->options; if (!(portal->cursorOptions & (CURSOR_OPT_SCROLL | CURSOR_OPT_NO_SCROLL))) @@ -369,8 +369,8 @@ PersistHoldablePortal(Portal portal) * to be at, but the tuplestore API doesn't support that. So we start * at the beginning of the tuplestore and iterate through it until we * reach where we need to be. FIXME someday? (Fortunately, the - * typical case is that we're supposed to be at or near the start - * of the result set, so this isn't as bad as it sounds.) + * typical case is that we're supposed to be at or near the start of + * the result set, so this isn't as bad as it sounds.) */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(portal->holdContext); @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ PersistHoldablePortal(Portal portal) { /* we can handle this case even if posOverflow */ while (tuplestore_advance(portal->holdStore, true)) - /* continue */ ; + /* continue */ ; } else { diff --git a/src/backend/commands/prepare.c b/src/backend/commands/prepare.c index 0a7f565316..4e86b7eebf 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/prepare.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/prepare.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 2002-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/prepare.c,v 1.78 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/prepare.c,v 1.79 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ static HTAB *prepared_queries = NULL; static void InitQueryHashTable(void); static ParamListInfo EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, - const char *queryString, EState *estate); + const char *queryString, EState *estate); static Datum build_regtype_array(Oid *param_types, int num_params); /* @@ -101,8 +101,8 @@ PrepareQuery(PrepareStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) * passed in from above us will not be visible to it), allowing * information about unknown parameters to be deduced from context. * - * Because parse analysis scribbles on the raw querytree, we must make - * a copy to ensure we have a pristine raw tree to cache. FIXME someday. + * Because parse analysis scribbles on the raw querytree, we must make a + * copy to ensure we have a pristine raw tree to cache. FIXME someday. */ query = parse_analyze_varparams((Node *) copyObject(stmt->query), queryString, @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ PrepareQuery(PrepareStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) CreateCommandTag((Node *) query), argtypes, nargs, - 0, /* default cursor options */ + 0, /* default cursor options */ plan_list, true); } @@ -299,8 +299,8 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, if (nparams != num_params) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("wrong number of parameters for prepared statement \"%s\"", - pstmt->stmt_name), + errmsg("wrong number of parameters for prepared statement \"%s\"", + pstmt->stmt_name), errdetail("Expected %d parameters but got %d.", num_params, nparams))); @@ -309,8 +309,8 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, return NULL; /* - * We have to run parse analysis for the expressions. Since the - * parser is not cool about scribbling on its input, copy first. + * We have to run parse analysis for the expressions. Since the parser is + * not cool about scribbling on its input, copy first. */ params = (List *) copyObject(params); @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, if (pstate->p_hasAggs) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR), - errmsg("cannot use aggregate function in EXECUTE parameter"))); + errmsg("cannot use aggregate function in EXECUTE parameter"))); given_type_id = exprType(expr); @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, i + 1, format_type_be(given_type_id), format_type_be(expected_type_id)), - errhint("You will need to rewrite or cast the expression."))); + errhint("You will need to rewrite or cast the expression."))); lfirst(l) = expr; i++; @@ -734,8 +734,8 @@ pg_prepared_statement(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(per_query_ctx); /* - * build tupdesc for result tuples. This must match the definition of - * the pg_prepared_statements view in system_views.sql + * build tupdesc for result tuples. This must match the definition of the + * pg_prepared_statements view in system_views.sql */ tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(5, false); TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "name", @@ -780,11 +780,11 @@ pg_prepared_statement(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) nulls[1] = true; else values[1] = DirectFunctionCall1(textin, - CStringGetDatum(prep_stmt->plansource->query_string)); + CStringGetDatum(prep_stmt->plansource->query_string)); values[2] = TimestampTzGetDatum(prep_stmt->prepare_time); values[3] = build_regtype_array(prep_stmt->plansource->param_types, - prep_stmt->plansource->num_params); + prep_stmt->plansource->num_params); values[4] = BoolGetDatum(prep_stmt->from_sql); tuple = heap_form_tuple(tupdesc, values, nulls); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c b/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c index b103667935..80e5d3d7dc 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.46 2007/06/23 22:12:50 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.47 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -111,17 +111,17 @@ CreateSchemaCommand(CreateSchemaStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) /* * Examine the list of commands embedded in the CREATE SCHEMA command, and * reorganize them into a sequentially executable order with no forward - * references. Note that the result is still a list of raw parsetrees - * --- we cannot, in general, run parse analysis on one statement until - * we have actually executed the prior ones. + * references. Note that the result is still a list of raw parsetrees --- + * we cannot, in general, run parse analysis on one statement until we + * have actually executed the prior ones. */ parsetree_list = transformCreateSchemaStmt(stmt); /* - * Execute each command contained in the CREATE SCHEMA. Since the - * grammar allows only utility commands in CREATE SCHEMA, there is - * no need to pass them through parse_analyze() or the rewriter; - * we can just hand them straight to ProcessUtility. + * Execute each command contained in the CREATE SCHEMA. Since the grammar + * allows only utility commands in CREATE SCHEMA, there is no need to pass + * them through parse_analyze() or the rewriter; we can just hand them + * straight to ProcessUtility. */ foreach(parsetree_item, parsetree_list) { @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ CreateSchemaCommand(CreateSchemaStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) ProcessUtility(stmt, queryString, NULL, - false, /* not top level */ + false, /* not top level */ None_Receiver, NULL); /* make sure later steps can see the object created here */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/sequence.c b/src/backend/commands/sequence.c index 619e289206..54799447c4 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/sequence.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/sequence.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/sequence.c,v 1.147 2007/10/25 18:54:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/sequence.c,v 1.148 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1145,8 +1145,8 @@ init_params(List *options, bool isInit, snprintf(bufm, sizeof(bufm), INT64_FORMAT, new->max_value); ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("START value (%s) cannot be greater than MAXVALUE (%s)", - bufs, bufm))); + errmsg("START value (%s) cannot be greater than MAXVALUE (%s)", + bufs, bufm))); } /* CACHE */ @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ process_owned_by(Relation seqrel, List *owned_by) if (seqrel->rd_rel->relowner != tablerel->rd_rel->relowner) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("sequence must have same owner as table it is linked to"))); + errmsg("sequence must have same owner as table it is linked to"))); if (RelationGetNamespace(seqrel) != RelationGetNamespace(tablerel)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c index 23f3619369..285bc23496 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.235 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.236 2007/11/15 21:14:33 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ static List *MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, static void MergeConstraintsIntoExisting(Relation child_rel, Relation parent_rel); static void MergeAttributesIntoExisting(Relation child_rel, Relation parent_rel); static void add_nonduplicate_constraint(Constraint *cdef, - ConstrCheck *check, int *ncheck); + ConstrCheck *check, int *ncheck); static bool change_varattnos_walker(Node *node, const AttrNumber *newattno); static void StoreCatalogInheritance(Oid relationId, List *supers); static void StoreCatalogInheritance1(Oid relationId, Oid parentOid, @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ static void ATExecSetRelOptions(Relation rel, List *defList, bool isReset); static void ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(Relation rel, char *trigname, char fires_when, bool skip_system); static void ATExecEnableDisableRule(Relation rel, char *rulename, - char fires_when); + char fires_when); static void ATExecAddInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent); static void ATExecDropInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent); static void copy_relation_data(Relation rel, SMgrRelation dst); @@ -395,6 +395,7 @@ DefineRelation(CreateStmt *stmt, char relkind) if (cdef->contype == CONSTR_CHECK) add_nonduplicate_constraint(cdef, check, &ncheck); } + /* * parse_utilcmd.c might have passed some precooked constraints too, * due to LIKE tab INCLUDING CONSTRAINTS @@ -841,8 +842,8 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, if (list_member_oid(parentOids, RelationGetRelid(relation))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE), - errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", - parent->relname))); + errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", + parent->relname))); parentOids = lappend_oid(parentOids, RelationGetRelid(relation)); @@ -888,8 +889,8 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, exist_attno = findAttrByName(attributeName, inhSchema); if (exist_attno > 0) { - Oid defTypeId; - int32 deftypmod; + Oid defTypeId; + int32 deftypmod; /* * Yes, try to merge the two column definitions. They must @@ -1032,8 +1033,10 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, bool istemp, if (exist_attno > 0) { ColumnDef *def; - Oid defTypeId, newTypeId; - int32 deftypmod, newtypmod; + Oid defTypeId, + newTypeId; + int32 deftypmod, + newtypmod; /* * Yes, try to merge the two column definitions. They must @@ -1632,8 +1635,8 @@ renamerel(Oid myrelid, const char *newrelname, ObjectType reltype) bool relhastriggers; /* - * Grab an exclusive lock on the target table, index, sequence or - * view, which we will NOT release until end of transaction. + * Grab an exclusive lock on the target table, index, sequence or view, + * which we will NOT release until end of transaction. */ targetrelation = relation_open(myrelid, AccessExclusiveLock); @@ -1647,9 +1650,8 @@ renamerel(Oid myrelid, const char *newrelname, ObjectType reltype) RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation)))); /* - * For compatibility with prior releases, we don't complain if - * ALTER TABLE or ALTER INDEX is used to rename a sequence or - * view. + * For compatibility with prior releases, we don't complain if ALTER TABLE + * or ALTER INDEX is used to rename a sequence or view. */ relkind = targetrelation->rd_rel->relkind; if (reltype == OBJECT_SEQUENCE && relkind != 'S') @@ -1746,19 +1748,19 @@ renamerel(Oid myrelid, const char *newrelname, ObjectType reltype) void AlterTable(AlterTableStmt *stmt) { - Relation rel = relation_openrv(stmt->relation, AccessExclusiveLock); + Relation rel = relation_openrv(stmt->relation, AccessExclusiveLock); int expected_refcnt; /* - * Disallow ALTER TABLE when the current backend has any open reference - * to it besides the one we just got (such as an open cursor or active - * plan); our AccessExclusiveLock doesn't protect us against stomping on - * our own foot, only other people's feet! + * Disallow ALTER TABLE when the current backend has any open reference to + * it besides the one we just got (such as an open cursor or active plan); + * our AccessExclusiveLock doesn't protect us against stomping on our own + * foot, only other people's feet! * - * Note: the only case known to cause serious trouble is ALTER COLUMN TYPE, - * and some changes are obviously pretty benign, so this could possibly - * be relaxed to only error out for certain types of alterations. But - * the use-case for allowing any of these things is not obvious, so we + * Note: the only case known to cause serious trouble is ALTER COLUMN + * TYPE, and some changes are obviously pretty benign, so this could + * possibly be relaxed to only error out for certain types of alterations. + * But the use-case for allowing any of these things is not obvious, so we * won't work hard at it for now. */ expected_refcnt = rel->rd_isnailed ? 2 : 1; @@ -1784,7 +1786,7 @@ AlterTable(AlterTableStmt *stmt) void AlterTableInternal(Oid relid, List *cmds, bool recurse) { - Relation rel = relation_open(relid, AccessExclusiveLock); + Relation rel = relation_open(relid, AccessExclusiveLock); ATController(rel, cmds, recurse); } @@ -2153,54 +2155,54 @@ ATExecCmd(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd) ATExecSetRelOptions(rel, (List *) cmd->def, true); break; - case AT_EnableTrig: /* ENABLE TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); + case AT_EnableTrig: /* ENABLE TRIGGER name */ + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); break; - case AT_EnableAlwaysTrig: /* ENABLE ALWAYS TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ALWAYS, false); + case AT_EnableAlwaysTrig: /* ENABLE ALWAYS TRIGGER name */ + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ALWAYS, false); break; - case AT_EnableReplicaTrig: /* ENABLE REPLICA TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_REPLICA, false); + case AT_EnableReplicaTrig: /* ENABLE REPLICA TRIGGER name */ + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_REPLICA, false); break; case AT_DisableTrig: /* DISABLE TRIGGER name */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, + TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); break; case AT_EnableTrigAll: /* ENABLE TRIGGER ALL */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false); break; case AT_DisableTrigAll: /* DISABLE TRIGGER ALL */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_DISABLED, false); break; case AT_EnableTrigUser: /* ENABLE TRIGGER USER */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, true); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, true); break; case AT_DisableTrigUser: /* DISABLE TRIGGER USER */ - ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_DISABLED, true); + ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, + TRIGGER_DISABLED, true); break; - case AT_EnableRule: /* ENABLE RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN); + case AT_EnableRule: /* ENABLE RULE name */ + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN); break; - case AT_EnableAlwaysRule: /* ENABLE ALWAYS RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_FIRES_ALWAYS); + case AT_EnableAlwaysRule: /* ENABLE ALWAYS RULE name */ + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_FIRES_ALWAYS); break; - case AT_EnableReplicaRule: /* ENABLE REPLICA RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_FIRES_ON_REPLICA); + case AT_EnableReplicaRule: /* ENABLE REPLICA RULE name */ + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_FIRES_ON_REPLICA); break; case AT_DisableRule: /* DISABLE RULE name */ - ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, - RULE_DISABLED); + ATExecEnableDisableRule(rel, cmd->name, + RULE_DISABLED); break; case AT_AddInherit: @@ -2303,8 +2305,8 @@ ATRewriteTables(List **wqueue) /* * Swap the physical files of the old and new heaps. Since we are - * generating a new heap, we can use RecentXmin for the table's new - * relfrozenxid because we rewrote all the tuples on + * generating a new heap, we can use RecentXmin for the table's + * new relfrozenxid because we rewrote all the tuples on * ATRewriteTable, so no older Xid remains on the table. */ swap_relation_files(tab->relid, OIDNewHeap, RecentXmin); @@ -3011,8 +3013,8 @@ ATExecAddColumn(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, if (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)) { Form_pg_attribute childatt = (Form_pg_attribute) GETSTRUCT(tuple); - Oid ctypeId; - int32 ctypmod; + Oid ctypeId; + int32 ctypmod; /* Okay if child matches by type */ ctypeId = typenameTypeId(NULL, colDef->typename, &ctypmod); @@ -3819,8 +3821,8 @@ ATExecAddConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, Node *newConstraint) /* * Currently, we only expect to see CONSTR_CHECK nodes * arriving here (see the preprocessing done in - * parse_utilcmd.c). Use a switch anyway to make it easier - * to add more code later. + * parse_utilcmd.c). Use a switch anyway to make it easier to + * add more code later. */ switch (constr->contype) { @@ -4030,7 +4032,7 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, * * Note that we have to be careful about the difference between the actual * PK column type and the opclass' declared input type, which might be - * only binary-compatible with it. The declared opcintype is the right + * only binary-compatible with it. The declared opcintype is the right * thing to probe pg_amop with. */ if (numfks != numpks) @@ -4067,10 +4069,10 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, /* * Check it's a btree; currently this can never fail since no other - * index AMs support unique indexes. If we ever did have other - * types of unique indexes, we'd need a way to determine which - * operator strategy number is equality. (Is it reasonable to - * insist that every such index AM use btree's number for equality?) + * index AMs support unique indexes. If we ever did have other types + * of unique indexes, we'd need a way to determine which operator + * strategy number is equality. (Is it reasonable to insist that + * every such index AM use btree's number for equality?) */ if (amid != BTREE_AM_OID) elog(ERROR, "only b-tree indexes are supported for foreign keys"); @@ -4088,8 +4090,8 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, eqstrategy, opcintype, opcintype, opfamily); /* - * Are there equality operators that take exactly the FK type? - * Assume we should look through any domain here. + * Are there equality operators that take exactly the FK type? Assume + * we should look through any domain here. */ fktyped = getBaseType(fktype); @@ -4099,21 +4101,21 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, ffeqop = get_opfamily_member(opfamily, fktyped, fktyped, eqstrategy); else - ffeqop = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ + ffeqop = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ if (!(OidIsValid(pfeqop) && OidIsValid(ffeqop))) { /* - * Otherwise, look for an implicit cast from the FK type to - * the opcintype, and if found, use the primary equality operator. + * Otherwise, look for an implicit cast from the FK type to the + * opcintype, and if found, use the primary equality operator. * This is a bit tricky because opcintype might be a generic type * such as ANYARRAY, and so what we have to test is whether the * two actual column types can be concurrently cast to that type. * (Otherwise, we'd fail to reject combinations such as int[] and * point[].) */ - Oid input_typeids[2]; - Oid target_typeids[2]; + Oid input_typeids[2]; + Oid target_typeids[2]; input_typeids[0] = pktype; input_typeids[1] = fktype; @@ -5255,10 +5257,10 @@ ATPostAlterTypeParse(char *cmd, List **wqueue) ListCell *list_item; /* - * We expect that we will get only ALTER TABLE and CREATE INDEX statements. - * Hence, there is no need to pass them through parse_analyze() or the - * rewriter, but instead we need to pass them through parse_utilcmd.c - * to make them ready for execution. + * We expect that we will get only ALTER TABLE and CREATE INDEX + * statements. Hence, there is no need to pass them through + * parse_analyze() or the rewriter, but instead we need to pass them + * through parse_utilcmd.c to make them ready for execution. */ raw_parsetree_list = raw_parser(cmd); querytree_list = NIL; @@ -5272,8 +5274,8 @@ ATPostAlterTypeParse(char *cmd, List **wqueue) cmd)); else if (IsA(stmt, AlterTableStmt)) querytree_list = list_concat(querytree_list, - transformAlterTableStmt((AlterTableStmt *) stmt, - cmd)); + transformAlterTableStmt((AlterTableStmt *) stmt, + cmd)); else querytree_list = lappend(querytree_list, stmt); } @@ -5528,7 +5530,7 @@ ATExecChangeOwner(Oid relationOid, Oid newOwnerId, bool recursing) */ if (tuple_class->relkind != RELKIND_INDEX) AlterTypeOwnerInternal(tuple_class->reltype, newOwnerId, - tuple_class->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE); + tuple_class->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE); /* * If we are operating on a table, also change the ownership of any @@ -5983,7 +5985,7 @@ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(Relation rel, char *trigname, */ static void ATExecEnableDisableRule(Relation rel, char *trigname, - char fires_when) + char fires_when) { EnableDisableRule(rel, trigname, fires_when); } @@ -6051,8 +6053,8 @@ ATExecAddInherit(Relation child_rel, RangeVar *parent) if (inh->inhparent == RelationGetRelid(parent_rel)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE), - errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", - RelationGetRelationName(parent_rel)))); + errmsg("relation \"%s\" would be inherited from more than once", + RelationGetRelationName(parent_rel)))); if (inh->inhseqno > inhseqno) inhseqno = inh->inhseqno; } @@ -6063,12 +6065,12 @@ ATExecAddInherit(Relation child_rel, RangeVar *parent) * (In particular, this disallows making a rel inherit from itself.) * * This is not completely bulletproof because of race conditions: in - * multi-level inheritance trees, someone else could concurrently - * be making another inheritance link that closes the loop but does - * not join either of the rels we have locked. Preventing that seems - * to require exclusive locks on the entire inheritance tree, which is - * a cure worse than the disease. find_all_inheritors() will cope with - * circularity anyway, so don't sweat it too much. + * multi-level inheritance trees, someone else could concurrently be + * making another inheritance link that closes the loop but does not join + * either of the rels we have locked. Preventing that seems to require + * exclusive locks on the entire inheritance tree, which is a cure worse + * than the disease. find_all_inheritors() will cope with circularity + * anyway, so don't sweat it too much. */ children = find_all_inheritors(RelationGetRelid(child_rel)); @@ -6095,7 +6097,7 @@ ATExecAddInherit(Relation child_rel, RangeVar *parent) MergeConstraintsIntoExisting(child_rel, parent_rel); /* - * OK, it looks valid. Make the catalog entries that show inheritance. + * OK, it looks valid. Make the catalog entries that show inheritance. */ StoreCatalogInheritance1(RelationGetRelid(child_rel), RelationGetRelid(parent_rel), @@ -6189,8 +6191,8 @@ MergeAttributesIntoExisting(Relation child_rel, Relation parent_rel) if (attribute->attnotnull && !childatt->attnotnull) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("column \"%s\" in child table must be marked NOT NULL", - attributeName))); + errmsg("column \"%s\" in child table must be marked NOT NULL", + attributeName))); /* * OK, bump the child column's inheritance count. (If we fail @@ -6345,20 +6347,20 @@ ATExecDropInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent) bool found = false; /* - * AccessShareLock on the parent is probably enough, seeing that DROP TABLE - * doesn't lock parent tables at all. We need some lock since we'll be - * inspecting the parent's schema. + * AccessShareLock on the parent is probably enough, seeing that DROP + * TABLE doesn't lock parent tables at all. We need some lock since we'll + * be inspecting the parent's schema. */ parent_rel = heap_openrv(parent, AccessShareLock); /* - * We don't bother to check ownership of the parent table --- ownership - * of the child is presumed enough rights. + * We don't bother to check ownership of the parent table --- ownership of + * the child is presumed enough rights. */ /* - * Find and destroy the pg_inherits entry linking the two, or error out - * if there is none. + * Find and destroy the pg_inherits entry linking the two, or error out if + * there is none. */ catalogRelation = heap_open(InheritsRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); ScanKeyInit(&key[0], @@ -6508,9 +6510,9 @@ AlterTableNamespace(RangeVar *relation, const char *newschema) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), errmsg("cannot move an owned sequence into another schema"), - errdetail("Sequence \"%s\" is linked to table \"%s\".", - RelationGetRelationName(rel), - get_rel_name(tableId)))); + errdetail("Sequence \"%s\" is linked to table \"%s\".", + RelationGetRelationName(rel), + get_rel_name(tableId)))); } break; case RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE: diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c index 305da59da0..b212fe0823 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.50 2007/11/15 20:36:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.51 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ CreateTableSpace(CreateTableSpaceStmt *stmt) if (strchr(location, '\'')) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME), - errmsg("tablespace location cannot contain single quotes"))); + errmsg("tablespace location cannot contain single quotes"))); /* * Allowing relative paths seems risky @@ -356,10 +356,10 @@ CreateTableSpace(CreateTableSpaceStmt *stmt) } /* - * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between creating - * the symlink on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's - * not great that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't - * want to make it larger than necessary. + * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between creating the + * symlink on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's not great + * that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't want to make + * it larger than necessary. */ ForceSyncCommit(); @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt) LWLockAcquire(TablespaceCreateLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); /* - * Try to remove the physical infrastructure. + * Try to remove the physical infrastructure. */ if (!remove_tablespace_directories(tablespaceoid, false)) { @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt) * Not all files deleted? However, there can be lingering empty files * in the directories, left behind by for example DROP TABLE, that * have been scheduled for deletion at next checkpoint (see comments - * in mdunlink() for details). We could just delete them immediately, + * in mdunlink() for details). We could just delete them immediately, * but we can't tell them apart from important data files that we * mustn't delete. So instead, we force a checkpoint which will clean * out any lingering files, and try again. @@ -506,10 +506,10 @@ DropTableSpace(DropTableSpaceStmt *stmt) */ /* - * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between removing - * the files on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's - * not great that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't - * want to make it larger than necessary. + * Force synchronous commit, to minimize the window between removing the + * files on-disk and marking the transaction committed. It's not great + * that there is any window at all, but definitely we don't want to make + * it larger than necessary. */ ForceSyncCommit(); @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ remove_tablespace_directories(Oid tablespaceoid, bool redo) * * If redo is true then ENOENT is a likely outcome here, and we allow it * to pass without comment. In normal operation we still allow it, but - * with a warning. This is because even though ProcessUtility disallows + * with a warning. This is because even though ProcessUtility disallows * DROP TABLESPACE in a transaction block, it's possible that a previous * DROP failed and rolled back after removing the tablespace directories * and symlink. We want to allow a new DROP attempt to succeed at @@ -1019,12 +1019,12 @@ assign_temp_tablespaces(const char *newval, bool doit, GucSource source) * transaction, we'll leak a bit of TopTransactionContext memory. * Doesn't seem worth worrying about. */ - Oid *tblSpcs; - int numSpcs; + Oid *tblSpcs; + int numSpcs; ListCell *l; tblSpcs = (Oid *) MemoryContextAlloc(TopTransactionContext, - list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); + list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); numSpcs = 0; foreach(l, namelist) { @@ -1112,10 +1112,10 @@ PrepareTempTablespaces(void) return; /* - * Can't do catalog access unless within a transaction. This is just - * a safety check in case this function is called by low-level code that - * could conceivably execute outside a transaction. Note that in such - * a scenario, fd.c will fall back to using the current database's default + * Can't do catalog access unless within a transaction. This is just a + * safety check in case this function is called by low-level code that + * could conceivably execute outside a transaction. Note that in such a + * scenario, fd.c will fall back to using the current database's default * tablespace, which should always be OK. */ if (!IsTransactionState()) @@ -1136,7 +1136,7 @@ PrepareTempTablespaces(void) /* Store tablespace OIDs in an array in TopTransactionContext */ tblSpcs = (Oid *) MemoryContextAlloc(TopTransactionContext, - list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); + list_length(namelist) * sizeof(Oid)); numSpcs = 0; foreach(l, namelist) { @@ -1160,8 +1160,8 @@ PrepareTempTablespaces(void) } /* - * Allow explicit specification of database's default tablespace - * in temp_tablespaces without triggering permissions checks. + * Allow explicit specification of database's default tablespace in + * temp_tablespaces without triggering permissions checks. */ if (curoid == MyDatabaseTableSpace) { @@ -1241,8 +1241,8 @@ get_tablespace_name(Oid spc_oid) /* * Search pg_tablespace. We use a heapscan here even though there is an - * index on oid, on the theory that pg_tablespace will usually have just - * a few entries and so an indexed lookup is a waste of effort. + * index on oid, on the theory that pg_tablespace will usually have just a + * few entries and so an indexed lookup is a waste of effort. */ rel = heap_open(TableSpaceRelationId, AccessShareLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c index ca3b2ec2ce..608293cac3 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c,v 1.5 2007/08/22 22:30:20 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c,v 1.6 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ #include "utils/syscache.h" -static void MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, - HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); -static void DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, - HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); +static void MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, + HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); +static void DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, + HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap); /* --------------------- TS Parser commands ------------------------ */ @@ -220,8 +220,8 @@ DefineTSParser(List *names, List *parameters) else ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("text search parser parameter \"%s\" not recognized", - defel->defname))); + errmsg("text search parser parameter \"%s\" not recognized", + defel->defname))); } /* @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ RenameTSParser(List *oldname, const char *newname) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), errmsg("text search parser \"%s\" already exists", - newname))); + newname))); namestrcpy(&(((Form_pg_ts_parser) GETSTRUCT(tup))->prsname), newname); simple_heap_update(rel, &tup->t_self, tup); @@ -421,10 +421,9 @@ verify_dictoptions(Oid tmplId, List *dictoptions) /* * Suppress this test when running in a standalone backend. This is a * hack to allow initdb to create prefab dictionaries that might not - * actually be usable in template1's encoding (due to using external - * files that can't be translated into template1's encoding). We want - * to create them anyway, since they might be usable later in other - * databases. + * actually be usable in template1's encoding (due to using external files + * that can't be translated into template1's encoding). We want to create + * them anyway, since they might be usable later in other databases. */ if (!IsUnderPostmaster) return; @@ -445,14 +444,14 @@ verify_dictoptions(Oid tmplId, List *dictoptions) if (dictoptions) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("text search template \"%s\" does not accept options", - NameStr(tform->tmplname)))); + errmsg("text search template \"%s\" does not accept options", + NameStr(tform->tmplname)))); } else { /* - * Copy the options just in case init method thinks it can scribble - * on them ... + * Copy the options just in case init method thinks it can scribble on + * them ... */ dictoptions = copyObject(dictoptions); @@ -793,8 +792,8 @@ AlterTSDictionary(AlterTSDictionaryStmt * stmt) /* * NOTE: because we only support altering the options, not the template, - * there is no need to update dependencies. This might have to change - * if the options ever reference inside-the-database objects. + * there is no need to update dependencies. This might have to change if + * the options ever reference inside-the-database objects. */ heap_freetuple(newtup); @@ -966,7 +965,7 @@ DefineTSTemplate(List *names, List *parameters) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to create text search templates"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to create text search templates"))); /* Convert list of names to a name and namespace */ namespaceoid = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(names, &tmplname); @@ -1048,7 +1047,7 @@ RenameTSTemplate(List *oldname, const char *newname) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to rename text search templates"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to rename text search templates"))); rel = heap_open(TSTemplateRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1633,7 +1632,7 @@ AlterTSConfigurationOwner(List *name, Oid newOwnerId) * ALTER TEXT SEARCH CONFIGURATION - main entry point */ void -AlterTSConfiguration(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt) +AlterTSConfiguration(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt) { HeapTuple tup; Relation relMap; @@ -1727,7 +1726,7 @@ getTokenTypes(Oid prsId, List *tokennames) * ALTER TEXT SEARCH CONFIGURATION ADD/ALTER MAPPING */ static void -MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, +MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap) { Oid cfgId = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); @@ -1889,7 +1888,7 @@ MakeConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, * ALTER TEXT SEARCH CONFIGURATION DROP MAPPING */ static void -DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt *stmt, +DropConfigurationMapping(AlterTSConfigurationStmt * stmt, HeapTuple tup, Relation relMap) { Oid cfgId = HeapTupleGetOid(tup); @@ -1981,7 +1980,7 @@ serialize_deflist(List *deflist) char *val = defGetString(defel); appendStringInfo(&buf, "%s = ", - quote_identifier(defel->defname)); + quote_identifier(defel->defname)); /* If backslashes appear, force E syntax to determine their handling */ if (strchr(val, '\\')) appendStringInfoChar(&buf, ESCAPE_STRING_SYNTAX); @@ -2014,7 +2013,7 @@ serialize_deflist(List *deflist) List * deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) { - text *in = DatumGetTextP(txt); /* in case it's toasted */ + text *in = DatumGetTextP(txt); /* in case it's toasted */ List *result = NIL; int len = VARSIZE(in) - VARHDRSZ; char *ptr, @@ -2022,7 +2021,8 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *workspace, *wsptr = NULL, *startvalue = NULL; - typedef enum { + typedef enum + { CS_WAITKEY, CS_INKEY, CS_INQKEY, @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) CS_INSQVALUE, CS_INDQVALUE, CS_INWVALUE - } ds_state; + } ds_state; ds_state state = CS_WAITKEY; workspace = (char *) palloc(len + 1); /* certainly enough room */ @@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) case CS_INQKEY: if (*ptr == '"') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') { /* copy only one of the two quotes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2106,7 +2106,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) startvalue = wsptr; state = CS_INSQVALUE; } - else if (*ptr == 'E' && ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') + else if (*ptr == 'E' && ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') { ptr++; startvalue = wsptr; @@ -2127,7 +2127,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) case CS_INSQVALUE: if (*ptr == '\'') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\'') { /* copy only one of the two quotes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2137,13 +2137,13 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); state = CS_WAITKEY; } } else if (*ptr == '\\') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\\') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '\\') { /* copy only one of the two backslashes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2159,7 +2159,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) case CS_INDQVALUE: if (*ptr == '"') { - if (ptr+1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') + if (ptr + 1 < endptr && ptr[1] == '"') { /* copy only one of the two quotes */ *wsptr++ = *ptr++; @@ -2169,7 +2169,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); state = CS_WAITKEY; } } @@ -2184,7 +2184,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); state = CS_WAITKEY; } else @@ -2203,7 +2203,7 @@ deserialize_deflist(Datum txt) *wsptr++ = '\0'; result = lappend(result, makeDefElem(pstrdup(workspace), - (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); + (Node *) makeString(pstrdup(startvalue)))); } else if (state != CS_WAITKEY) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c index 230004c59b..e93f3b9a4f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.110 2007/11/11 19:22:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.111 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -120,11 +120,11 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) Oid typmodoutOid = InvalidOid; Oid analyzeOid = InvalidOid; char *array_type; - Oid array_oid; + Oid array_oid; ListCell *pl; Oid typoid; Oid resulttype; - Relation pg_type; + Relation pg_type; /* Convert list of names to a name and namespace */ typeNamespace = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(names, &typeName); @@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) 0, 0); /* - * If it's not a shell, see if it's an autogenerated array type, - * and if so rename it out of the way. + * If it's not a shell, see if it's an autogenerated array type, and if so + * rename it out of the way. */ if (OidIsValid(typoid) && get_typisdefined(typoid)) { @@ -155,8 +155,8 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) } /* - * If it doesn't exist, create it as a shell, so that the OID is known - * for use in the I/O function definitions. + * If it doesn't exist, create it as a shell, so that the OID is known for + * use in the I/O function definitions. */ if (!OidIsValid(typoid)) { @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) NameListToString(analyzeName)); /* Preassign array type OID so we can insert it in pg_type.typarray */ - pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); + pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); array_oid = GetNewOid(pg_type); heap_close(pg_type, AccessShareLock); @@ -418,14 +418,14 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ internalLength, /* internal size */ - TYPTYPE_BASE, /* type-type (base type) */ + TYPTYPE_BASE, /* type-type (base type) */ delimiter, /* array element delimiter */ inputOid, /* input procedure */ outputOid, /* output procedure */ receiveOid, /* receive procedure */ sendOid, /* send procedure */ typmodinOid, /* typmodin procedure */ - typmodoutOid,/* typmodout procedure */ + typmodoutOid, /* typmodout procedure */ analyzeOid, /* analyze procedure */ elemType, /* element type ID */ false, /* this is not an array type */ @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ RemoveType(List *names, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok) return; } - typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); + typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); typ = (Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(tup); /* Permission check: must own type or its namespace */ @@ -564,9 +564,9 @@ RemoveTypeById(Oid typeOid) simple_heap_delete(relation, &tup->t_self); /* - * If it is an enum, delete the pg_enum entries too; we don't bother - * with making dependency entries for those, so it has to be done - * "by hand" here. + * If it is an enum, delete the pg_enum entries too; we don't bother with + * making dependency entries for those, so it has to be done "by hand" + * here. */ if (((Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(tup))->typtype == TYPTYPE_ENUM) EnumValuesDelete(typeOid); @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) get_namespace_name(domainNamespace)); /* - * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and + * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and * it's an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way. */ old_type_oid = GetSysCacheOid(TYPENAMENSP, @@ -651,10 +651,9 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) basetypeoid = HeapTupleGetOid(typeTup); /* - * Base type must be a plain base type, another domain or an enum. - * Domains over pseudotypes would create a security hole. Domains - * over composite types might be made to work in the future, but not - * today. + * Base type must be a plain base type, another domain or an enum. Domains + * over pseudotypes would create a security hole. Domains over composite + * types might be made to work in the future, but not today. */ typtype = baseType->typtype; if (typtype != TYPTYPE_BASE && @@ -751,8 +750,8 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) pstate = make_parsestate(NULL); /* - * Cook the constr->raw_expr into an expression. - * Note: name is strictly for error message + * Cook the constr->raw_expr into an expression. Note: + * name is strictly for error message */ defaultExpr = cookDefault(pstate, constr->raw_expr, basetypeoid, @@ -760,8 +759,8 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) domainName); /* - * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we treat - * it like not having a default. + * If the expression is just a NULL constant, we treat it + * like not having a default. * * Note that if the basetype is another domain, we'll see * a CoerceToDomain expr here and not discard the default. @@ -786,7 +785,7 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) defaultValue = deparse_expression(defaultExpr, deparse_context_for(domainName, - InvalidOid), + InvalidOid), false, false); defaultValueBin = nodeToString(defaultExpr); } @@ -872,8 +871,8 @@ DefineDomain(CreateDomainStmt *stmt) outputProcedure, /* output procedure */ receiveProcedure, /* receive procedure */ sendProcedure, /* send procedure */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ analyzeProcedure, /* analyze procedure */ typelem, /* element type ID */ false, /* this isn't an array */ @@ -961,7 +960,7 @@ RemoveDomain(List *names, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok) return; } - typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); + typeoid = typeTypeId(tup); /* Permission check: must own type or its namespace */ if (!pg_type_ownercheck(typeoid, GetUserId()) && @@ -996,16 +995,16 @@ RemoveDomain(List *names, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok) * Registers a new enum. */ void -DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) +DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt * stmt) { - char *enumName; - char *enumArrayName; - Oid enumNamespace; - Oid enumTypeOid; + char *enumName; + char *enumArrayName; + Oid enumNamespace; + Oid enumTypeOid; AclResult aclresult; - Oid old_type_oid; - Oid enumArrayOid; - Relation pg_type; + Oid old_type_oid; + Oid enumArrayOid; + Relation pg_type; /* Convert list of names to a name and namespace */ enumNamespace = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(stmt->typename, @@ -1018,7 +1017,7 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) get_namespace_name(enumNamespace)); /* - * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and + * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and * it's an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way. */ old_type_oid = GetSysCacheOid(TYPENAMENSP, @@ -1034,39 +1033,39 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) } /* Preassign array type OID so we can insert it in pg_type.typarray */ - pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); + pg_type = heap_open(TypeRelationId, AccessShareLock); enumArrayOid = GetNewOid(pg_type); heap_close(pg_type, AccessShareLock); /* Create the pg_type entry */ - enumTypeOid = - TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined type OID */ - enumName, /* type name */ - enumNamespace, /* namespace */ - InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ - 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ - sizeof(Oid), /* internal size */ + enumTypeOid = + TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined type OID */ + enumName, /* type name */ + enumNamespace, /* namespace */ + InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ + 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ + sizeof(Oid), /* internal size */ TYPTYPE_ENUM, /* type-type (enum type) */ DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* array element delimiter */ - F_ENUM_IN, /* input procedure */ - F_ENUM_OUT, /* output procedure */ - F_ENUM_RECV, /* receive procedure */ - F_ENUM_SEND, /* send procedure */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ - InvalidOid, /* element type ID */ - false, /* this is not an array type */ + F_ENUM_IN, /* input procedure */ + F_ENUM_OUT, /* output procedure */ + F_ENUM_RECV, /* receive procedure */ + F_ENUM_SEND, /* send procedure */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ + InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ + InvalidOid, /* element type ID */ + false, /* this is not an array type */ enumArrayOid, /* array type we are about to create */ - InvalidOid, /* base type ID (only for domains) */ - NULL, /* never a default type value */ - NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ - true, /* always passed by value */ - 'i', /* int alignment */ - 'p', /* TOAST strategy always plain */ - -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ - 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ - false); /* Type NOT NULL */ + InvalidOid, /* base type ID (only for domains) */ + NULL, /* never a default type value */ + NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ + true, /* always passed by value */ + 'i', /* int alignment */ + 'p', /* TOAST strategy always plain */ + -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ + 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ + false); /* Type NOT NULL */ /* Enter the enum's values into pg_enum */ EnumValuesCreate(enumTypeOid, stmt->vals); @@ -1077,31 +1076,31 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) enumArrayName = makeArrayTypeName(enumName, enumNamespace); TypeCreate(enumArrayOid, /* force assignment of this type OID */ - enumArrayName, /* type name */ - enumNamespace, /* namespace */ - InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ - 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ - -1, /* internal size (always varlena) */ + enumArrayName, /* type name */ + enumNamespace, /* namespace */ + InvalidOid, /* relation oid (n/a here) */ + 0, /* relation kind (ditto) */ + -1, /* internal size (always varlena) */ TYPTYPE_BASE, /* type-type (base type) */ - DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* array element delimiter */ - F_ARRAY_IN, /* input procedure */ - F_ARRAY_OUT, /* output procedure */ - F_ARRAY_RECV, /* receive procedure */ - F_ARRAY_SEND, /* send procedure */ + DEFAULT_TYPDELIM, /* array element delimiter */ + F_ARRAY_IN, /* input procedure */ + F_ARRAY_OUT, /* output procedure */ + F_ARRAY_RECV, /* receive procedure */ + F_ARRAY_SEND, /* send procedure */ InvalidOid, /* typmodin procedure - none */ InvalidOid, /* typmodout procedure - none */ - InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ - enumTypeOid, /* element type ID */ + InvalidOid, /* analyze procedure - default */ + enumTypeOid, /* element type ID */ true, /* yes this is an array type */ InvalidOid, /* no further array type */ - InvalidOid, /* base type ID */ - NULL, /* never a default type value */ - NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ - false, /* never passed by value */ - 'i', /* enums have align i, so do their arrays */ - 'x', /* ARRAY is always toastable */ - -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ - 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ + InvalidOid, /* base type ID */ + NULL, /* never a default type value */ + NULL, /* binary default isn't sent either */ + false, /* never passed by value */ + 'i', /* enums have align i, so do their arrays */ + 'x', /* ARRAY is always toastable */ + -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ + 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ false); /* Type NOT NULL */ pfree(enumArrayName); @@ -1475,7 +1474,7 @@ AlterDomainDefault(List *names, Node *defaultRaw) * DefineDomain.) */ if (defaultExpr == NULL || - (IsA(defaultExpr, Const) && ((Const *) defaultExpr)->constisnull)) + (IsA(defaultExpr, Const) &&((Const *) defaultExpr)->constisnull)) { /* Default is NULL, drop it */ new_record_nulls[Anum_pg_type_typdefaultbin - 1] = 'n'; @@ -1493,13 +1492,13 @@ AlterDomainDefault(List *names, Node *defaultRaw) defaultValue = deparse_expression(defaultExpr, deparse_context_for(NameStr(typTup->typname), InvalidOid), - false, false); + false, false); /* * Form an updated tuple with the new default and write it back. */ new_record[Anum_pg_type_typdefaultbin - 1] = DirectFunctionCall1(textin, - CStringGetDatum(nodeToString(defaultExpr))); + CStringGetDatum(nodeToString(defaultExpr))); new_record_repl[Anum_pg_type_typdefaultbin - 1] = 'r'; new_record[Anum_pg_type_typdefault - 1] = DirectFunctionCall1(textin, @@ -1527,7 +1526,7 @@ AlterDomainDefault(List *names, Node *defaultRaw) /* Rebuild dependencies */ GenerateTypeDependencies(typTup->typnamespace, domainoid, - InvalidOid, /* typrelid is n/a */ + InvalidOid, /* typrelid is n/a */ 0, /* relation kind is n/a */ typTup->typowner, typTup->typinput, @@ -1956,9 +1955,10 @@ get_rels_with_domain(Oid domainOid, LOCKMODE lockmode) if (pg_depend->classid == TypeRelationId) { Assert(get_typtype(pg_depend->objid) == TYPTYPE_DOMAIN); + /* - * Recursively add dependent columns to the output list. This - * is a bit inefficient since we may fail to combine RelToCheck + * Recursively add dependent columns to the output list. This is + * a bit inefficient since we may fail to combine RelToCheck * entries when attributes of the same rel have different derived * domain types, but it's probably not worth improving. */ @@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("type \"%s\" does not exist", TypeNameToString(typename)))); - typeOid = typeTypeId(tup); + typeOid = typeTypeId(tup); /* Copy the syscache entry so we can scribble on it below */ newtup = heap_copytuple(tup); @@ -2375,8 +2375,8 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) /* * If it's a composite type, we need to check that it really is a - * free-standing composite type, and not a table's rowtype. We - * want people to use ALTER TABLE not ALTER TYPE for that case. + * free-standing composite type, and not a table's rowtype. We want people + * to use ALTER TABLE not ALTER TYPE for that case. */ if (typTup->typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE && get_rel_relkind(typTup->typrelid) != RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE) @@ -2423,8 +2423,8 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) } /* - * If it's a composite type, invoke ATExecChangeOwner so that we - * fix up the pg_class entry properly. That will call back to + * If it's a composite type, invoke ATExecChangeOwner so that we fix + * up the pg_class entry properly. That will call back to * AlterTypeOwnerInternal to take care of the pg_type entry(s). */ if (typTup->typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE) @@ -2458,7 +2458,7 @@ AlterTypeOwner(List *names, Oid newOwnerId) /* * AlterTypeOwnerInternal - change type owner unconditionally * - * This is currently only used to propagate ALTER TABLE/TYPE OWNER to a + * This is currently only used to propagate ALTER TABLE/TYPE OWNER to a * table's rowtype or an array type, and to implement REASSIGN OWNED BY. * It assumes the caller has done all needed checks. The function will * automatically recurse to an array type if the type has one. @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ AlterTypeNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema) * Caller must have already checked privileges. * * The function automatically recurses to process the type's array type, - * if any. isImplicitArray should be TRUE only when doing this internal + * if any. isImplicitArray should be TRUE only when doing this internal * recursion (outside callers must never try to move an array type directly). * * If errorOnTableType is TRUE, the function errors out if the type is diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c index 55ce0dbade..c0d58d33ea 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c,v 1.360 2007/10/24 20:55:36 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c,v 1.361 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -592,19 +592,19 @@ vacuum_set_xid_limits(int freeze_min_age, bool sharedRel, /* * We can always ignore processes running lazy vacuum. This is because we * use these values only for deciding which tuples we must keep in the - * tables. Since lazy vacuum doesn't write its XID anywhere, it's - * safe to ignore it. In theory it could be problematic to ignore lazy - * vacuums on a full vacuum, but keep in mind that only one vacuum process - * can be working on a particular table at any time, and that each vacuum - * is always an independent transaction. + * tables. Since lazy vacuum doesn't write its XID anywhere, it's safe to + * ignore it. In theory it could be problematic to ignore lazy vacuums on + * a full vacuum, but keep in mind that only one vacuum process can be + * working on a particular table at any time, and that each vacuum is + * always an independent transaction. */ *oldestXmin = GetOldestXmin(sharedRel, true); Assert(TransactionIdIsNormal(*oldestXmin)); /* - * Determine the minimum freeze age to use: as specified by the caller, - * or vacuum_freeze_min_age, but in any case not more than half + * Determine the minimum freeze age to use: as specified by the caller, or + * vacuum_freeze_min_age, but in any case not more than half * autovacuum_freeze_max_age, so that autovacuums to prevent XID * wraparound won't occur too frequently. */ @@ -623,8 +623,8 @@ vacuum_set_xid_limits(int freeze_min_age, bool sharedRel, /* * If oldestXmin is very far back (in practice, more than - * autovacuum_freeze_max_age / 2 XIDs old), complain and force a - * minimum freeze age of zero. + * autovacuum_freeze_max_age / 2 XIDs old), complain and force a minimum + * freeze age of zero. */ safeLimit = ReadNewTransactionId() - autovacuum_freeze_max_age; if (!TransactionIdIsNormal(safeLimit)) @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ vac_update_relstats(Oid relid, BlockNumber num_pages, double num_tuples, * advance pg_database.datfrozenxid, also try to truncate pg_clog. * * We violate transaction semantics here by overwriting the database's - * existing pg_database tuple with the new value. This is reasonably + * existing pg_database tuple with the new value. This is reasonably * safe since the new value is correct whether or not this transaction * commits. As with vac_update_relstats, this avoids leaving dead tuples * behind after a VACUUM. @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ vac_update_datfrozenxid(void) bool dirty = false; /* - * Initialize the "min" calculation with RecentGlobalXmin. Any + * Initialize the "min" calculation with RecentGlobalXmin. Any * not-yet-committed pg_class entries for new tables must have * relfrozenxid at least this high, because any other open xact must have * RecentXmin >= its PGPROC.xmin >= our RecentGlobalXmin; see @@ -848,8 +848,7 @@ vac_update_datfrozenxid(void) /* * If we were able to advance datfrozenxid, mark the flat-file copy of - * pg_database for update at commit, and see if we can truncate - * pg_clog. + * pg_database for update at commit, and see if we can truncate pg_clog. */ if (dirty) { @@ -893,10 +892,10 @@ vac_truncate_clog(TransactionId frozenXID) * inserted by CREATE DATABASE. Any such entry will have a copy of some * existing DB's datfrozenxid, and that source DB cannot be ours because * of the interlock against copying a DB containing an active backend. - * Hence the new entry will not reduce the minimum. Also, if two - * VACUUMs concurrently modify the datfrozenxid's of different databases, - * the worst possible outcome is that pg_clog is not truncated as - * aggressively as it could be. + * Hence the new entry will not reduce the minimum. Also, if two VACUUMs + * concurrently modify the datfrozenxid's of different databases, the + * worst possible outcome is that pg_clog is not truncated as aggressively + * as it could be. */ relation = heap_open(DatabaseRelationId, AccessShareLock); @@ -989,13 +988,13 @@ vacuum_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, char expected_relkind) * * We can furthermore set the PROC_IN_VACUUM flag, which lets other * concurrent VACUUMs know that they can ignore this one while - * determining their OldestXmin. (The reason we don't set it - * during a full VACUUM is exactly that we may have to run user- - * defined functions for functional indexes, and we want to make sure - * that if they use the snapshot set above, any tuples it requires - * can't get removed from other tables. An index function that - * depends on the contents of other tables is arguably broken, but we - * won't break it here by violating transaction semantics.) + * determining their OldestXmin. (The reason we don't set it during a + * full VACUUM is exactly that we may have to run user- defined + * functions for functional indexes, and we want to make sure that if + * they use the snapshot set above, any tuples it requires can't get + * removed from other tables. An index function that depends on the + * contents of other tables is arguably broken, but we won't break it + * here by violating transaction semantics.) * * Note: this flag remains set until CommitTransaction or * AbortTransaction. We don't want to clear it until we reset @@ -1168,8 +1167,8 @@ full_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt) /* * Flush any previous async-commit transactions. This does not guarantee - * that we will be able to set hint bits for tuples they inserted, but - * it improves the probability, especially in simple sequential-commands + * that we will be able to set hint bits for tuples they inserted, but it + * improves the probability, especially in simple sequential-commands * cases. See scan_heap() and repair_frag() for more about this. */ XLogAsyncCommitFlush(); @@ -1319,10 +1318,11 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * dirty. To ensure that invalid data doesn't get written to disk, we * must take exclusive buffer lock wherever we potentially modify * pages. In fact, we insist on cleanup lock so that we can safely - * call heap_page_prune(). (This might be overkill, since the bgwriter - * pays no attention to individual tuples, but on the other hand it's - * unlikely that the bgwriter has this particular page pinned at this - * instant. So violating the coding rule would buy us little anyway.) + * call heap_page_prune(). (This might be overkill, since the + * bgwriter pays no attention to individual tuples, but on the other + * hand it's unlikely that the bgwriter has this particular page + * pinned at this instant. So violating the coding rule would buy us + * little anyway.) */ LockBufferForCleanup(buf); @@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, continue; } - /* + /* * Prune all HOT-update chains in this page. * * We use the redirect_move option so that redirecting line pointers @@ -1377,8 +1377,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, true, false); /* - * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for - * tuples requiring freezing. + * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for tuples + * requiring freezing. */ nfrozen = 0; notup = true; @@ -1393,9 +1393,9 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* * Collect un-used items too - it's possible to have indexes - * pointing here after crash. (That's an ancient comment and - * is likely obsolete with WAL, but we might as well continue - * to check for such problems.) + * pointing here after crash. (That's an ancient comment and is + * likely obsolete with WAL, but we might as well continue to + * check for such problems.) */ if (!ItemIdIsUsed(itemid)) { @@ -1406,9 +1406,9 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* * DEAD item pointers are to be vacuumed normally; but we don't - * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting - * (at least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just - * freed up a non-HOT tuple). + * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting (at + * least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just freed up + * a non-HOT tuple). */ if (ItemIdIsDead(itemid)) { @@ -1433,12 +1433,13 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, !OidIsValid(HeapTupleGetOid(&tuple))) elog(WARNING, "relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: OID is invalid", relname, blkno, offnum); + /* * The shrinkage phase of VACUUM FULL requires that all * live tuples have XMIN_COMMITTED set --- see comments in * repair_frag()'s walk-along-page loop. Use of async * commit may prevent HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum from - * setting the bit for a recently committed tuple. Rather + * setting the bit for a recently committed tuple. Rather * than trying to handle this corner case, we just give up * and don't shrink. */ @@ -1448,30 +1449,31 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: XMIN_COMMITTED not set for transaction %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; } break; case HEAPTUPLE_DEAD: + /* * Ordinarily, DEAD tuples would have been removed by * heap_page_prune(), but it's possible that the tuple * state changed since heap_page_prune() looked. In * particular an INSERT_IN_PROGRESS tuple could have * changed to DEAD if the inserter aborted. So this - * cannot be considered an error condition, though it - * does suggest that someone released a lock early. + * cannot be considered an error condition, though it does + * suggest that someone released a lock early. * * If the tuple is HOT-updated then it must only be * removed by a prune operation; so we keep it as if it * were RECENTLY_DEAD, and abandon shrinking. (XXX is it - * worth trying to make the shrinking code smart enough - * to handle this? It's an unusual corner case.) + * worth trying to make the shrinking code smart enough to + * handle this? It's an unusual corner case.) * * DEAD heap-only tuples can safely be removed if they * aren't themselves HOT-updated, although this is a bit - * inefficient since we'll uselessly try to remove - * index entries for them. + * inefficient since we'll uselessly try to remove index + * entries for them. */ if (HeapTupleIsHotUpdated(&tuple)) { @@ -1484,7 +1486,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, } else { - tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ + tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ + /* * We need not require XMIN_COMMITTED or * XMAX_COMMITTED to be set, since we will remove the @@ -1502,8 +1505,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, nkeep += 1; /* - * As with the LIVE case, shrinkage requires XMIN_COMMITTED - * to be set. + * As with the LIVE case, shrinkage requires + * XMIN_COMMITTED to be set. */ if (do_shrinking && !(tuple.t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_XMIN_COMMITTED)) @@ -1511,7 +1514,7 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: XMIN_COMMITTED not set for transaction %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; } @@ -1542,15 +1545,15 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * This should not happen, since we hold exclusive lock on * the relation; shouldn't we raise an error? (Actually, * it can happen in system catalogs, since we tend to - * release write lock before commit there.) As above, - * we can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is + * release write lock before commit there.) As above, we + * can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is * uncertain. */ if (do_shrinking) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: InsertTransactionInProgress %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; break; case HEAPTUPLE_DELETE_IN_PROGRESS: @@ -1559,15 +1562,15 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * This should not happen, since we hold exclusive lock on * the relation; shouldn't we raise an error? (Actually, * it can happen in system catalogs, since we tend to - * release write lock before commit there.) As above, - * we can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is + * release write lock before commit there.) As above, we + * can't apply repair_frag() if the tuple state is * uncertain. */ if (do_shrinking) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("relation \"%s\" TID %u/%u: DeleteTransactionInProgress %u --- cannot shrink relation", relname, blkno, offnum, - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple.t_data)))); + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tuple.t_data)))); do_shrinking = false; break; default: @@ -1615,8 +1618,8 @@ scan_heap(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, max_tlen = tuple.t_len; /* - * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it - * needs freezing. + * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it needs + * freezing. */ if (heap_freeze_tuple(tuple.t_data, FreezeLimit, InvalidBuffer)) @@ -1996,11 +1999,12 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, if (i >= vacpage->offsets_free) /* not found */ { vacpage->offsets[vacpage->offsets_free++] = offnum; + /* * If this is not a heap-only tuple, there must be an * index entry for this item which will be removed in - * the index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples - * count to remember this. + * the index cleanup. Decrement the + * keep_indexed_tuples count to remember this. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) keep_indexed_tuples--; @@ -2010,11 +2014,12 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, else { vacpage->offsets[vacpage->offsets_free++] = offnum; + /* * If this is not a heap-only tuple, there must be an - * index entry for this item which will be removed in - * the index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples - * count to remember this. + * index entry for this item which will be removed in the + * index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples count + * to remember this. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) keep_indexed_tuples--; @@ -2051,10 +2056,10 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * Also, because we distinguish DEAD and RECENTLY_DEAD tuples * using OldestXmin, which is a rather coarse test, it is quite * possible to have an update chain in which a tuple we think is - * RECENTLY_DEAD links forward to one that is definitely DEAD. - * In such a case the RECENTLY_DEAD tuple must actually be dead, - * but it seems too complicated to try to make VACUUM remove it. - * We treat each contiguous set of RECENTLY_DEAD tuples as a + * RECENTLY_DEAD links forward to one that is definitely DEAD. In + * such a case the RECENTLY_DEAD tuple must actually be dead, but + * it seems too complicated to try to make VACUUM remove it. We + * treat each contiguous set of RECENTLY_DEAD tuples as a * separately movable chain, ignoring any intervening DEAD ones. */ if (((tuple.t_data->t_infomask & HEAP_UPDATED) && @@ -2096,11 +2101,11 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * If this tuple is in the begin/middle of the chain then we * have to move to the end of chain. As with any t_ctid * chase, we have to verify that each new tuple is really the - * descendant of the tuple we came from; however, here we - * need even more than the normal amount of paranoia. - * If t_ctid links forward to a tuple determined to be DEAD, - * then depending on where that tuple is, it might already - * have been removed, and perhaps even replaced by a MOVED_IN + * descendant of the tuple we came from; however, here we need + * even more than the normal amount of paranoia. If t_ctid + * links forward to a tuple determined to be DEAD, then + * depending on where that tuple is, it might already have + * been removed, and perhaps even replaced by a MOVED_IN * tuple. We don't want to include any DEAD tuples in the * chain, so we have to recheck HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum. */ @@ -2116,7 +2121,7 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, OffsetNumber nextOffnum; ItemId nextItemid; HeapTupleHeader nextTdata; - HTSV_Result nextTstatus; + HTSV_Result nextTstatus; nextTid = tp.t_data->t_ctid; priorXmax = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmax(tp.t_data); @@ -2148,10 +2153,11 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, ReleaseBuffer(nextBuf); break; } + /* - * Must check for DEAD or MOVED_IN tuple, too. This - * could potentially update hint bits, so we'd better - * hold the buffer content lock. + * Must check for DEAD or MOVED_IN tuple, too. This could + * potentially update hint bits, so we'd better hold the + * buffer content lock. */ LockBuffer(nextBuf, BUFFER_LOCK_SHARE); nextTstatus = HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum(nextTdata, @@ -2266,7 +2272,7 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, } tp.t_self = vtlp->this_tid; Pbuf = ReadBufferWithStrategy(onerel, - ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tp.t_self)), + ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tp.t_self)), vac_strategy); Ppage = BufferGetPage(Pbuf); Pitemid = PageGetItemId(Ppage, @@ -2350,7 +2356,7 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* Get page to move from */ tuple.t_self = vtmove[ti].tid; Cbuf = ReadBufferWithStrategy(onerel, - ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tuple.t_self)), + ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tuple.t_self)), vac_strategy); /* Get page to move to */ @@ -2375,10 +2381,10 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, &ec, &Ctid, vtmove[ti].cleanVpd); /* - * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, - * this move will generate an additional index entry, - * so increment the rel_indexed_tuples count. - */ + * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, this + * move will generate an additional index entry, so + * increment the rel_indexed_tuples count. + */ if (HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) vacrelstats->rel_indexed_tuples++; @@ -2398,22 +2404,22 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, /* * When we move tuple chains, we may need to move * tuples from a block that we haven't yet scanned in - * the outer walk-along-the-relation loop. Note that we - * can't be moving a tuple from a block that we have - * already scanned because if such a tuple exists, then - * we must have moved the chain along with that tuple - * when we scanned that block. IOW the test of - * (Cbuf != buf) guarantees that the tuple we are - * looking at right now is in a block which is yet to - * be scanned. + * the outer walk-along-the-relation loop. Note that + * we can't be moving a tuple from a block that we + * have already scanned because if such a tuple + * exists, then we must have moved the chain along + * with that tuple when we scanned that block. IOW the + * test of (Cbuf != buf) guarantees that the tuple we + * are looking at right now is in a block which is yet + * to be scanned. * * We maintain two counters to correctly count the * moved-off tuples from blocks that are not yet * scanned (keep_tuples) and how many of them have * index pointers (keep_indexed_tuples). The main - * reason to track the latter is to help verify - * that indexes have the expected number of entries - * when all the dust settles. + * reason to track the latter is to help verify that + * indexes have the expected number of entries when + * all the dust settles. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) keep_indexed_tuples++; @@ -2467,9 +2473,9 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, dst_buffer, dst_page, dst_vacpage, &ec); /* - * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, - * this move will generate an additional index entry, - * so increment the rel_indexed_tuples count. + * If the tuple we are moving is a heap-only tuple, this move will + * generate an additional index entry, so increment the + * rel_indexed_tuples count. */ if (HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(tuple.t_data)) vacrelstats->rel_indexed_tuples++; @@ -2538,11 +2544,12 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, { vacpage->offsets[vacpage->offsets_free++] = off; Assert(keep_tuples > 0); + /* * If this is not a heap-only tuple, there must be an * index entry for this item which will be removed in - * the index cleanup. Decrement the keep_indexed_tuples - * count to remember this. + * the index cleanup. Decrement the + * keep_indexed_tuples count to remember this. */ if (!HeapTupleHeaderIsHeapOnly(htup)) keep_indexed_tuples--; @@ -2594,14 +2601,14 @@ repair_frag(VRelStats *vacrelstats, Relation onerel, * exclusive access to the relation. However, that would require a * lot of extra code to close and re-open the relation, indexes, etc. * For now, a quick hack: record status of current transaction as - * committed, and continue. We force the commit to be synchronous - * so that it's down to disk before we truncate. (Note: tqual.c - * knows that VACUUM FULL always uses sync commit, too.) The - * transaction continues to be shown as running in the ProcArray. + * committed, and continue. We force the commit to be synchronous so + * that it's down to disk before we truncate. (Note: tqual.c knows + * that VACUUM FULL always uses sync commit, too.) The transaction + * continues to be shown as running in the ProcArray. * - * XXX This desperately needs to be revisited. Any failure after - * this point will result in a PANIC "cannot abort transaction nnn, - * it was already committed"! + * XXX This desperately needs to be revisited. Any failure after this + * point will result in a PANIC "cannot abort transaction nnn, it was + * already committed"! */ ForceSyncCommit(); (void) RecordTransactionCommit(); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c index d3aa277ce8..3f7032fbcd 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * We are willing to use at most maintenance_work_mem memory space to keep * track of dead tuples. We initially allocate an array of TIDs of that size, * with an upper limit that depends on table size (this limit ensures we don't - * allocate a huge area uselessly for vacuuming small tables). If the array + * allocate a huge area uselessly for vacuuming small tables). If the array * threatens to overflow, we suspend the heap scan phase and perform a pass of * index cleanup and page compaction, then resume the heap scan with an empty * TID array. @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.101 2007/09/26 20:16:28 alvherre Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.102 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ lazy_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, int nindexes; BlockNumber possibly_freeable; PGRUsage ru0; - TimestampTz starttime = 0; + TimestampTz starttime = 0; pg_rusage_init(&ru0); @@ -212,10 +212,10 @@ lazy_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, (errmsg("relation \"%s.%s\" contains more than \"max_fsm_pages\" pages with useful free space", get_namespace_name(RelationGetNamespace(onerel)), RelationGetRelationName(onerel)), - errhint((vacrelstats->tot_free_pages > vacrelstats->rel_pages * 0.20 ? - /* Only suggest VACUUM FULL if 20% free */ - "Consider using VACUUM FULL on this relation or increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\"." : - "Consider increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\".")))); + errhint((vacrelstats->tot_free_pages > vacrelstats->rel_pages * 0.20 ? + /* Only suggest VACUUM FULL if 20% free */ + "Consider using VACUUM FULL on this relation or increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\"." : + "Consider increasing the configuration parameter \"max_fsm_pages\".")))); /* Update statistics in pg_class */ vac_update_relstats(RelationGetRelid(onerel), @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ lazy_vacuum_rel(Relation onerel, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, get_namespace_name(RelationGetNamespace(onerel)), RelationGetRelationName(onerel), vacrelstats->num_index_scans, - vacrelstats->pages_removed, vacrelstats->rel_pages, - vacrelstats->tuples_deleted, vacrelstats->rel_tuples, + vacrelstats->pages_removed, vacrelstats->rel_pages, + vacrelstats->tuples_deleted, vacrelstats->rel_tuples, pg_rusage_show(&ru0)))); } } @@ -350,9 +350,9 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, * page that someone has just added to the relation and not yet * been able to initialize (see RelationGetBufferForTuple). To * protect against that, release the buffer lock, grab the - * relation extension lock momentarily, and re-lock the buffer. - * If the page is still uninitialized by then, it must be left - * over from a crashed backend, and we can initialize it. + * relation extension lock momentarily, and re-lock the buffer. If + * the page is still uninitialized by then, it must be left over + * from a crashed backend, and we can initialize it. * * We don't really need the relation lock when this is a new or * temp relation, but it's probably not worth the code space to @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, continue; } - /* + /* * Prune all HOT-update chains in this page. * * We count tuples removed by the pruning step as removed by VACUUM. @@ -398,8 +398,8 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, false, false); /* - * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for - * tuples requiring freezing. + * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for tuples + * requiring freezing. */ nfrozen = 0; hastup = false; @@ -421,19 +421,19 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, } /* Redirect items mustn't be touched */ - if (ItemIdIsRedirected(itemid)) - { + if (ItemIdIsRedirected(itemid)) + { hastup = true; /* this page won't be truncatable */ - continue; - } + continue; + } - ItemPointerSet(&(tuple.t_self), blkno, offnum); + ItemPointerSet(&(tuple.t_self), blkno, offnum); /* * DEAD item pointers are to be vacuumed normally; but we don't - * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting - * (at least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just - * freed up a non-HOT tuple). + * count them in tups_vacuumed, else we'd be double-counting (at + * least in the common case where heap_page_prune() just freed up + * a non-HOT tuple). */ if (ItemIdIsDead(itemid)) { @@ -451,6 +451,7 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, switch (HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum(tuple.t_data, OldestXmin, buf)) { case HEAPTUPLE_DEAD: + /* * Ordinarily, DEAD tuples would have been removed by * heap_page_prune(), but it's possible that the tuple @@ -460,17 +461,17 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, * cannot be considered an error condition. * * If the tuple is HOT-updated then it must only be - * removed by a prune operation; so we keep it just as - * if it were RECENTLY_DEAD. Also, if it's a heap-only - * tuple, we choose to keep it, because it'll be a - * lot cheaper to get rid of it in the next pruning pass - * than to treat it like an indexed tuple. + * removed by a prune operation; so we keep it just as if + * it were RECENTLY_DEAD. Also, if it's a heap-only + * tuple, we choose to keep it, because it'll be a lot + * cheaper to get rid of it in the next pruning pass than + * to treat it like an indexed tuple. */ if (HeapTupleIsHotUpdated(&tuple) || HeapTupleIsHeapOnly(&tuple)) nkeep += 1; else - tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ + tupgone = true; /* we can delete the tuple */ break; case HEAPTUPLE_LIVE: /* Tuple is good --- but let's do some validity checks */ @@ -509,8 +510,8 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, hastup = true; /* - * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it - * needs freezing. Note we already have exclusive buffer lock. + * Each non-removable tuple must be checked to see if it needs + * freezing. Note we already have exclusive buffer lock. */ if (heap_freeze_tuple(tuple.t_data, FreezeLimit, InvalidBuffer)) @@ -864,11 +865,11 @@ lazy_truncate_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats) RelationTruncate(onerel, new_rel_pages); /* - * Note: once we have truncated, we *must* keep the exclusive lock - * until commit. The sinval message that will be sent at commit - * (as a result of vac_update_relstats()) must be received by other - * backends, to cause them to reset their rd_targblock values, before - * they can safely access the table again. + * Note: once we have truncated, we *must* keep the exclusive lock until + * commit. The sinval message that will be sent at commit (as a result of + * vac_update_relstats()) must be received by other backends, to cause + * them to reset their rd_targblock values, before they can safely access + * the table again. */ /* @@ -933,9 +934,8 @@ count_nondeletable_pages(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats) /* * We don't insert a vacuum delay point here, because we have an - * exclusive lock on the table which we want to hold for as short - * a time as possible. We still need to check for interrupts - * however. + * exclusive lock on the table which we want to hold for as short a + * time as possible. We still need to check for interrupts however. */ CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/variable.c b/src/backend/commands/variable.c index 8a04a975ca..e4ea35ab53 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/variable.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/variable.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/variable.c,v 1.121 2007/08/04 01:26:53 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/variable.c,v 1.122 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -463,16 +463,16 @@ assign_log_timezone(const char *value, bool doit, GucSource source) { /* * UNKNOWN is the value shown as the "default" for log_timezone in - * guc.c. We interpret it as being a complete no-op; we don't - * change the timezone setting. Note that if there is a known - * timezone setting, we will return that name rather than UNKNOWN - * as the canonical spelling. + * guc.c. We interpret it as being a complete no-op; we don't change + * the timezone setting. Note that if there is a known timezone + * setting, we will return that name rather than UNKNOWN as the + * canonical spelling. * - * During GUC initialization, since the timezone library isn't set - * up yet, pg_get_timezone_name will return NULL and we will leave - * the setting as UNKNOWN. If this isn't overridden from the - * config file then pg_timezone_initialize() will eventually - * select a default value from the environment. + * During GUC initialization, since the timezone library isn't set up + * yet, pg_get_timezone_name will return NULL and we will leave the + * setting as UNKNOWN. If this isn't overridden from the config file + * then pg_timezone_initialize() will eventually select a default + * value from the environment. */ if (doit) { diff --git a/src/backend/commands/view.c b/src/backend/commands/view.c index a6ef94dcef..810d70b37f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/view.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/view.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/view.c,v 1.102 2007/08/27 03:36:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/view.c,v 1.103 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -273,6 +273,7 @@ DefineViewRules(Oid viewOid, Query *viewParse, bool replace) true, replace, list_make1(viewParse)); + /* * Someday: automatic ON INSERT, etc */ @@ -356,8 +357,8 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) RangeVar *view; /* - * Run parse analysis to convert the raw parse tree to a Query. Note - * this also acquires sufficient locks on the source table(s). + * Run parse analysis to convert the raw parse tree to a Query. Note this + * also acquires sufficient locks on the source table(s). * * Since parse analysis scribbles on its input, copy the raw parse tree; * this ensures we don't corrupt a prepared statement, for example. @@ -404,14 +405,14 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) /* * If the user didn't explicitly ask for a temporary view, check whether - * we need one implicitly. We allow TEMP to be inserted automatically - * as long as the CREATE command is consistent with that --- no explicit + * we need one implicitly. We allow TEMP to be inserted automatically as + * long as the CREATE command is consistent with that --- no explicit * schema name. */ view = stmt->view; if (!view->istemp && isViewOnTempTable(viewParse)) { - view = copyObject(view); /* don't corrupt original command */ + view = copyObject(view); /* don't corrupt original command */ view->istemp = true; ereport(NOTICE, (errmsg("view \"%s\" will be a temporary view", diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c b/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c index 3b48a5cf18..9c96d67efd 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c,v 1.92 2007/02/19 02:23:11 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execAmi.c,v 1.93 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -337,12 +337,13 @@ ExecSupportsMarkRestore(NodeTag plantype) return true; case T_Result: + /* - * T_Result only supports mark/restore if it has a child plan - * that does, so we do not have enough information to give a - * really correct answer. However, for current uses it's - * enough to always say "false", because this routine is not - * asked about gating Result plans, only base-case Results. + * T_Result only supports mark/restore if it has a child plan that + * does, so we do not have enough information to give a really + * correct answer. However, for current uses it's enough to + * always say "false", because this routine is not asked about + * gating Result plans, only base-case Results. */ return false; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c b/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c index 72bccd4438..9f63d99d65 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2007, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c,v 1.2 2007/06/11 22:22:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execCurrent.c,v 1.3 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ static ScanState *search_plan_tree(PlanState *node, Oid table_oid); * valid updatable scan of the specified table. */ bool -execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr *cexpr, +execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr * cexpr, ExprContext *econtext, Oid table_oid, ItemPointer current_tid) @@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr *cexpr, char *cursor_name; char *table_name; Portal portal; - QueryDesc *queryDesc; + QueryDesc *queryDesc; ScanState *scanstate; - bool lisnull; - Oid tuple_tableoid; + bool lisnull; + Oid tuple_tableoid; ItemPointer tuple_tid; /* Get the cursor name --- may have to look up a parameter reference */ @@ -85,24 +85,23 @@ execCurrentOf(CurrentOfExpr *cexpr, cursor_name))); /* - * Dig through the cursor's plan to find the scan node. Fail if it's - * not there or buried underneath aggregation. + * Dig through the cursor's plan to find the scan node. Fail if it's not + * there or buried underneath aggregation. */ scanstate = search_plan_tree(ExecGetActivePlanTree(queryDesc), table_oid); if (!scanstate) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_CURSOR_STATE), - errmsg("cursor \"%s\" is not a simply updatable scan of table \"%s\"", - cursor_name, table_name))); + errmsg("cursor \"%s\" is not a simply updatable scan of table \"%s\"", + cursor_name, table_name))); /* - * The cursor must have a current result row: per the SQL spec, it's - * an error if not. We test this at the top level, rather than at - * the scan node level, because in inheritance cases any one table - * scan could easily not be on a row. We want to return false, not - * raise error, if the passed-in table OID is for one of the inactive - * scans. + * The cursor must have a current result row: per the SQL spec, it's an + * error if not. We test this at the top level, rather than at the scan + * node level, because in inheritance cases any one table scan could + * easily not be on a row. We want to return false, not raise error, if + * the passed-in table OID is for one of the inactive scans. */ if (portal->atStart || portal->atEnd) ereport(ERROR, @@ -182,37 +181,37 @@ search_plan_tree(PlanState *node, Oid table_oid) case T_IndexScanState: case T_BitmapHeapScanState: case T_TidScanState: - { - ScanState *sstate = (ScanState *) node; + { + ScanState *sstate = (ScanState *) node; - if (RelationGetRelid(sstate->ss_currentRelation) == table_oid) - return sstate; - break; - } + if (RelationGetRelid(sstate->ss_currentRelation) == table_oid) + return sstate; + break; + } /* * For Append, we must look through the members; watch out for * multiple matches (possible if it was from UNION ALL) */ case T_AppendState: - { - AppendState *astate = (AppendState *) node; - ScanState *result = NULL; - int i; - - for (i = 0; i < astate->as_nplans; i++) { - ScanState *elem = search_plan_tree(astate->appendplans[i], - table_oid); - - if (!elem) - continue; - if (result) - return NULL; /* multiple matches */ - result = elem; + AppendState *astate = (AppendState *) node; + ScanState *result = NULL; + int i; + + for (i = 0; i < astate->as_nplans; i++) + { + ScanState *elem = search_plan_tree(astate->appendplans[i], + table_oid); + + if (!elem) + continue; + if (result) + return NULL; /* multiple matches */ + result = elem; + } + return result; } - return result; - } /* * Result and Limit can be descended through (these are safe diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execMain.c b/src/backend/executor/execMain.c index 485f6ddc1e..90136981fb 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execMain.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execMain.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.298 2007/09/20 17:56:31 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.299 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ static TupleTableSlot *EvalPlanQualNext(EState *estate); static void EndEvalPlanQual(EState *estate); static void ExecCheckRTPerms(List *rangeTable); static void ExecCheckRTEPerms(RangeTblEntry *rte); -static void ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt); +static void ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt * plannedstmt); static void EvalPlanQualStart(evalPlanQual *epq, EState *estate, evalPlanQual *priorepq); static void EvalPlanQualStop(evalPlanQual *epq); @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ ExecCheckRTEPerms(RangeTblEntry *rte) * Check that the query does not imply any writes to non-temp tables. */ static void -ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt) +ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt * plannedstmt) { ListCell *l; @@ -536,8 +536,8 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) /* * Have to lock relations selected FOR UPDATE/FOR SHARE before we - * initialize the plan tree, else we'd be doing a lock upgrade. - * While we are at it, build the ExecRowMark list. + * initialize the plan tree, else we'd be doing a lock upgrade. While we + * are at it, build the ExecRowMark list. */ estate->es_rowMarks = NIL; foreach(l, plannedstmt->rowMarks) @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) /* Add slots for subplans and initplans */ foreach(l, plannedstmt->subplans) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); nSlots += ExecCountSlotsNode(subplan); } @@ -602,23 +602,22 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) estate->es_useEvalPlan = false; /* - * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do - * this before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since + * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do this + * before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries. */ Assert(estate->es_subplanstates == NIL); i = 1; /* subplan indices count from 1 */ foreach(l, plannedstmt->subplans) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); - PlanState *subplanstate; - int sp_eflags; + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate; + int sp_eflags; /* - * A subplan will never need to do BACKWARD scan nor MARK/RESTORE. - * If it is a parameterless subplan (not initplan), we suggest that it - * be prepared to handle REWIND efficiently; otherwise there is no - * need. + * A subplan will never need to do BACKWARD scan nor MARK/RESTORE. If + * it is a parameterless subplan (not initplan), we suggest that it be + * prepared to handle REWIND efficiently; otherwise there is no need. */ sp_eflags = eflags & EXEC_FLAG_EXPLAIN_ONLY; if (bms_is_member(i, plannedstmt->rewindPlanIDs)) @@ -714,11 +713,12 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) j = ExecInitJunkFilter(subplan->plan->targetlist, resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att->tdhasoid, ExecAllocTableSlot(estate->es_tupleTable)); + /* - * Since it must be UPDATE/DELETE, there had better be - * a "ctid" junk attribute in the tlist ... but ctid could - * be at a different resno for each result relation. - * We look up the ctid resnos now and save them in the + * Since it must be UPDATE/DELETE, there had better be a + * "ctid" junk attribute in the tlist ... but ctid could + * be at a different resno for each result relation. We + * look up the ctid resnos now and save them in the * junkfilters. */ j->jf_junkAttNo = ExecFindJunkAttribute(j, "ctid"); @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) rliststate = (List *) ExecInitExpr((Expr *) rlist, planstate); resultRelInfo->ri_projectReturning = ExecBuildProjectionInfo(rliststate, econtext, slot, - resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att); + resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_att); resultRelInfo++; } } @@ -843,8 +843,8 @@ initResultRelInfo(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo, bool doInstrument) { /* - * Check valid relkind ... parser and/or planner should have noticed - * this already, but let's make sure. + * Check valid relkind ... parser and/or planner should have noticed this + * already, but let's make sure. */ switch (resultRelationDesc->rd_rel->relkind) { @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ initResultRelInfo(ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo, * if so it doesn't matter which one we pick.) However, it is sometimes * necessary to fire triggers on other relations; this happens mainly when an * RI update trigger queues additional triggers on other relations, which will - * be processed in the context of the outer query. For efficiency's sake, + * be processed in the context of the outer query. For efficiency's sake, * we want to have a ResultRelInfo for those triggers too; that can avoid * repeated re-opening of the relation. (It also provides a way for EXPLAIN * ANALYZE to report the runtimes of such triggers.) So we make additional @@ -964,15 +964,15 @@ ExecGetTriggerResultRel(EState *estate, Oid relid) /* * Open the target relation's relcache entry. We assume that an - * appropriate lock is still held by the backend from whenever the - * trigger event got queued, so we need take no new lock here. + * appropriate lock is still held by the backend from whenever the trigger + * event got queued, so we need take no new lock here. */ rel = heap_open(relid, NoLock); /* - * Make the new entry in the right context. Currently, we don't need - * any index information in ResultRelInfos used only for triggers, - * so tell initResultRelInfo it's a DELETE. + * Make the new entry in the right context. Currently, we don't need any + * index information in ResultRelInfos used only for triggers, so tell + * initResultRelInfo it's a DELETE. */ oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->es_query_cxt); rInfo = makeNode(ResultRelInfo); @@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ ExecEndPlan(PlanState *planstate, EState *estate) */ foreach(l, estate->es_subplanstates) { - PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); ExecEndNode(subplanstate); } @@ -2398,15 +2398,15 @@ EvalPlanQualStart(evalPlanQual *epq, EState *estate, evalPlanQual *priorepq) ExecCreateTupleTable(estate->es_tupleTable->size); /* - * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do - * this before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since + * Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do this + * before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries. */ Assert(epqstate->es_subplanstates == NIL); foreach(l, estate->es_plannedstmt->subplans) { - Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); - PlanState *subplanstate; + Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate; subplanstate = ExecInitNode(subplan, epqstate, 0); @@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ EvalPlanQualStart(evalPlanQual *epq, EState *estate, evalPlanQual *priorepq) * * This is a cut-down version of ExecutorEnd(); basically we want to do most * of the normal cleanup, but *not* close result relations (which we are - * just sharing from the outer query). We do, however, have to close any + * just sharing from the outer query). We do, however, have to close any * trigger target relations that got opened, since those are not shared. */ static void @@ -2445,7 +2445,7 @@ EvalPlanQualStop(evalPlanQual *epq) foreach(l, epqstate->es_subplanstates) { - PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); + PlanState *subplanstate = (PlanState *) lfirst(l); ExecEndNode(subplanstate); } diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execQual.c b/src/backend/executor/execQual.c index 53ddc65819..8c917c8418 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execQual.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execQual.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execQual.c,v 1.223 2007/10/24 18:37:08 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execQual.c,v 1.224 2007/11/15 21:14:34 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -65,11 +65,11 @@ static Datum ExecEvalAggref(AggrefExprState *aggref, static Datum ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalScalarVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalWholeRowVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalWholeRowSlow(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalConst(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalParam(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ static Datum ExecEvalCoalesce(CoalesceExprState *coalesceExpr, static Datum ExecEvalMinMax(MinMaxExprState *minmaxExpr, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); -static Datum ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); +static Datum ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState * xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalNullIf(FuncExprState *nullIfExpr, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); @@ -147,14 +147,14 @@ static Datum ExecEvalFieldStore(FieldStoreState *fstate, static Datum ExecEvalRelabelType(GenericExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); -static Datum ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState *iostate, - ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); -static Datum ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState *astate, - ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); +static Datum ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState * iostate, + ExprContext *econtext, + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); +static Datum ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState * astate, + ExprContext *econtext, + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalCurrentOfExpr(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); /* ---------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -489,21 +489,21 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, * Scalar variable case. * * If it's a user attribute, check validity (bogus system attnums will - * be caught inside slot_getattr). What we have to check for here - * is the possibility of an attribute having been changed in type - * since the plan tree was created. Ideally the plan would get - * invalidated and not re-used, but until that day arrives, we need - * defenses. Fortunately it's sufficient to check once on the first - * time through. + * be caught inside slot_getattr). What we have to check for here is + * the possibility of an attribute having been changed in type since + * the plan tree was created. Ideally the plan would get invalidated + * and not re-used, but until that day arrives, we need defenses. + * Fortunately it's sufficient to check once on the first time + * through. * * Note: we allow a reference to a dropped attribute. slot_getattr * will force a NULL result in such cases. * * Note: ideally we'd check typmod as well as typid, but that seems - * impractical at the moment: in many cases the tupdesc will have - * been generated by ExecTypeFromTL(), and that can't guarantee to - * generate an accurate typmod in all cases, because some expression - * node types don't carry typmod. + * impractical at the moment: in many cases the tupdesc will have been + * generated by ExecTypeFromTL(), and that can't guarantee to generate + * an accurate typmod in all cases, because some expression node types + * don't carry typmod. */ if (attnum > 0) { @@ -522,9 +522,9 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, if (variable->vartype != attr->atttypid) ereport(ERROR, (errmsg("attribute %d has wrong type", attnum), - errdetail("Table has type %s, but query expects %s.", - format_type_be(attr->atttypid), - format_type_be(variable->vartype)))); + errdetail("Table has type %s, but query expects %s.", + format_type_be(attr->atttypid), + format_type_be(variable->vartype)))); } } @@ -570,10 +570,10 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, * looking at the output of a subplan that includes resjunk * columns. (XXX it would be nice to verify that the extra * columns are all marked resjunk, but we haven't got access to - * the subplan targetlist here...) Resjunk columns should always + * the subplan targetlist here...) Resjunk columns should always * be at the end of a targetlist, so it's sufficient to ignore - * them here; but we need to use ExecEvalWholeRowSlow to get - * rid of them in the eventual output tuples. + * them here; but we need to use ExecEvalWholeRowSlow to get rid + * of them in the eventual output tuples. */ var_tupdesc = lookup_rowtype_tupdesc(variable->vartype, -1); @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ ExecEvalVar(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, Form_pg_attribute sattr = slot_tupdesc->attrs[i]; if (vattr->atttypid == sattr->atttypid) - continue; /* no worries */ + continue; /* no worries */ if (!vattr->attisdropped) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), @@ -737,12 +737,12 @@ ExecEvalWholeRowSlow(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, *isNull = false; /* - * Currently, the only case handled here is stripping of trailing - * resjunk fields, which we do in a slightly chintzy way by just - * adjusting the tuple's natts header field. Possibly there will someday - * be a need for more-extensive rearrangements, in which case it'd - * be worth disassembling and reassembling the tuple (perhaps use a - * JunkFilter for that?) + * Currently, the only case handled here is stripping of trailing resjunk + * fields, which we do in a slightly chintzy way by just adjusting the + * tuple's natts header field. Possibly there will someday be a need for + * more-extensive rearrangements, in which case it'd be worth + * disassembling and reassembling the tuple (perhaps use a JunkFilter for + * that?) */ Assert(variable->vartype != RECORDOID); var_tupdesc = lookup_rowtype_tupdesc(variable->vartype, -1); @@ -2577,9 +2577,9 @@ ExecEvalArray(ArrayExprState *astate, ExprContext *econtext, /* * If all items were null or empty arrays, return an empty array; - * otherwise, if some were and some weren't, raise error. (Note: - * we must special-case this somehow to avoid trying to generate - * a 1-D array formed from empty arrays. It's not ideal...) + * otherwise, if some were and some weren't, raise error. (Note: we + * must special-case this somehow to avoid trying to generate a 1-D + * array formed from empty arrays. It's not ideal...) */ if (haveempty) { @@ -2844,17 +2844,17 @@ ExecEvalMinMax(MinMaxExprState *minmaxExpr, ExprContext *econtext, * ---------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Datum -ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, +ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState * xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone) { - XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) xmlExpr->xprstate.expr; - text *result; - StringInfoData buf; - Datum value; - bool isnull; - ListCell *arg; + XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) xmlExpr->xprstate.expr; + text *result; + StringInfoData buf; + Datum value; + bool isnull; + ListCell *arg; ListCell *narg; - int i; + int i; if (isDone) *isDone = ExprSingleResult; @@ -2864,11 +2864,11 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, { case IS_XMLCONCAT: { - List *values = NIL; + List *values = NIL; foreach(arg, xmlExpr->args) { - ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); + ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); value = ExecEvalExpr(e, econtext, &isnull, NULL); if (!isnull) @@ -2888,8 +2888,8 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, i = 0; forboth(arg, xmlExpr->named_args, narg, xexpr->arg_names) { - ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); - char *argname = strVal(lfirst(narg)); + ExprState *e = (ExprState *) lfirst(arg); + char *argname = strVal(lfirst(narg)); value = ExecEvalExpr(e, econtext, &isnull, NULL); if (!isnull) @@ -2912,8 +2912,8 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLPARSE: { - ExprState *e; - text *data; + ExprState *e; + text *data; bool preserve_whitespace; /* arguments are known to be text, bool */ @@ -2941,8 +2941,8 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLPI: { - ExprState *e; - text *arg; + ExprState *e; + text *arg; /* optional argument is known to be text */ Assert(list_length(xmlExpr->args) <= 1); @@ -2968,9 +2968,9 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLROOT: { - ExprState *e; - xmltype *data; - text *version; + ExprState *e; + xmltype *data; + text *version; int standalone; /* arguments are known to be xml, text, int */ @@ -3003,7 +3003,7 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_XMLSERIALIZE: { - ExprState *e; + ExprState *e; /* argument type is known to be xml */ Assert(list_length(xmlExpr->args) == 1); @@ -3021,7 +3021,7 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, case IS_DOCUMENT: { - ExprState *e; + ExprState *e; /* optional argument is known to be xml */ Assert(list_length(xmlExpr->args) == 1); @@ -3043,7 +3043,7 @@ ExecEvalXml(XmlExprState *xmlExpr, ExprContext *econtext, result = NULL; else { - int len = buf.len + VARHDRSZ; + int len = buf.len + VARHDRSZ; result = palloc(len); SET_VARSIZE(result, len); @@ -3431,9 +3431,9 @@ ExecEvalFieldSelect(FieldSelectState *fstate, /* Check for dropped column, and force a NULL result if so */ if (fieldnum <= 0 || - fieldnum > tupDesc->natts) /* should never happen */ - elog(ERROR, "attribute number %d exceeds number of columns %d", - fieldnum, tupDesc->natts); + fieldnum > tupDesc->natts) /* should never happen */ + elog(ERROR, "attribute number %d exceeds number of columns %d", + fieldnum, tupDesc->natts); attr = tupDesc->attrs[fieldnum - 1]; if (attr->attisdropped) { @@ -3587,7 +3587,7 @@ ExecEvalRelabelType(GenericExprState *exprstate, * ---------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Datum -ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState *iostate, +ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState * iostate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone) { @@ -3621,7 +3621,7 @@ ExecEvalCoerceViaIO(CoerceViaIOState *iostate, * ---------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Datum -ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState *astate, +ExecEvalArrayCoerceExpr(ArrayCoerceExprState * astate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone) { @@ -3820,7 +3820,7 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) if (naggs != aggstate->numaggs) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR), - errmsg("aggregate function calls cannot be nested"))); + errmsg("aggregate function calls cannot be nested"))); } else { @@ -3980,8 +3980,8 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) { CoerceViaIO *iocoerce = (CoerceViaIO *) node; CoerceViaIOState *iostate = makeNode(CoerceViaIOState); - Oid iofunc; - bool typisvarlena; + Oid iofunc; + bool typisvarlena; iostate->xprstate.evalfunc = (ExprStateEvalFunc) ExecEvalCoerceViaIO; iostate->arg = ExecInitExpr(iocoerce->arg, parent); @@ -4268,11 +4268,11 @@ ExecInitExpr(Expr *node, PlanState *parent) break; case T_XmlExpr: { - XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; - XmlExprState *xstate = makeNode(XmlExprState); - List *outlist; - ListCell *arg; - int i; + XmlExpr *xexpr = (XmlExpr *) node; + XmlExprState *xstate = makeNode(XmlExprState); + List *outlist; + ListCell *arg; + int i; xstate->xprstate.evalfunc = (ExprStateEvalFunc) ExecEvalXml; xs |